Copyright: Copyright 1997 Macromedia, Inc.


New Interface Features

•	Customizable keyboard shortcuts - Make FreeHand work the way you do using customizable keyboard shortcuts, or assign whole keyboard shortcut sets from other applications such as Photoshop, QuarkXPress, Illustrator, and CorelDRAW.

•	Customizable toolbars - Customize your FreeHand environment for quick access to your most commonly used functions. Add, delete, and rearrange tools to create custom toolbars. Rearrange toolbars or move them onto the pasteboard as floating toolbars.

•	Customizable views - Create, save, and name workspace views to recall them easily.

•	Product integration - Use FreeHand more smoothly and efficiently than ever with Photoshop, QuarkXPress, Illustrator, CorelDRAW, and Acrobat.

•	Faster display - Take advantage of accelerated screen redraw and image display for maximum efficiency. Use Fast Preview and Fast Keyline for optimal redraw.

•	Align to page - Align one or more objects in relation to page dimensions.

•	Windows enhancements-Use time-saving wizards to make document setup quick and easy. Shortcut menus are available using the right mouse button. The Enhanced Windows Metafile format provides better integration with Microsoft Office.

•	Clipart Viewer - Browse FreeHand clipart and drag and drop to import the artwork directly into your document.

•	Tutorials - The Using FreeHand manual has many tutorials that emphasize common activities and demonstrate new FreeHand 8 features with easy step-by-step instructions and tutorial artwork.

•	Enhanced Online Help- FreeHand Help now includes ShowMe movies and movie clips that demonstrate FreeHand activities and concepts.

•	Web registration - Register your FreeHand product instantly on the World Wide Web to receive a wide range of benefits.


New Editing Features

•	Lens fills - Dynamic lens produce effects such as transparency, magnify, lighten, darken, monochrome, and invert. The transparency lens produces a see-through effects and tints. The magnify lens automatically creates live, detail views or insets with a movable focus point. The lighten, darken, and monochrome lenses create overlays for powerful imaging effects.

•	Emboss tool- Create button effects and depth effects using emobss, chisel, deboss, ridge, and quilt.

•	Shadow tool - Create soft- and hard-edged drop shadows directly in FreeHand.

•	Mirror tool - Create symmetrical objects and complex circular arrays.

•	Graphic Hose - Build a sequenced library of objects and interactively spray duplicates of varied sizes anywhere in your document.

•	Freeform tool- Push, pull, or reshape paths interactively without using Bezier control points.

•	Divide operation - Cut selected paths into section defined by areas of overlap.

•	Transform handles in workspace - Double-click an object with the Pointer tool to display eight handles and a moveable centerpoint used for transforming, rotating, or scaling the object.

•	Rasterize in place - Convert images to bitmap format directly in FreeHand without exporting or importing.

•	Animated blends - Release your blends to layers for quick export as Flash animations.

•	Preset graphic styles - Use libraries of preset stroke and fill styles for fast and efficient designing. View style previews in the Styles panel that you can drag and drop onto objects. Import and export graphic style libraries.

•	Hide Selection/Show All - Hide selected objects from one or more layers, then choose Show all to display them again.

•	Show fill for new open paths - With this preference checked, open paths show assigned fills.

•	Paste in front - Insert objects within a stacked order of objects, in front of an object within a group, or in front of an object within clipping paths.


New Text Features

•	Improved font interface - The font pop-up displays font previews as you scroll the list.

•	Floating text ruler - The text ruler stays visible at the top of the screen when a text block continues beyond the top of the current workspace.

•	Show Invisible Characters - In the Text Editor, view hidden characters representing text elements such as spaces, forced returns, and the end of a line, column, or paragraph when this option is checked.

•	Automatic case-conversion formats - Apply lowercase, uppercase, small caps, title, or sentence capitalization format to text.

•	Improved text on a path - Spacing between characters is automatically adjusted to keep text legible when attached to curving paths.

•	Text Style options - Text style elements now include effects such as highlight, shadow, strike-through, and underline; range kerning; baseline shift; hang punctuation; and paragraph rules.


New Color Features

•	Color Management - Choose from three color management options or choose None to turn off color management.

°	Kodak Digital Science (KDS) - Calibrate your FreeHand environment to match your output device using profiles approved by the International Color Consortium.

°	Kodak Color Tables - Use FreeHand’s color conversion tables, which interpolate color values using selected KDS data, to manage color without the KDS extensions installed on your computer.

°	Adjust Display Colors - Adjust color values visually to match colors from a color swatch book or printed sample.

•	Add to Color List button - Conveniently name new colors, designate them as spot or process, and add them to the Color List as you create them in the Color Mixer or Tints panel.

•	Color Consistency - Convert the colors in a document to CMYK, RGB, or both in Freehand when exporting non-Photoshop EPS files, PDF files, and Illustrator 7.x files.

•	Web Safe Color Library - Design with these colors for consistent cross-platform display on 8-bit (or higher) monitors. Use it with the GIF export Web Palette option or the Macromedia Flash export.


New Printing Features

•	Collect for output - Gather all the external images and fonts necessary for printing your doument and place them in a common location.

•	Variable-Scale Printing - Set independent horizontal and vertical scale values when printing.

•	Improved PPD Parsing - Load and read more PPDs than in previous versions, including PPDs following Adobe’s Specification 4.x.

•	Other printing enhancements:

°	Convert text at print time for non-PostScript printing.

°	Choose predefined halftones available with Windows PCL printer drivers.

°	Print using any *Patchfile from a PPD.


New Import / Export Features

•	Export Again - Bypass the Export dialog box as you update the most recently exported file.

•	Color Consistency - Convert the colors in a document to CMYK, RGB, or both in FreeHand when exporting non-Photoshop EPS files, PDF files, and Illustrator 7.x files.

•	QuarkXPress EPS export format - Exporting a QuarkXPress EPS from either Macintosh or Windows generates a cross-platform, 32-bit color TIFF preview.

•	Illustrator 7 compatibility - FreeHand supports import of Illustrator 7 files by recognizing RGB color space, reading bitmap images, converting Illustrator’s Pattern Swatch into FreeHand styles, and simulating vertical text. FreeHand also exports to Illustrator 7 format.

•	DCS 2 (Desktop Color Separation) - Import and export preview color separation information in a single EPS file.

•	CorelDRAW 7 CDR import filter - Import uncompressed CDR files created with CorelDRAW 7 for Windows.

•	Macromedia Flash export - Export your documents as Flash animations using pages and layers.

•	Improved PNG format support - Import Portable Network Graphic (PNG) files, retaining their native format, directly into FreeHand, hen working with web-oriented applications.

•	Enhanced RTF Import/Export - FreeHand 8’s RTF format is compatible with Microsoft Word 8 and Microsoft Office 97. It supports several new text attributes to maintain FreeHand’s viability as a page-layout program.

•	Launch-and-edit warning - An optional warning asks if you are sure you want to open an image editor when you double-click an imported file, avoiding frustrating and time-consuming accidental launches.


New
New (File menu)

Creates a new document based on the default template.

Changing document settings

Use the Document Inspector to change settings: page size and orientation, bleed, printer resolution, and number of pages.

Choose File > Preferences to customize editing and display settings.

Changing the default document

To change the default document settings, open a new document, make changes to the settings, and then save the document with the name “defaults.FT8” as a FreeHand Template and place it in the FreeHand folder. To save your old defaults, rename it before creating a new default document.

Change the document used as the default by changing the Document > “Default template for new documents” preference.

  Related Topics


Open
Open (File menu)

Opens an existing file.

Use Open to open an existing document or template, to open a document created in a previous version, or to open a file saved by another application in a format supported by FreeHand. Only some formats are fully editable.

To open a template or a file created by another application, select a file type from the “List files of type” list in the Open dialog box before you look for the file.

Note	When opening a file containing fonts not installed on your system, a dialog box prompts you to substitute fonts.

  Related Topics


Close
 Close (File menu)

Closes the active document or view without exiting FreeHand.

When multiple documents or views of a document are open, only  the active document or view closes.

  Related Topics


Save
 Save (File menu)

Permanently saves changes made to a document.

When saving for the first time

The Save dialog box opens and prompts you to name the document and specify the location and file format

  Related Topics


Save as
 Save As (File menu)

Use the Save As dialog box to do the following:

•	Save for the first time.

•	Create a copy of a document with a new location or name.

•	Change the file format of a document.

To save a document with a different format: Specify either document or template format in the Save as type pop-up.

  Related Topics


Revert
 Revert (File menu)

Erases all changes made to the document since the last save. You cannot undo the Revert command.

Use Revert when there are too many changes to use the Undo command.

  Related Topics


Import
Import (File menu)

Imports a graphic file created in another application or in an earlier version of FreeHand.

Click here for a list of file formats that FreeHand can import.


Importing a file into FreeHand

1	Choose File > Import.

2	Select a file type from the Files of type pop-up

3	Select the file to import and click Open.

When importing HPGL and DXF graphics, FreeHand displays an additional dialog box for setting format-specific options.

4	Use the imports cursor to position the upper- left corner of the graphic and click the mouse button.

The object places at its default size.

Click the mouse button and drag the import cursor to scale the graphic as you place it.

  Related Topics


Export
Export (File menu)

Saves your FreeHand file in a format best for opening or importing into another application.

Options

Save as type: This pop-up displays available file formats for exporting.

Selected objects only: Check to export only the currently selected objects.

Pages: Specify a page range when exporting a document in EPS or Adobe Illustrator format. Each page exports as a separate EPS or Adobe Illustrator file.

  Related Topics


Export Again
Export Again(File menu)

Choose File > Export Again to update the most recent exported document.

Export and Export Again are similar to Save As and Save, in that both Export and Save As require a new document name, while both Export Again and Save update an already-named document.

If you choose Export Again, the Export dialog box appears if the document you are updating is not a version of the most recently exported document. When Selected objects only is checked, Export Again continues to export selected objects only.

  Related Topics


Exporting bitmap images

Use MIX to convert objects into one of several bitmap formats. MIX Xtras rasterize FreeHand vector graphics on export.

Options for exporting bitmap formats are defined in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box. Display this dialog box in two ways:

•	Choose the Import / Export preference and click the Bitmap Export button.

•	With a bitmap format selected, click the Setup button in the Export dialog box.

Format-specific export options

Click a format from the list below for format-specific options when exporting:

•	 BMP

•	 GIF

•	 JPEG

•	 PNG

•	 Targa (TGA)

•	 TIFF

•	 xRes LRG

  Related Topics


How to Export in a Bitmap Format

1	Select the object you wish to export.

2	Choose File > Export.

3	Choose a bitmap format from the Format pop-up.

Bitmap formats that FreeHand can export are: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TGA, TIFF, and LRG.

4	Click Options to set options, including resolution, anti-aliasing, and alpha channel.

5	Click More to make format-specific export settings.

For more information on format-specific options, see help on a specific formats.

6	Click OK.

7	Click OK.

8	Select a destination, enter a name for the file, and click Export.


Report
Report (File menu)

Use Document Report to fill out documentation for your own prepress review, or as a guide to fill out documentation required by your service bureau. Choose from among the options available to generate a detailed description of your document in a report format. Service providers can print out the report before running your job to determine the file’s exact contents and avoid costly mistakes.

Choose File > Report to display the Document Report dialog box which has nine categories:

•	Document—Includes such document-level options as the file name, location, and size.

•	Pages—Includes options describing the dimensions and orientation of each page.

•	Objects—Includes such object-level options as assigned names and notes, halftone settings, and status of imported images.

•	Fonts—Includes specifications for each font in the document.

•	Text blocks—Includes options for reporting the font, color, location of the bounding box, line and paragraph count, and first line of text for each text block.

•	Layers—Includes options describing each layer’s status and position.

•	Styles—Includes a description of each object style and paragraph style assigned.

•	Colors—Includes options for color name, value, and separation status for each color. With Color Management turned on, your settings in the Color Management Preferences dialog box appear in the report.

•	Output options—Describes the output options chosen in the Output Options dialog box.


Document Report: Document

Option	Includes in the report
File name	The name of the FreeHand file
Directory	The folder in which the file resides
File size	The size of the file in kilobytes
File Access	The status of the file as locked (Read only) or unlocked (Read and Write)
Creation date	The original creation date of the file
Modification date	The most recent modification date of the file
Document units	The unit of measurement selected
Total pages	The total number of pages


Document Report: Pages

Option	Includes in the report
Page location	The location on the pasteboard for each page
Dimensions	The page size for each page
Bleed size	The bleed size for each page
Orientation	The orientation for each page
Page type	The page type of each page


Document Report: Objects

Option	Includes in the report
Set Note	All names and notes assigned to objects in the document using the Set Note Xtra
Halftone	The halftone screen type, angle, and frequency for each object-level halftone in the file
Placed file	For each placed file, the embed/link status, file type, folder location, file name (original file name for embedded TIFFs), kilobyte size of placed file, and the name of the color-matching profile that is associated with the image


Document Report: Fonts

Option	Includes in the report
Font name	The font name of each used font
Font PS name	The PostScript font name sent down from FreeHand to the printer
Font file format	The format type for each font
Font style	The style for each font
Size	The size in points for each used font


Document Report: Text blocks

Option	Includes in the report
Fonts used	The fonts used in each text block
Colors used	Colors used in each text block
Bounding box	Location of the bounding box for each text block. Gives the x and y coordinates for each corner of the bounding box, working clockwise from the bottom-right corner
Line count	The number of lines in each text block
Paragraph count	The number of paragraphs in each text block
First line	Prints the first line of text in each text block


Document Report: Layers

Option	Includes in the report
Foreground layers	The name of each foreground layer
Background layers	The name of each background layer
Visibility	The status of each layer‘s visibility
Editing color	The edit highlight color assigned for each layer
Access	The status of each layer as locked or unlocked
Preview status	The status of each layer as Preview or Keyline


Document Report: Styles

Option	Includes in the report
Graphic styles	The name and description of all graphic styles assigned
Text styles	The name and description of all paragraph styles assigned


Document Report: Colors

Option	Includes in the report
Named colors	The color name and values for each named color used
Separations	The selected output options for each color plate and the status of Color Management


Document Report: Output Options

Option	Includes in the report
Invisible layers	Whether invisible layers are to be printed
Split paths	Whether complex paths are to be split during printing
Image data	Whether image files are to be exported in ASCII or binary format, and whether OPI comments will be exported or printed
Convert image	Whether RGB images are to be converted to CMYK images upon export or composite print
Max color steps	The maximum number of allowed color steps for gradient fills
Flatness	The degree of flatness specified


How to generate a document report

1	Choose File > Report.

2	Click the radio buttons to the left of each category to display the available options.

3	Customize your report by checking and unchecking options in each category.

Hold down Control and click any of the Options checkboxes to toggle all displayed options on or off in a selected category.

4	Click Report to display your report on screen.

Click Print to print the report.

Click Save to save the report as an ASCII text file.


Collect for output
Collect for Output (File menu)

The Collect for Output command gathers components needed to print the current document and copies those components to a common location. Use Collect for Output when preparing a document to send to a service bureau. Collect for Output saves a copy of the following components:

•	The original FreeHand document

•	Each linked graphic

•	A FreeHand document report

•	All fonts in the document except fonts embedded in EPS files

•	The print set file chosen in the Print Setup dialog box at the time of collection

•	The PPD chosen in the Print Setup dialog box at the time of collection

  Related Topics


To use Collect for Output:

1	Choose File > Collect for Output.

If you have not saved the FreeHand document, a dialog box will prompt you to do so. Canceling this dialog box stops the Collect for Output process.

2	In the Document Report dialog box, choose items you want in the document report, and click Report (Macintosh) or OK (Windows).

3	In the Save dialog box, type the name of the report file, choose a destination for the collected materials, and click OK.

All collected materials, including the newly generated document report, are copied to the location you choose.

Note	License agreements vary from font to font. Before distributing any font, make certain that the font’s license agreement gives you the right to do so.


Page Setup
Printer Setup

Set options to control how the document is printed. The available options depend on the type of printer used. The settings are saved with the document.

Note	In some cases, the options in the Printer Setup dialog box are overridden by the settings in the FreeHand Print Options dialog box.

Settings in Printer Setup apply to the document when you choose a non-PostScript printer.

Common Page Setup options

•	Paper: Click to choose standard page sizes or click the pop-up to choose custom sizes supported by your printer.

•	Layout: Change this option to print one (1 Up), two (2 Up), or four (4 Up) pages from the document on one piece of paper.

•	Reduce or Enlarge: Enter a percentage to reduce or enlarge the document when you print.

•	Orientation: Choose whether the document is printed in portrait or landscape format.

The options listed here are common printer options. Consult the documentation for the printer you are using for specific printer setup options.

  Related Topics


Print
 Print (File menu)

Opens the Print dialog box.

Click an element below for more information: (Resize the help window to view the entire graphic.)

  Related Topics


Displays the system printer. Choose to change printers at any time. The printer is saved with the document or template.


Displays printer properties provided for the selected printer.


Print the entire document, the current page, a specific page range, or only selected objects.


Check to print only the currently selected objects.


Specifies the number of printed copies.


Composite: Choose to print the active document on one page.

Separations: Choose to print each spot and process color ink on a separate page. Each color defined in Print Setup > Separations outputs as a separate page.


Check to save the file as a PostScript file. With Print to file checked, click OK to open the Print to File dialog box and set options.


Select preset or custom print setup configurations. Create and save printer settings in the Print Setup dialog box.


Click to save your custom settings.


Click to display and select available PPDs.


Toggle between using a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) and using the defaults.


Select and enter a number to print at a percentage of the document’s actual size, or select Fit to Paper to force the document to fit on the current page size.


Enter a percentage value to print an illustration larger or smaller than actual size.


Check to print a large illustration in one-page sections. Choose from Manual or Automatic tiling.


Displays the current settings chosen in the Print Setup and Output Options dialog boxes.


Select a UserPrep file.


Displays a preview of the document as it will print.

Use the controls below the print preview window to change pages or toggle between Preview mode, Keyline mode, or X-box mode.

Note	PostScript and Custom strokes and fills do not display in the Print Preview as they will print.


Check to convert all spot colors to their closest process color equivalents at print time. This does not affect the document.


Indicates a separation will print for that ink. A checkmark in this column indicates the ink will print. A dash indicates the ink will not print.


Indicates if an ink will overprint. A checkmark indicates overprinting and a dash indicates knocking out, unless you have applied an object-level override. A diamond indicates an overprint threshold has been set for a specific ink.

Click to change the status.


Displays the screen angle for an ink. Click to change.


Displays a list of all the spot or process colors used.

When printing separations, each color in this list prints to a separate page.


Displays optimized screen angle (lpi) and resolution (dpi) settings from the selected PPD file. Some devices support entering custom values for screen ruling and resolution.

Choose Other to enter custom settings.


Overrides object-level halftone settings for the current print setting.


Lists available transfer functions used to modify halftone dot values sent to your output device. The options are based on the information in the selected PPD.


Enlarges the boundaries of all Basic strokes and fills to compensate for slight misregistration.


Prrint Setup > Imaging
Print Setup > Imaging

Use the Imaging tab of the Print Setup dialog box to define imaging options for output.

Click an element below for more information:


Separation names: Check to print the color name on the outer edge of the paper when printing separations.

File name and date: Check to print the file name and the current date.

Crop marks: Check to print crop marks showing the edge of the page.

Registration marks: Check to print marks to aid in aligning separated color plates.

Note	Choose a paper size large enough to accommodate these options, which print outside the border of the document page.


Controls whether the emulsion is on the top (up) or bottom (down) when looking at the right-reading side of your film.


Controls whether a document prints as a positive or negative image.


Print Setup > Paper Setup

Use the Paper Setup tab of the Print Setup dialog box to define paper size and orientation.

Note	Settings made in Print Setup override those made in the Printer setup dialog box.

Click an element below for more information:


Appears when printing to an imagesetter supporting custom page sizes.

Check transverse to rotate your entire document by 90 degrees on the imagesetter.


Lists available paper sizes for the selected PPD. This pop-up is disabled when no PPD is selected.


Control the orientation of your page:

•	Automatic: Check when you have pages with different page sizes and orientations.

•	Tall: Document prints with the narrowest side as the top.

•	Wide: Document prints with the widest side as the top.


Color Management dialog
Color Management

Color management is the process of maintaining color consistency throughout a workflow, from your monitor to the final product. As you design color illustrations in FreeHand, naturally you want the colors of your final product to match the colors you see on your monitor.

However, monitors display colors using additive RGB color, while printing presses recreate colors using subtractive CMYK color. Because the RGB gamut, or range of colors, is much larger than the CMYK gamut, some colors projected on a monitor can only be approximated in print.

Illustrations typically pass through one or more electronic devices or software applications on the way to final output. Printing a FreeHand document to a local printer, for example, involves FreeHand, your computer’s monitor and operating system, and the printer. Color interpretation from one device or application to another can vary. Even colors in artwork created strictly for the Internet can vary from monitor to monitor.

Furthermore, some elements of a FreeHand illustration may come from another electronic device or another software application. One device or application’s interpretation of colors may differ from that of another device or application. Even between devices or applications of the same type—or even the same brand— color interpretation may vary due to age, wear, current settings, and other factors.

This section describes each option for managing colors in FreeHand. To use color management, choose a Colors > “Color Management” preference option. Clicking on Color Management in the Print dialog box also displays the color management options. If you do not want to use color management, choose None from the pop-up.


Choose one of the following color management options:

None: Select if you do not want to use color management.

Adjust Display Colors: Adjust color values visually to match colors from a color swatch book or printed samples, or use specific numeric values.

Kodak Color Tables: Use FreeHand’s RGB-to-CMYK and CMYK-to-RGB color conversion tables to manage colors without Kodak Digital Science (KDS) extensions installed on your computer. The conversion tables use selected data from KDS extensions and interpolate color values during conversion.

Kodak Digital Science: Use the Kodak Digital Science (KDS) monitor profiles, separation-printer profiles, and composite printer profiles information to include FreeHand in your color management strategy.


Based upon the model of your monitor, choose an ICC-compatible monitor profile or choose a custom monitor profile. Choose File > Preferences > Colors to choose a monitor profile from the Monitor pop-up.


Monitor simulates: Select which output device is the most important target for matching color. The monitor displays RGB colors based upon the monitor profile. However, if the Monitor simulates setting is either the Composite printer or the Separations printer, then FreeHand uses the appropriate printer profile to adjust the RGB colors.

Composite printer: Select the color profile to use for your composite printer.

Separations printer: Select the color profile to use for your separations printer.


With Composite simulates separations checked, set the Monitor simulates setting to Separations printer so the monitor displays the colors to match the output of the separations printer. Composite simulates separations bases composite printing on the separations printer profile, thus overriding the composite printer profile.


Advanced settings.


Using Adjust Display Colors

Using profiles and color conversion to manage colors

Using Kodak Digital Science profiles to manage colors

Using Kodak Color Tables

Color Management of RGB Images


Using Adjust Display Colors

Use Adjust Display Colors to calibrate monitor colors visually to match sample output colors or numerically to match specific color values. For example, use colors from a swatchbook as sample colors. To match monitor colors with a printer’s output, print sample colors on the printer and compare the printed output with the screen colors. This color management option is simpler than Kodak Digital Science, but much less accurate.

Note	FreeHand 8’s Adjust Display Colors option is the same as the Adjust Display Colors option in FreeHand 4, 5, and 5.5.

To calibrate your monitor using Adjust Display Colors:

1	Choose a set of test colors to which you want to calibrate your monitor.

Use a color swatchbook or print sample colors from the target printer.

2	Choose Adjust Display Colors in the Colors > “Color Management Type” preference.

The Calibrate button appears under the pop-up.

3	Click Calibrate to display the Display Color Setup dialog box.

4	Click any color in the dialog box to display the Windows Color dialog box.

5	Hold color samples from the output device or color swatchbook next to the color on the screen to compare and adjust the on-screen color to match the sample.


Using profiles and color conversion to manage colors

Generally, a thorough color management strategy has seven steps:

1	Specify colors you want to use.

2	Calibrate your monitor.

3	Measure colors you want to use.

4	Build or specify profiles for each device in the workflow.

5	Convert RGB colors to CMYK colors.

6	Print proofs to the output device.

7	Print the final output.

A color management system such as Kodak Digital Science or Apple ColorSync ties these steps together for effective color management.

Using a color management system requires an understanding of color management that exceeds the scope of this section. If your task requires color management and the concept is new to you, we recommend researching the topic before using the Kodak Digital Science option.

Building or specifying profiles

A profile describes a device’s behavior regarding colors. It is created by measuring the output range of a particular color device under controlled conditions.

When a document requires extremely accurate color reproduction, sophisticated measuring instruments, such as spectrophotometers or colorimeters, and special software are used to create custom profiles for the actual devices used to produce the document. These profiles precisely map the color gamut and other characteristics of each device.

While custom profiles are the ideal approach, building them requires a thorough knowledge of color management and color management tools.

The Kodak Digital Science color system helps you manage color in FreeHand using standard profiles approved by the International Color Consortium (ICC). Manufacturers furnish model-specific, ICC-compatible profiles that appear on FreeHand’s Color Management pop-ups when the Colors > “Kodak Digital Science” preference is chosen. Available custom profiles also appear.

FreeHand reads all ICC-compatible profiles. Additional manufacturer profiles are available on the Internet at www.colorsync.com.

Simply stated, to calibrate is to adjust the device colors to match the device profile. Whether the profiles are custom or vendor-supplied, each device in the workflow must be calibrated to its profile for effective color management. Consult the device’s documentation for each device to learn how to calibrate it.


Using Kodak Digital Science profiles to manage colors

Use Kodak Digital Science (KDS) to integrate FreeHand with your overall color management strategy. Choose from a variety of ICC-compatible manufacturer profiles, as well as any available custom profiles.

Note	System-level color-related features, such as Gamma Control, may conflict with FreeHand’s color management systems.

The Kodak Digital Science is unavailable when the KDS extensions are not in your computer’s FreeHand 8 folder. To restore the extensions, drag and drop a copy of the Kodak extensions from the FreeHand CD-ROM onto your closed FreeHand 8 folder. If KDS is still unavailable, search for extension conflicts with other color management extensions.

Setting the monitor profile

Choose an ICC-compatible monitor profile from the Monitor pop-up. This option refers to the monitor you use to create illustrations.

Setting the monitor to simulate final output

In the Monitor simulates preference pop-up, choose from three options: None, Composite printer, and Separations printer. Base your choice on the final output device so that your monitor displays within the color gamut of that device.

For example, an artist designing graphics for on-screen display may opt for the brighter RGB colors by unchecking Color management, choosing Adjust Display Colors, or choosing None in the Monitor simulates pop-up.

Note	The Web Safe Color Library is recommended for artwork designed exclusively for on-screen display.

Choosing None in the Monitor simulates pop-up affects neither the monitor display nor the printer profiles. As you view your document on screen, the monitor displays colors according to the monitor profile and the RGB colors are displayed as CMYK according to the printer profile.

The monitor displays RGB colors based on the monitor profile. However, if the Monitor simulates setting is either Composite printer or Separations printer, then FreeHand uses the appropriate printer profile to adjust the RGB colors.

To set the monitor display to the composite printer profile, choose Composite printer in the Monitor simulates pop-up when your final output device is a composite printer.

To set the monitor display to the separations printer profile, choose Separations printer in the Monitor simulates pop-up when your final output device is a separations printer. The monitor bases on-screen display on the separations printer profile. This is known as soft-proofing.

Setting printer profiles

When printing a document for separations output, choose the appropriate profile from the Separations printer pop-up. The Separations printer options show ICC-compatible CMYK and Hexachrome printer profiles.

When printing a document for composite output, click the Advanced Setup button. Choose the appropriate profile from the Composite printer pop-up. The Composite printer settings show ICC-compatible CMYK and RGB printer profiles. Choose the correct profile for your composite printer.

Leaving either the Composite printer pop-up or the Separations printer pop-up set to Default (CMYK) provides reasonable results for most printers. The defaults are stored with the default monitor profile. However, for best results, use custom profiles.

Using the Composite simulates separations option

With Composite simulates separations checked, choose Separations printer in the Monitor simulates pop-up so the monitor displays colors that match the output of the separations printer. The Composite simulates separations option bases composite printing on the separations printer profile; it prints simulated separation proofs on a composite printer.

When designing a four-color brochure, for example, print preliminary drafts to an in-house composite printer. To better view how the colors of the final brochure will look using your composite printer, check the Composite simulates separations option.

Note	When printing as a composite using a device that performs in-RIP separations, as some Scitex systems do, uncheck Composite simulates separations.

Printing separations using a Hexachrome printer profile

In addition to Default (CMYK), a generic Hexachrome profile is available for six-color (CMYKOG) output when a more suitable profile is not available. Choose a Hexachrome profile to separate to six-color output. When the printer profile is a Hexachrome printer profile, the monitor displays Hexachrome colors as if the Monitor simulates setting is None, and it displays CMYK colors as if the printer profile is Default (CMYK). Colors print as follows:

•	Hexachrome colors: Hexachrome color library process colors remain unchanged and print using the defined Hexachrome values.

•	RGB color: RGB process colors and RGB TIFFs separate into Hexachrome.

•	CMYK colors: CMYK process colors and CMYK TIFFs remain unchanged when printing as Hexachrome. CMYK colors do not appear on the orange plate or the green plate.

•	Spot colors: Any color defined as a spot color (CMYK or RGB) prints on its own spot plate unless Print spot colors as process is checked in the Separations tabbed panel of the Print Setup dialog box, in which case the colors separate to CMYK values.

Naming color profiles for cross-platform use

To use color profiles between Macintosh and Windows, add a period and the three-letter extension ICM to the profile name. Avoid special characters such as a slash ( / ) and parentheses. When sharing files between Macintosh and Windows operating systems, name the profiles with no more than 27 characters followed by a period and the ICM extension. This naming convention is important when assigning RGB images with device profiles.

In the FreeHand folder, store profiles either in the ICM folder or in the Windows\System\Color folder.


Using Kodak Color Tables

Use Kodak Color Tables for limited color management without Kodak Digital Science extensions installed on your computer. This option manages only CMYK display and RGB conversion. TIFFs cannot be profiled.

The conversion tables use the Kodak extensions to create color averages from profiles and interpolate color values during conversion. When FreeHand is installed, two files named RGB2CMYK and CMYK2RGB are placed in the FreeHand 8 folder. These files initially contain default data for the Kodak Color Tables option to use. Whenever profiles are chosen within Kodak Digital Science, these two files are updated.

When Kodak Color Tables is chosen, the Monitor and Separations printer option choices are displayed without a pop-up. Kodak Digital Science Advanced Color Options are not available when Kodak Color Tables is chosen. However, the options None and Separations printer are available in the Monitor simulates pop-up.

The Kodak Color Tables option is available when the Kodak Digital Science attachments are not installed, but the profiles cannot be changed.

To change Monitor, Separations printer, or Advanced options when using Kodak Color Tables:

1	Choose the Color > Color Management > "Kodak Digital Science" preference.

If the Kodak Digital Science option is unavailable, drag a copy of the Kodak extensions from the FreeHand CD-ROM onto your closed FreeHand 8 folder.

2	Choose one or more different KDS options.

3	Choose the Color > Color Management > "Kodak Color Tables" preference.

The newly chosen options are displayed in the Color Management area of the Color preferences dialog box.


Color Management of RGB Images

To improve the display and output of a selected RGB image, assign a device profile based on how the image was created. For example, if you scanned an image, assign the appropriate scanner profile using the RGB image default pop-up in the Colors > “Color management” preference. The device profile contains the source of the image’s color creation and is otherwise referred to as the image source. The RGB default pop-up displays both monitor and scanner profiles.

The profile determines the colors that the image displays and prints within that profile’s color gamut. The default setting of None displays and prints RGB images according to the Monitor profile.

Use the Image source pop-up in the Object Inspector to individually assign images with device profiles without changing the default profile in the Color preferences. The Image source pop-up is not affected by the Object > “Changing options changes defaults” preference. It is available only with the Kodak Digital Science Color Management option.

The Image source pop-up is useful when importing several images from different sources. For example, one image may have been adjusted to the monitor in Adobe Photoshop and another image to a scanner.

Tracking device profiles of relocated RGB images

Before moving a document with profiled images to another computer, install the necessary profiles on the new computer. When the profiles are not available, the following dialog box appears when opening the document:

•	When the document is reopened after installing the original profiles, the profile assignments of the RGB images remain intact.

•	When the document is first opened without the original device profiles, the RGB image default device profile is temporarily assigned to the RGB images.

•	When the document is opened without the original device profiles and you choose a new device profile to replace the temporary default, the new device profile is assigned to the RGB images.

Color conversion of RGB images when exporting an EPS file

•	With the Convert RGB to Process option unchecked in the Output Options dialog box, FreeHand exports RGB image colors as RGB colors. These EPS files are intended for composite printing and will not reliably separate to CMYK.

•	With the Convert RGB to Process option checked, RGB colors export as CMYK colors according to the separations printer profile. If there are Hexachrome colors in the document when exporting, a warning displays stating Hexachrome colors will export as CMYK process colors.

Note	With a Hexachrome profile chosen as the separations printer profile, RGB colors separate into Hexachrome when printing, but not when exporting.

Color conversion of RGB images for printing

•	With the Convert RGB to Process option unchecked in the Output Options dialog box, FreeHand prints RGB image colors as RGB colors. These EPS files are intended for composite printing and will not reliably separate to CMYK.

•	When printing separations, the RGB colors convert to CMYK or CMYKOG colors.


Output Options
Output Options (File menu)

Use to determine how your final document exports or prints to a PostScript output device.

Objects	Include invisible layers: Check to print and export objects on all foreground layers. Split complex paths: Check to split paths into smaller sections as they are printed and exported, reducing the likelihood of memory-related PostScript errors—particularly when printing to PostScript Level 1 printers. Paths split based on the printer resolution.
Images: ASCII encoding:	Choose to print or export scanned images and bitmaps in ASCII format. Use the ASCII encoding option if you have trouble printing bitmap images or when you are printing from Windows.
Images: Binary data:	Choose to encode scanned and bitmap images in Binary format. Do not use if printing from an Windows-based computer.
Images: None	Choose None when you plan to print an exported file from an application capable of reading Open Pre-Press Interface (OPI) comments. The application that reads the OPI comments relinks to a higher-resolution image for final output.
Images: Include OPI comments:	Check to include OPI comments with the document when printing or exporting. Use when placed bitmap images will be replaced by high-resolution versions at a color electronic prepress system.
Images: Convert RGB to process:	Check to convert RGB images to process colors upon output when creating an EPS or when composite printing. Check Convert RGB to process if you plan to print a bitmap image file to a printer that does not color separate RGB images. Do not check this option when doing one of the following: • Printing to a color composite printer • Printing color separations of a document from an application that converts RGB images to CMYK • Preparing the document for screen-based output. When you color separate a document from FreeHand, an RGB TIFF is converted to a CMYK TIFF whether this option is checked or unchecked.
Maximum Color Steps	Limit the number of colors in Gradient fills when you have trouble converting an EPS file to a color electronic prepress system such as Crosfield, Linotype-Hell, or Scitex. The available choices are Default, 126, and 256. If an EPS file generates more colors than the maximum number of colors in the prepress system’s line-work format, enter a number smaller than 256 until the file converts successfully. Adjust values with caution—reducing the number of colors may also reduce the smoothness of color transitions.
Flatness	Enter values above zero to speed printing of curved path segments and reduce the likelihood of memory-related PostScript errors. The flatness value controls how smoothly curves print. Values between zero and three are barely discernible to the eye. Values above ten may result in visibly flattened curves, especially at low resolutions.


Preferences
Preferences (File menu)

Make changes in the preferences to determine how various features behave.

Preference categories

Select a preference category from the list on the left of the Preferences dialog box to determine the available options:

General: Control sensitivity and appearance of editing and selection tools, determine the default document, determine what causes a page to become active, and determine whether or not unsaved documents are reviewed.

Object: Set the way defaults are changed when creating objects and the way objects behave when editing. Also, set the default line widths for all the Width pop-ups and determine the behavior of new object styles.

Text: Set behavior of text and text blocks.

Document: Determine view and page placement when opening a document.

Import / Export: Set how FreeHand saves the document or how FreeHand handles placed EPS files.

Spelling: Set spelling check options.

Colors: Set guide and grid colors and affect how colors are named and used.

Panels: Set panel appearance and placement on screen.

Redraw: Set options for a document’s on-screen display. Adjust redraw preferences to balance the quality of the display and the redraw speed.


Object Editing preferences
Object Preferences

Set the way defaults are changed when creating objects and the way objects behave when editing.

Changing object changes defaults:	When checked, changing an object’s attributes (such as stroke, fill, or type settings) modifies the default attribute settings. When unchecked, changing an attribute modifies the default attribute settings only when no object is selected.
Groups transform as unit by default:	When checked, sets the default setting to On for the Transform as a unit option in the Object Inspector.
Join non-touching paths:	When checked, Join  connects two open paths. Endpoints within the snap distance merge into a single point. When unchecked, the Join command does not join open paths unless they touch.
Path operations consume original paths:	When checked, original paths used for the following operations disappear when the operation is performed: Expand Stroke, Inset Path, Intersect, Punch, and Union.
Alt-drag copies paths:	When checked, holding down Alt while moving a path or a point simultaneously copies and moves the copy of the path.
Show fill for new open paths	When checked, open paths will display fills.
Warn before launch and edit	When checked, double-clicking an image displays a dialog box that asks if you wish to use the external editor. When unchecked, double-clicking an image launches the external editor.
External Editors:	Set up a bitmap editing application that FreeHand uses to edit TIFF or LRG images when double-clicking them in the FreeHand document. Select either TIFF or LRG from the Object pop-up, and click the edit button to browse to the desired application to use as an External Editor.
Default line weights:	Enter numbers in this entry field (separated by a space) to define the default line weights that appear in the Width pop-up in the Stroke Inspector.
New graphic styles:	Auto-apply to selection: When checked, object styles are applied immediately to selected objects. Define style based on selection: When checked, selected objects define the style created.


Text Editing preferences
Text Preferences

Set behavior of text and text blocks.

Always use Text Editor:	When checked, creating a text block displays the Text Editor dialog box for entering text.
Track tab movement with vertical line:	When checked, a vertical line appears as tabs are dragged on the text ruler.
Show text handles when ruler is off:	When checked, text handles appear in an active text block even though the text ruler is not visible.
New text containers auto-expand:	When checked, text blocks created by clicking the Text tool are auto-expanding.
Display Font Preview	When checked, browsing through fonts in the Font pop-up will show a preview of the typeface next to the highlighted font.
“Smart Quotes”:	Check to smarten quotes by automatically using left or right quotation marks. Define Quotes: Choose from several different styles of smart quotes.
Build paragraph styles based on:	First selected paragraph: When checked, paragraph styles are based on the first paragraph in the selection range. Shared attributes: When checked, paragraph styles are based on the common attributes of the selected text range.
Dragging a paragraph style changes:	A single paragraph: When checked, paragraph styles are applied only to the paragraph on which they are dropped. The entire text container: When checked, paragraph styles are applied to the entire text block on which they are dropped.
  Related Topics


Importing / Exporting preferences
Import / Export Preferences

Set how FreeHand saves the document or how FreeHand handles placed EPS files.

Convert editable EPS when imported:	When checked, FreeHand converts imported EPS files to paths if the EPS file contains vector graphic information.
Embed images and EPS upon import (increases file size)	When checked, FreeHand embeds imported LRG, TIFF, and EPS files instead of linking them to an external file. Embedding increases the FreeHand document size by the size of each imported image.
Save file thumbnails:	When checked, FreeHand documents are saved with a preview embedded. This thumbnail preview is displayed in the Open, Import, or Links Info dialog boxes.
Export EPS with color previews:	When checked, FreeHand includes a color bitmap preview when exporting an EPS graphic. That preview is used as a low-resolution placeholder when that EPS is placed back into FreeHand or into another application.
Bitmap Export:	Sets default options for exporting in bitmap formats.
UserPrep file:	Enter a name in this entry field of the file you want to use as your UserPrep file.
Clipboard output formats:	Choose file types that FreeHand exports to the Clipboard when you Copy or exit.
  Related Topics


Panel preferences
Panels Preferences

Set panel appearance and placement on screen.

Remember location of zipped panels:	When checked, panels occupy two places on your screen: a zipped, stored location, and a different, unzipped location. Zipping and unzipping the panels causes the title bar and panel to appear in two different places.
Show Tool Tips:	When checked, FreeHand displays short descriptions of tools and buttons called Tool Tips when you pause the cursor over a button for a few seconds.
  Related Topics


Redraw Preferences

Set options for how the document is displayed on screen. Adjust redraw preferences to balance the quality of the display with the speed of the redraw.

Better (but slower) display:	When checked, the monitor displays as many colors as possible for Graduated and Radial fills. Unchecking this option limits the number of colors displayed and speeds document redraw.
Display text effects:	When checked, text on screen appears with highlight, inline, shadow, strikethrough, underline, and zoom text effects applied. When unchecked, text effects appear in print but not on screen. Turn Display text effects off to increase FreeHand’s redraw speed.
Redraw while scrolling:	When checked, FreeHand redraws the document when you click a scroll arrow or scrollbar. When unchecked, FreeHand redraws when scrolling is finished.
High-resolution image display:	Check to display imported LRG and TIFF files at the highest resolution available. Uncheck to redraw imported LRG and TIFF files faster by displaying them at a lower resolution. Because of the high resolution of most LRG files, they may take a long time to redraw in FreeHand. Leave High resolution image display unchecked to greatly increase your redraw speed when using LRG files.
Image RAM cache:	When checked, imported bitmap images will redraw faster. Dynamic: Automatically calculates the best RAM allocation for the cache. Manual: Manually allocate RAM for the Image RAM cache.  Note When minimal RAM is installed on your system, manually setting the Image RAM cache may result in slower redraw.
Display overprinting objects:	When checked, displays small white O’s in objects when Overprint is checked in their respective Inspectors.
Greek type below:	Sets the pixel size below which text appears greeked on screen. Greeked text displays faster.
Preview drag:	Sets the maximum number of objects that preview when dragging. Previewing a large number of objects slows redraw and requires more RAM.
  Related Topics


Spelling Preferences

Set spelling check options.

Find duplicate words:	When checked, the Spelling panel detects instances of words appearing twice in a row.
Find capitalization errors:	When checked, the Spelling panel detects uncapitalized words following periods.
Add words to the dictionary:	Exactly as typed: When checked, words are added to the dictionary with uppercase and lowercase letters exactly as you type them in. All lowercase: When checked, words are added to the dictionary only in lowercase letters.


Color Preferences

Set guide and grid colors and how colors are named and used.

Guide Color:	Displays the color of nonprinting guides. Click the color well to customize the guide color.
Grid Color:	Displays the color of the nonprinting grid. Click the color well to customize the grid color.
Color List shows:	Container color: When selected, the boxes (Stroke Selector and Fill Selector) at the top of the Color List show the stroke and fill colors of the selected text block. Text color: When selected, the boxes (Stroke Selector and Fill Selector) at the top of the Color List show the stroke and fill colors of the text in a selected text block.
Auto-rename colors:	When checked, colors redefined by dragging and dropping one color onto another color are automatically renamed using CMYK or RGB values.
Color Mixer / Tint panel uses split color well:	When checked, the left side of the Color Mixer color well and the Tints panel color well remain constant as you mix colors, while the right side reflects the new color.
Color management:	Set defaults for how color is represented on your monitor. See the Color Management chapter of Using FreeHand for more detailed information.


Document Preferences

Determine view and page placement when opening a document.

Restore view when opening document	When checked, a document opens at the same magnification as when it was last saved.
Remember window size and location	When checked, a document is opened in the same size of window and at the same location as when it was last saved.
FreeHand 4 page placement	When checked, new pages are added in a 54 inches x 54 inches area at the lower, left of the pasteboard. To maintain compatibility with FreeHand 4, keep pages within the colored rectangle (black on non-color systems), which shows the FreeHand 4 pasteboard area.
New document template:	New documents are opened based on the template named in this entry field.
Changing view sets the active page:	When checked, moving to another page using the Page Before button, Page After button, or Control-Page Up or Control-Page Down sets the new page as the active page in the Document Inspector.
Using tools sets the active page:	When checked, using a tool activates a page in the Document Inspector.
Always review unsaved documents upon Exit:	Check to review and save each open document when quitting or exiting the application.


General Editing preferences
General Preferences

Control sensitivity and appearance of editing and selection tools.

Undo’s:	Enter a value from 0 to 100 to specify the number of undo’s. Reopen the document after changing the number of undo’s to apply the change. Limit the number of undo’s to save RAM.
Pick distance:	Enter a value from zero to five. The cursor selects an object within the specified distance in screen pixels.
Cursor distance:	Enter a value to specify the incremental distance selected objects move when you press a cursor key on the keyboard. Values are related to the unit of measurement currently selected.
Snap distance:	Enter a value from zero to five. When you move an object within the specified snap distance of a snap-to element (such as a guide, grid, or point) the object snaps to that element.
Smoother editing:	Highlight selected paths: Displays a thin line along the middle of selected paths. The color of the highlight is determined by the color selected in the Layers panel.
Smaller handles:	When checked, handles used for modifying curves appear smaller on screen.
Smart Cursors:	When checked, the cursor changes depending on the context.
Enable transform handles	When checked, double-clicking objects will display transform handles used to easily rotate, skew, and resize objects.
Dynamic scrollbar:	When checked, FreeHand redraws the screen as you scroll the document window. When unchecked, FreeHand suspends screen redraw until you stop scrolling.
Remember layer info:	When checked, objects originally from different layers that are grouped or joined return to their original layers when ungrouped or split, and objects copied to another FreeHand document retain their layer information when pasted in the destination document. When unchecked, objects originally from different layers that are grouped or joined stay on the grouped or joined object’s layer when ungrouped or split, and objects copied to another FreeHand document paste on the default drawing layer in the destination document.
Dragging a guide scrolls the window:	When checked, dragging vertical and horizontal guides beyond the edges of the document window scrolls the view. Drag guides to the pasteboard to remove them. When unchecked, dragging guides does not scroll the view. Drag guides to the ruler to remove them.
Enable Java scripts (relaunch to apply)	When checked, scripts created with the Macromedia Script Editor are active. FreeHand must be relaunched after this preference is checked for the scripts to be active.
Right mouse button magnification	When checked, hold down the right mouse button as you click and drag to zoom in to a specified area.


Undo
Undo (Edit menu)

Reverse the last command or commands applied, including the following:

•	Drawing and editing basic objects

•	Editing text

•	Transforming objects

•	Removing colors, layers, and styles.

Only operations performed since the last save can be undone.

Specify the number of undo steps (up to 100) in  the General preferences.

Reopen the document after changing the number of undo steps in order for the new number to take effect.

Tip	Limit the number of undo steps to eight or less to save RAM.

  Related Topics


Redo
 Redo (Edit menu)

Cancels the last Undo.

You can redo only the most recent Undo command.

  Related Topics


Cut
 Cut (Edit menu)

Removes selected objects and stores them on the FreeHand Clipboard.

Paste cut objects into the same document, a different FreeHand document, or another application.

When you cut an object and switch to another application, FreeHand automatically converts data on its internal Clipboard to the file types specified in your Import / Export preferences.

Note	Cut items are stored on the Clipboard, and therefore use RAM.

  Related Topics


Copy
 Copy (Edit menu)

Makes a copy of selected objects and stores it on the FreeHand Clipboard.

Paste copied objects into the same document, a different FreeHand document, or another application.

When you copy an object and switch to another application, FreeHand automatically converts data on its internal Clipboard to the file types specified in your Import / Export preferences.

  Related Topics


Paste
Paste (Edit menu)

Places objects stored on the Clipboard into the active document.

Paste text or graphics copied from other FreeHand documents or from other applications.

If you copied text from an application that creates a Rich Text Format (RTF) version of the text on the Clipboard, FreeHand preserves text formatting.

  Related Topics


Paste Behind
Paste Behind (Edit menu)

Pastes an object stored on the FreeHand Clipboard directly behind a selected object in the stacking order.

Tip	Use Paste Behind to quickly move an object to a specific point in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of ten objects and you want to move an object behind the fifth object in the stack, it is faster to paste the object behind the fifth object rather than using Move Forward and Move Backward repeatedly.

  Related Topics


Paste in Front
Paste in Front (Edit menu)

Pastes an object stored on the FreeHand Clipboard directly in front of a selected object in the stacking order.

Tip	Use Paste in Front to quickly move an object to a specific point in the stacking order. For example, if you have a stack of ten objects and you want to move an object in front the fifth object in the stack, it is faster to paste the object in front of the fifth object rather than using Move Forward and Move Backward repeatedly.

  Related Topics


Clear
Clear (Edit menu)

Deletes a selected object without storing it on the Clipboard.

Choose Edit > Undo to restore the cleared object.

  Related Topics


Cut Contents
Cut Contents (Edit menu)

Removes an object pasted inside a selected object and places it back into the document.

  Related Topics


Paste Inside
Paste Inside (Edit menu)

Pastes an object stored on the Clipboard inside a selected, closed path. These paths are called clipping paths, and the items they contain are called contents.
Use Paste Inside to crop or mask an object within a closed path.

To	Do this
Move objects pasted inside	Click and drag the handle [image] that appears on the paste inside.
Edit objects pasted inside	Double-click the handle [image] that appears on the paste inside to release the objects for editing. Deselect objects to reset the paste inside.
If the selected path is part of a group or is not a closed path, the Paste Inside command is grayed out and unavailable on the Edit menu.

Note	To use composite paths as clipping paths, create the composite path before pasting inside. When transforming a clipping path, the contents are transformed when Contents is checked in the Transform panel.

  Related Topics


How to create a paste inside

How to edit contents of a paste inside

How to remove contents from paste inside


To create a paste inside
To create a paste inside (clipping path):

1	Select an object to use as the contents.

2	Position the contents as you want it to appear in the clipping path.

3	Choose Edit > Cut.

4	Select the clipping path.

5	Choose Edit > Paste Inside.

Only the contents within the clipping path are visible. Whatever fill is set in the Fill Inspector appears in areas not covered by the contents.

To modify the clipping path, select it and modify it. Adjusting the path shows or hides portions of the contents.


To edit contents of a paste inside

1	Select the path.

2	Select its contents.

•	Subselect the contents to edit them.

•	Double-click the handle to select all contents for editing.

Once items in the contents are selected, edit as usual.

3	With the Pointer tool, drag the handle to reposition the contents.

Contents extending beyond the clipping path are hidden, not cropped.


To remove contents from paste inside

1	Select the clipping path.

2	Choose Edit > Cut Contents.

1	Select an object or objects.

2	Choose Edit > Cut.

3	Choose Edit > Paste Inside.

The new elements appear in front of the original contents.


Copy Attributes
Copy Attributes (Edit menu)

Copies the attributes of the selected objects or text to a special Attributes Only Clipboard during the current FreeHand session until Copy Attributes is performed again.

  Related Topics


How to Copy and Paste Attributes

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Edit > Copy Attributes.

3	Select another object.

4	Choose Edit > Paste Attributes.


Paste Attributes
Paste Attributes (Edit menu)

Pastes attributes of the Attributes Only Clipboard onto the selected object. You can also apply these attributes multiple times.

Note	Copy Attributes must be used before Paste Attributes is available.

  Related Topics


Duplicate
Duplicate (Edit menu)

Creates an exact copy of a selected object and offsets it from the original.

Use the Duplicate command to power-duplicate cloned or duplicated objects. Power-duplicating copies the sequence of moves and transformations applied to the selected object since the last time you used Duplicate or Clone as long as the object remains selected.

Power-duplicate to create grids, circular patterns of rotated objects, or other complex, repetitive transformations.

  Related Topics


How to Power Duplicate an Object

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Edit > Duplicate.

3	Select the new object and transform.

4	Choose Edit > Duplicate.

Each time you repeat the duplication, FreeHand duplicates the object, repeating any movement or transformation applied.


Clone
Clone (Edit menu)

Creates an exact copy of the selected object and positions it directly on top of the original.

  Related Topics


Select
Select (Edit menu)

FreeHand has three selection commands in Edit > Select.

All

Selects all objects on unlocked, visible layers on the active page.

Locked objects are selected, but you cannot manipulate them. Objects on locked layers are not selected.

All in Document

Selects all objects on unlocked, visible layers in the entire document.

Locked objects are selected, but you cannot manipulate them. Objects on locked layers are not selected.

None

Deselects all objects on the pasteboard.

When entering text with the Text tool, pressing Tab enters a tab rather than deselects all objects. In this case, click outside the text block with the Pointer tool to deselect the text block.


Find and Replace Graphics
Find & Replace Graphics (Edit menu)

Use Find & Replace Graphics to search for objects by name or with similar characteristics. The Find & Replace Graphics panel has two tabs: Find & Replace and Select.

Use the Find & Replace tabbed panel to find and modify every occurrence of a specific attribute. Use the Select tabbed panel to select every object with a given attribute. Designate the range of your search to include the entire document, a page, or only the current selection.

To display the Find & Replace Graphics panel, choose Edit > Find & Replace > Graphics, use Control-Alt-E, or click the [image] button on the Main Toolbar.

Find & Replace

Use	To find
Color	Any color applied to objects and replace with another color
Stroke width	Strokes within a given range of widths and replace with a new stroke width or modify the width using mathematical equations
Font	Any font, style, or type size and replace with a font of a given style and size, or modify the size using mathematical equations
Remove	Invisible objects, overprinting, custom halftones, or contents
Path shape	Path shapes exactly matching the object pasted in the panel and replace with any object, except TIFFs and EPSs Applied transformations are considered exact copies. Paste Insides are not found. EPSs and TIFFs are not found.
Simplify	Paths with a given number of points and replace with simplified paths according to the Allowable Change value Use mathematical equations to specify a range of values.
Rotate	All objects to rotate them according to the Rotation angle
Scale	All objects to scale them according to the Scale factor
Blend steps	Blends with a given number of steps and replace with a blend of the given number of steps or resampled at the given printer dpi Use math functions to specify a range of values.
Select

Use	To select objects containing
Color	The specified color
Style	The specified object or paragraph style
Same as selection	Matching strokes and fills
Fill type	A fill type or any filled object
Stroke type	A stroke type, any stroked object, arrowhead, or dashed line
Stroke width	A range of stroke width values
Font	A font, style, or range of type sizes
Text effect	A text effect or any text effect
Object name	A note matching the object name Assign names to objects using Xtras > Other > Set Note.
Object type	A given number of points, composite paths, clipping paths, groups, blends, ellipses, rectangles, text, bitmaps, or EPSs
Path shape	Path shapes exactly matching the object pasted in the panel Applied transformations are considered exact copies. EPSs and TIFFs are not found.
Halftone	Halftones
Overprint	Strokes and fills set to overprint

Find & Replace Graphics offers options to select and modify object attributes. For all searches, choose a category from the Attribute pop-up and define the search area in the Change in pop-up: Selection, Page, or Document. For many of the entry fields, use equations (+, -, *, /) to specify numerical values.


To replace a color

To replace stroke width

To replace a font

To rotate or scale multiple objects

Example: To find objects with a magenta fill and a black stroke


To find and replace a color
To replace a color

1	Select a From color and a To color from the Color List pop-ups.

Make sure that all the colors in the document are named before finding and replacing.

2	Choose from the Apply to pop-up to confine your search to strokes, fills, or both. Check Include tints to include tints of the From pop-up base color.

3	Click Change to apply the replacement color.

The number of items changed appears at the lower left of the dialog box.


To find and replace stroke width
To replace stroke width

1	Enter minimum and maximum widths to define a search range. Enter a width in the Min entry field and leave the Max entry field blank to search for a specific width.

2	Enter a value in the To entry field to define the replacement width.

3	Click Change to apply the replacement stroke.

Use mathematical equations to search for stroke widths and to define replacement stroke widths. In the example above, all stroke widths between 0.5 and 2 points are increased by 20%.


To find and replace a font
To replace a font

Use Find & Replace Graphics to locate and replace font, style, and point size. Choose Edit > Find & Replace > Graphics, use Control-Alt-E, or click the Find & Replace Graphics button on the Main Toolbar.

1	Display the Find & Replace panel and choose Font from the Attribute pop-up.

To find text with a particular font, style, or point size without replacing those attributes, click the Select tab to bring the Select panel to the front and choose Font from the Attribute pop-up.

2	Choose Selection, Page, or Document from the Change in pop-up to define the scope of the search.

On the Select panel, choosing Selection changes the Add to selection option label to Remove from selection. Use Remove from selection to deselect text blocks containing a particular font from currently selected objects.

3	Choose the fonts and styles to find and replace from the From and To pop-ups.

To ignore the font and find and replace the style and size only, choose Any font from the From pop-up and No change from the To pop-up.

4	Enter values in the Min or Max entry fields to find or select a specific type size or a range of type sizes.

To find or select a specific point size, use the Min entry field. To find or select a range of sizes, enter values in both the Min and Max entry fields. To ignore size, leave these entry fields blank.

5	Click Change on the Find & Replace panel or Find on the Select panel to replace or select text attributes.

The number of objects changed or selected appears in the lower-left corner of the panel.


To rotate or scale multiple objects

1	Choose Rotate and enter a Rotation angle, or choose Scale and enter Scale factor percentages.

Entering the same percentage in both the x and y entry fields scales objects proportionally.

2	Click Change to apply the rotation angle or the scale factor according to the range of your object search.

Use Find & Replace Graphics to rotate and scale objects relative to each object’s center, which are operations not available when using the transformation tools alone.


Example: To find objects with a magenta fill and a black stroke

1	Click the Select tab, and search for all objects with a magenta fill. Choose Color from the Attribute pop-up, Document from the Search pop-up, magenta from the Color List pop-up, and Fills from the Find in pop-up.

2	Choose Selection from the Search pop-up, Black from the Color List pop-up, and Strokes from the Find in pop-up.

3	Click Find.


Find and Replace Text
Find & Replace Text (Edit menu)

Use Find & Replace Text to search for and replace words or strings of text.

When one text block is selected, the Find Text panel affects only the selected block and its links. When no text blocks are selected, the Find Text panel affects the entire document.

Click an element below for more information:

The word displays in context across the bottom of the Find Text panel when in text find mode.


Select special, non-printing, or invisible characters from this list.


Enter the word to locate in this entry field.


Click to find the first occurrence of the word. The button reads Find Next to locate subsequent occurrences of the word.


Replaces the Find word with the word displayed in the Change to entry field.


Enter the replacement word.


Changes this occurrence and all occurrences of the Find word with the word in the Change to entry field.


When checked, only the complete word as typed in the Find entry field is found.

When unchecked, FreeHand finds the contents of the find entry field, even if it is part of a word.


When checked, FreeHand finds and replace text with uppercase and lowercase letters exactly as typed in the Find and Change to entry fields.


Scrolls the document view as necessary during a Find Text session to ensure that the current word found remains on the screen.


External Editor
External Editor (Edit menu)

When an LRG, TIFF, or PNG is selected, choosing Edit > External Editor or double-clicking on the LRG, TIFF, or PNG launches the application defined as the External Editor and opens the selected, imported image in the editor application. The Edit in Progress dialog box appears and remains open while editing.

To update modifications made in the External Editor application, choose File > Save in the application, then click Done on the Edit in Progress dialog box.


To set the external editor

To use an external editor


To set the external editor:

1	Choose a format from the External Editors: Object pop-up in the Object preferences.

2	Click the […] button, choose an editor from the Choose External Editor dialog box, and click Open (Macintosh) or OK (Windows).


To use an external editor:

1	Select an image.

2	Choose Edit > External Editor or hold down Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) and double-click the image.

With the Object > “Warn before launch and edit” preference checked, a dialog box is displayed to confirm that the launch and edit command is intentional. Click OK to launch the application.

If enough RAM is available, the application chosen as the external editor launches with the selected image opened. An Editing in Progress dialog box appears in FreeHand when the external application opens.

3	After editing and saving your image in the external editor, return to FreeHand and click Done in the Editing in Progress dialog box.

Any changes made to the image automatically update the placed image.


Links Management dialog
Links management(Edit menu)

Opens the Links Management dialog box to make changes to the way imported graphics behave.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Displays the file format and color mode of the linked or embedded graphic.


Describes the file name of the linked or embedded graphic.


Displays the file size of the graphic.


Shows the page number of the document on which the upper, left corner of the image appears.


Click to extract an embedded graphic to a file and create a link to the new file.


Click to open the Change dialog box and reestablish a broken link or change the link.


Embeds the selected, linked graphic.


Displays the selected graphic’s name, location, size, type, and modification date as well as the preview (if available).


Displays the path location of the selected graphic.


Fit Selection
Fit Selection (View menu)

 Changes the view so all selected objects fit inside the document window.

  Related Topics


Fit to Page
Fit to Page (View menu)

 Changes the view so the entire active page fits inside the document window.

  Related Topics


Fit All
Fit All (View menu)

 Changes the view so all pages fit inside the document window.

  Related Topics


Magnification
 Magnification (View menu)

Reduces or enlarges the document view at preset or custom percentages.

To adjust magnification, choose a percentage from the magnification pop-up at the lower, left corner of the document window, or enter a value between 6 and 256,000.

Magnification shortcut keys:

	50%	Control-5
	100%	Control-1
	200%	Control-2
	400%	Control-4
	800%	Control-8
  Related Topics


Custom
Custom (View menu)

Name and save the current view's magnification percentage, view mode, and scrollbar positions to recall later. Choose View > Custom > New, type a name in the Name field, and click OK.

To recall a saved view

Choose the view name from the Magnification pop-up or from the View > Custom submenu. In Windows, right-click to open the shortcut menu and choose a custom view from the View submenu.

To define, name, and save a view using the Magnification tool

Click the tool, hold down Shift, and click and drag to define a view. The New View dialog box opens after the new view is set.

To edit a named view

Adjust view elements to redefine the view, and then choose View > Custom > Edit. Choose a view name from the list in the Edit Views dialog box, then click Redefine. To delete the view, click Delete. To confirm edits and deletions, click OK.

To switch from the current to the previous view,

Choose View > Custom > Previous or use Control-Alt-Shift-1.

  Related Topics


Preview mode
Preview / Keyline modes (View menu)

Choose Preview from the Preview / Keyline pop-up at the lower, left corner of the document window.

In Preview mode, FreeHand displays the document on screen as it will print. Use Preview mode to see colors, strokes, fills, and text attributes.

In Keyline mode, FreeHand displays only the outlines of paths, objects, and text blocks. Use Keyline mode to speed editing and redraw.

Note	You cannot preview Custom, PostScript, or Textured strokes or fills.

  Related Topics


Fast Mode
Fast Mode (View menu)

Fast modes optimize redraw by reducing blend steps to 10 and graying text for onscreen point sizes 50 and below.

Switch between Preview and Keyline by choosing View > Preview or using Control-K. Choose View > Fast Mode or use Control-Shift-K to switch between normal and fast modes. For example, choosing View > Fast Mode when the document is set to Preview switches it to Fast Preview.

Note	To see a path in Keyline mode while the document setting is Preview mode (or vice versa), press and release Alt as you drag the path.

Choosing a view mode

Choose	To
Preview	Display the document as it would print.
Fast Preview	Display blends with reduced steps and grayed text.
Keyline	Display only a black hairline stroke, no fill for objects, and X-boxes for paste insides, EPS images, and bitmap images.
Fast Keyline	Display blends with reduced steps and grayed text. X-boxes for paste insides are not visible.
  Related Topics


Hide Selection
Hide Selection (View menu)

To hide specific objects, select them and then choose View > Hide Selection.

Using Hide Selection hides all selected objects. Hidden objects print as if they are visible. Locked objects remain locked when hidden. Guides cannot be hidden using Hide Selection.

  Related Topics


Show All
Show All (View menu)

To show all hidden objects, choose View > Show All. Hidden objects reappear when the file is closed and reopened.

If an object was hidden, and then the layer on which the hidden object was turned off, the hidden object is shown again when the layer is turned on again.

Note	Show All does not show a hidden layer.

  Related Topics


Toolbars
Toolbars (View menu)

 Shows or hides the Main Toolbar and the Text Toolbar.


Panels
 Panels (View menu)

 Shows or hides all panels except the Toolbox.


Info Bar
Info Bar (View menu)

 Shows or hides the Info Bar.

The Info Bar provides feedback on selected objects.


Page Rulers
Page Rulers (View menu)

Shows or hides the horizontal and vertical rulers in the document window.

Rulers track the cursor location using the document’s current unit of measurement.

The height and width of a selected object are highlighted on the ruler when you click and drag.

Zero point

The default location of the zero point is the lower, left corner of each page. Change the zero point using the zero-point marker [image] found on the upper-left corner of the document window when Page Rulers are turned on.

•	To move the zero point, drag [image] to a new location on the document.

•	To reset the zero point to the default location, double-click [image].

  Related Topics


Text Rulers
Text Ruler (View menu)

 Shows or hides text rulers on the top of text blocks.

To change a tab in a text ruler, drag a tab or double-click a tab to display the Edit Tab dialog box. To reset or remove tabs, drag them off of the text ruler. To change an indent, drag an indent or edit one using the Paragraph Inspector.

  Related Topics


Grid
Grid (View menu)

Shows or hides a non-printing grid. Choose View > Edit to alter the size of the Grid.

Use the Grid to align objects. Turn on Snap to Grid to align objects precisely to the Grid.

  Related Topics


Guides
Guides (View menu)

Shows or hides non-printing lines or objects to use for alignment or drawing.

To	Do this
Create a horizontal or vertical straight guide	1     Turn Page Rulers on. 2     Click and drag a guide from a Page Ruler. 3     Position the guide and release the mouse button.
Create a path-guide	Draw a shape. Select the object, and move it to the Guides layer on the Layers panel.
Release an object from the Guides layer	Double-click the guide you want to release. The Guides dialog box appears. Click Release and the guide moves to the Foreground layer with all of its original properties.
Customizing guides

Double-click a guide to display the Guides dialog box. Use the Guides dialog box to Release, Delete, Add, or Edit guides.

Change guide color in the Colors preferences.

  Related Topics


Snap To
Snap To (View menu)

Snap to Point

Snaps objects to the nearest point to close, connect, and align path points with precision.

•	Close a path by joining the two endpoints.

•	Connect a selected endpoint of an open path to the selected endpoint of another open path.

•	Align a selected object to the center point of a basic shape object (Keyline mode only).

Change the snap distance of an object in the General preferences.

Snap to Guides

Snaps objects to the nearest guide as you draw.

Change the snap distance of an object in the General preferences.

Snap to Grid

Snaps objects to the nearest Grid coordinate as you draw.

Change the snap distance of an object from the General preferences.

  Related Topics


Object (Modify menu)

Display the Object Inspector.


Stroke (Modify menu)

Display the Stroke Inspector.


Fill (Modify menu)

Display the Fill Inspector.


Text (Modify menu)

Display the Text Inspector.


Document (Modify menu)

Display the Document Inspector.


Transform
Transform (Modify menu)

Display the Transform panel with a selected transformation button active.

•	     Scale

•	     Move

•	     Rotate

•	     Reflect

•	     Skew

Transform Again (Control-Shift-G)

Repeat the previous transformation using the settings.


Scale
Scale (Transform tool )

Reduce or enlarge selected objects. Scale tool button
	Before	After
Scale using the Transform panel

Click an area of the graphic for more information.

	Use the Transform panel to scale an object by an exact percentage. Select the object, enter settings in the Transform panel, and click Scale Note When you use a monochrome bitmap image you must resize it appropriately for your printer resolution. Do not use the Scaling tool. To resize the image, select the Pointer tool and press Alt as you resize by dragging a corner handle.
  Related Topics


How to scale an object

1	Select an object.

2	Choose [image] from the Toolbox.

3	Click to place a fixed point and drag to scale the object.

°	Holding down Alt as you drag copies the object as you scale.

°	Holding down Shift as you drag constrains the dimensions of the object as you scale.


Enter a percentage less than 100 to reduce an object; enter a percentage greater than 100 to enlarge an object.


Click to scale an object proportionally.


Coordinates for the fixed point, or center, of the object. When a fixed point is undefined, these coordinates default to the center of a selected object. Click a location in the document window with any Transform tool to set or change the fixed point.


Check to include a paste inside in the transformation.


Check to transform a Gradient or Tiled fill when the object is transformed.


Check to proportionally scale stroke widths.


Click to apply the transformation.


Move
Move (Transform tool )

Move objects by precise distances, as entered in the Transform panel.

With the Pointer tool, click and drag objects to move them manually.

Move using the Transform panel

Click an element below for more information:

	Use the Transform panel to move an object by precise distances. Select the object, enter settings in the Transform panel, and click Move. When [image] is selected, the Transform panel shows the distance of movement of the last-moved object in the x and y entry fields.
  Related Topics


x: Enter a value or formula to specify the horizontal move distance. Positive values move the object to the right, negative values move the object to the left.

y: Enter a value or formula to specify the vertical move distance. Positive values cause the object to move up, negative values cause the object to move down.


Rotate
Rotate (Transform tool )

Rotate a selected object around a fixed point. Rotate tool button
	Before	After
Rotate using the Transform panel

Click an element below for more information:

	Use the Transform panel to rotate an object at a precise angle. Select an object, enter settings in the Transform panel, and click Rotate.
Rotate using the Pointer tool

Double-click an object to displayt the transform handles. Move the cursor until it changes into the rotation cursor, then click and drag to rotate the object.

  Related Topics


How to rotate and object
How to rotate an object

1	Select an object.

2	Choose [image] from the Toolbox.

3	Click to place a fixed point and drag to rotate the object.

°	Holding down Alt as you drag copies the object as you rotate.

°	Holding down Shift as you drag constrains the angle of rotation to the current constrain setting.


Enter a negative number for clockwise rotation, or enter a positive number for counterclockwise rotation.


Reflect
Reflect (Transform tool )

Flip a selected object horizontally or vertically. Reflect tool button
	Before	After
Reflect using the Transform panel

Click an element below for more information:

	Use the Transform panel to reflect an object to an exact angle. Select the object, change settings in the Transform panel, and click Reflect.
  Related Topics


How to reflect an object

1	Select an object.

2	Choose [image] from the Toolbox.

3	Click to place a fixed point and drag to reflect the object.

°	Holding down Alt as you drag copies the object as you reflect.

°	Holding down Shift as you drag constrains the angle of reflection to 45 degrees.


Enter a negative angle for clockwise reflection; enter a positive angle for counterclockwise reflection.


Skew
Skew (Transform tool )

Slant an object to an oblique angle. Skew tool button
	Before	After
Skew using the Transform panel

Click an element below for more information:

	Use the Transform panel to skew an object at a precise angle. Select the object, make any desired settings in the Transform panel, and click Skew.
  Related Topics


How to skew an object

1	Select an object.

2	Choose [image] from the Toolbox.

3	Click to place a fixed point and drag to skew the object.

°	Holding down Alt as you drag makes a duplicate of the object as you skew.

°	Holding down Shift as you drag constrains the skew angle to the current constrain setting.


Enter numbers to specify the horizontal (h:) and vertical (v:) skew angles.


Arrange
Arrange (Modify menu)

Use one of four commands to move objects within a selected layer.

To move an object	Use	Shortcut
To the front of a layer	Bring to Front	Control-F
In front of the object just ahead of it	Move Forward	Control-Shift-F
In back of the object just behind it	Move Backward	Control-Shift-K
To the back of a layer	Send to Back	Control-B
When the selected object is a group, objects within the group keep the same stacking order in relation to each other when the group is moved.

  Related Topics


Align (Modify menu)

Show or hide the Align panel, which aligns and distributes objects in relation to one another or in relation to the page.

To align objects:

1	Select the objects.

2	Choose alignment settings in the Align panel.

Click an element below for more information:

3	Click Apply.

Overriding default alignment with a locked object

To align objects to a specific object, lock the object. All other selected objects align to it.

Align Again

Repeats an alignment using the current Align panel settings.

  Related Topics


Click a region to quickly set up alignment for selected objects.

Double-click a region to apply the alignment to selected objects.


Set horizontal alignment for selected objects.

•	No change: Does not change the horizontal position of objects.

•	Align left: Aligns selected objects to the left edge of the leftmost object.

•	Align center: Aligns selected objects to the horizontal center of all objects.

•	Align right: Aligns selected objects to the right edge of the rightmost object.

•	Distribute lefts: Creates an equal amount of space between the left edges of objects, divided between the left edges of the leftmost and rightmost objects.

•	Distribute centers: Creates an equal amount of space between the horizontal centers of objects, divided between the centers of the leftmost and rightmost objects.

•	Distribute rights: Creates an equal amount of space between the right edges of objects, divided between the right edges of the leftmost and rightmost objects.

•	Distribute widths: Creates an equal amount of space between the facing edges of objects, divided between the right edge of the leftmost and left edge of the rightmost objects.


Set vertical alignment for selected objects.

•	No change: Does not change the vertical position of objects.

•	Align top: Aligns selected objects to the top edge of the highest object.

•	Align center: Aligns selected objects to the vertical center of all objects.

•	Align bottom: Aligns selected objects to the bottom edge of the lowest object.

•	Distribute tops: Creates an equal amount of space between the top edges of objects, divided between the top edges of the highest and lowest objects.

•	Distribute centers: Creates an equal amount of space between the vertical centers of objects, divided between centers of the highest and lowest objects.

•	Distribute bottoms: Creates an equal amount of space between the bottom edges of objects, divided between the bottom edge of the highest and lowest objects.

•	Distribute heights: Creates an equal amount of space between the facing edges of objects, divided between the bottom edge of the highest and top edge of the lowest objects.


When Align to Page is checked, one or more objects are aligned or distributed in relation to the current page dimensions. If only one object is selected, Align to Page must be checked to apply an alignment.


Click to apply Align panel settings.


Join
Join (Modify menu)

Link two or more paths or connects two endpoints.

Use Join to:

•	Join the closest two points of two or more paths. Join connects objects with straight lines if paths are farther apart than the Snap distance. If closer, Join merges the two closest endpoints into a single point.

•	Join two or more open paths to make one continuous path.

•	Join two or more closed paths to make a composite path.

  Related Topics


Split
Split (Modify menu)

Split an object into smaller or component paths.

Use Split to:

•	Convert a composite path into individual paths.

•	Open a closed path at a selected point.

•	Split one or more paths at selected points.

When you split a closed path, it becomes one or more open paths, and any fill applied becomes invisible until these paths are closed.

  Related Topics


Combine (Modify menu)

Use one of the combine commands to merge objects in different ways.

The combine commands are:

•	 Blend

•	 Join Blend to Path

•	 Union

•	 Divide

•	 Intersect

•	 Punch

•	 Crop

•	 Transparency


Blend
Blend (Modify menu)

Create a number of intermediate steps between two paths.

Blend paths that:

•	Are independent, not part of a group or a composite path. Blend is grayed out and unavailable from Modify > Combine with a group or a composite path selected.

•	Use the same stroke and fill type. For example, you cannot blend a path using a Graduated fill with a path using a Radial fill.

Editing a blend

With a blend selected, specify the Number of steps and Range % of a blend in the Object Inspector.

  Related Topics


Join Blend to Path
Join Blend to Path (Modify menu)

Use Join Blend to Path to attach a blend to a path.

Editing a blend

With a blend selected, specify the Number of steps and Range % of a blend in the Object Inspector.

  Related Topics


How to join a blend to a path

1	Create a blend.

2	Draw a path.

3	Select the blend and the path.

4	Choose Modify > Combine > Join Blend to Path.


Union

Create a single path from two or more selected, closed paths. Use Union to combine two overlapping paths and remove portions of the paths that cross over each other.
If the selected path does not touch the other path, the created object is a composite path.

Tip	To retain original paths when the Object > “Path operations consume original paths” preference is checked, hold down Shift as you select Union.

  Related Topics


Divide

Cut selected paths into sections defined by areas of overlap. Use open paths, closed paths, or a combination. Stroke and fill attributes of the topmost path are applied to the areas common to all selected paths.

Applying Divide discards segments of open paths outside areas of overlap regardless of whether the “Path operations consume original paths” preference is checked. However, Divide discards closed paths depending upon the preference setting.

Maintaining fills and contents when dividing

To yield composite paths that maintain these fills across individual paths, hold down Alt when applying Divide to paths with Gradient fills. To subselect a path within a composite path, hold down Alt and click it with the Pointer tool. Splitting a composite path (Modify > Split) applies the Gradient fill to each individual path.

When applying Divide to a clipping path, make sure that it is the top object in the stacking order so that the paste inside’s contents are not lost. Hold down Alt when applying Divide to a clipping path to yield a composite path in which each divided area shows a portion of the paste inside’s contents.

  Related Topics


Intersect

Intersect creates a single path from the portions of selected paths that overlap, removing the remaining portions of the paths. The intersection you create inherits the stroke and fill of the backmost, selected path.
Use Intersect to create a new shape from overlapping areas of two or more selected paths.

If any selected path does not overlap all other selected paths, all selected paths disappear and no new path is created.

Tip	To retain original paths when the Object > “Path operations consume original paths” preference is checked, hold down Shift as you select Intersect.

  Related Topics


Punch

Creates a hole in selected closed paths, through which other objects are visible.
  Related Topics


How to use punch
To use Punch:

1	Draw a closed path.

2	Move the punch shape in front of another object.

For help with moving objects, see Arrange.

3	Select both objects.

If you are punching through multiple paths, select all objects.

4	Choose Modify > Combine > Punch or click [image] on the Operations panel.

The front selected path is deleted as its shape punches a hole in all selected paths behind it. Where a hole is fully enclosed within a path, a punched path becomes a composite path.

Tip	To retain original paths when the Object > “Path operations consume original paths” preference is checked, hold down Shift as you select Punch.


Crop

Crop operates like a cookie cutter on the selected objects. This feature takes two or more objects and crops the bottom paths to the shape of the topmost path in the stacking order.
There are three ways to access the Crop Xtra:

•	Choose Xtras > Path Operations > Crop

•	Click [image]  on the Xtra Tools panel

•	Choose Modify > Combine > Crop.

  Related Topics


How to use crop
How to crop an object(s):

1	Draw a closed path in the desired shape for the crop.

2	Move the crop shape in front of another object.

For help with moving objects, see Arrange.

3	Select both objects.

If you are cropping multiple paths, select all objects.

4	Choose Modify > Combine > Crop or click [image] on the Operations panel.

Tip	To retain original paths when the Object > “Path operations consume original paths” preference is checked, hold down Shift as you select Crop.


Alter Path (Modify menu)

Use one of the Alter Path commands to change characteristics of an entire path.

The Alter Path commands are:

•	 Correct Direction

•	 Reverse Direction

•	 Remove Overlap

•	 Simplify

•	 Expand Stroke

•	 Inset Path


Correct Direction

When used on composite paths, Correct Direction attempts to ensure that paths inside composite paths run in opposite directions, so the object appears correct if Even / odd fill is unchecked in the Object Inspector.

Path direction is initially set by the order in which you place the first two points of a path, either from left to right (clockwise) or right to left (counterclockwise). Objects drawn with the Rectangle tool, Ellipse tool, or Polygon tool are drawn clockwise. When used on closed paths, Correct Direction sets the path direction to clockwise. Correcting the direction of a path does not alter its shape.

Tip	If the path has text attached to it or flowed inside it, subselect the path (Alt-click) and then apply Correct Direction.

Note	Use Correct Direction on composite paths and uncheck Even / odd fill when exporting to formats that do not support Even / odd fills. Path direction is important when a path has arrowheads, is joined to another object, is blended, or has text attached to it.

  Related Topics


Reverse Direction

Reverses the direction of one or more selected paths. Reversing the direction of the path does not alter the shape of a path.

Use Reverse Direction when text attached to a path, a blend, or a subpath of a composite path does not work as expected due to a path going in the wrong direction. For example, when text attached to a path reads upside down, a blend crisscrosses itself, or a subpath of a composite path does not fill consistently with other subpaths.

Path direction is initially set by the order in which you place the first two points of a path, either from left to right (clockwise) or right to left (counterclockwise). Objects drawn with the Rectangle tool, Ellipse tool, or Polygon tool are drawn clockwise. Path direction is important when a path has arrowheads, is joined to another object, is blended, or has text attached to it.

Tip	If the path is part of a blend, has text attached to it or flowed inside it, subselect the path (Alt-click) and then apply Reverse Direction.

  Related Topics


Remove overlap

Removes redundant portions of a selected, closed path that crosses itself.

Removing Overlap reduces the number of elements in a path without altering path shape. Overlapping areas are converted into closed objects and composite paths as appropriate.

Apply Remove Overlap to crisscrossing paths created using the Freehand tool, the Variable stroke tool, the Calligraphic pen tool, or Expand Stroke.

Note	Remove Overlap does not remove the overlapping areas of two separate paths. It only affects areas where one path overlaps itself. To remove the overlapping areas between two closed paths, use Union.

Tip	If the path has text attached to it or flowed inside it, subselect the path (Alt-click) and then apply Remove Overlap.

  Related Topics


Simplify

Removes or adds points to a path to maintain the same shape using the optimum number of points for efficient editing and printing.
When a path consists of a large number of points, use Simplify to remove excess points. Remaining points are moved to optimal positions along the path. In some cases, points are added to preserve the path shape.

Simplifying a path generally makes editing and printing easier. Simplify is useful when applied to objects created with the Trace tool or the Freehand tool.

  Related Topics


How to simplify a path

1	Select a path.

2	Choose Modify > Alter Path > Simplify.

3	Select options in the Simplify Path dialog box.

Enter a number to indicate the acceptable variation from the original path. Larger values may alter path shape more noticeably than smaller values.

4	Click OK.

Tip	If the path is part of a blend, has text attached to it or flowed inside, subselect the path (Alt-click) and then apply Simplify.


Expand Stroke

Converts the perimeter of a specified stroke of a selected path into a closed path.
Use Expand Stroke to convert a stroke into a line shape with a fill or to apply an outline to the outer edge of a stroke. Applying Expand Stroke to an open path yields a closed path. If the original path was closed, inside and outside edges convert into subpaths of a composite path.

For example, quickly create a doughnut shape by drawing a circle and specifying a wide stroke width. To fill the doughnut shape (not the hole), use Expand Stroke to convert the wide, circle stroke into a shape with a fill.

Tip	To retain original paths when the Object > “Path operations consume original paths” preference is checked, hold down Shift as you select Expand Stroke.

Expand Stroke dialog box

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Specify the desired width of the path after the stroke is converted to a closed area, using the document’s current unit of measurement.


Click a button to determine how FreeHand draws the ends of the expanded stroke.

•	Butt cap: Click to apply a shape that is square and flush with the end of the stroke.

•	Round cap: Click to apply a shape that is round and extends one-half of the stroke width beyond the end of the stroke.

•	Square cap: Click to apply a shape that is square and extends one-half of the stroke width beyond the end of the stroke.


Click a button to determine how FreeHand draws the intersection of path segments that meet at corner or connector points.

•	Miter join: Click to create joins that are angled to a point.

•	Round join: Click to create rounded joins.

•	Beveled join: Click to create flattened joins that extend beyond the corner of the path.


Enter a value from 1 to 57 to set the maximum ratio for a miter join. FreeHand automatically changes a miter join to a beveled join when the stroke width at the join point is greater than or equal to the length of the miter join.


Inset Path

Expand or contract one or more closed paths by the specified amount. When you use Inset Path, the selected path expands or contracts following the edge of the original path.
Inset Path dialog box

Click an element below for more information:	Use Inset Path to create a larger or smaller version of a path at a distance from the original. Apply Inset Path to irregular path shapes when scaling the path results in distortion relative to the original path. Use Inset path to quickly create a contracted version of the original path to create a highlight blend or a hole.
Tip	To retain original paths when the Object > “Path operations consume original paths” preference is checked, hold down Shift as you select Inset Path.

  Related Topics


Enter the number of subsequent insets created for the selected path.

For example, enter 1 to delete the original path and create a new inset path based on your settings. Enter 2 to keep the original path and create an additional inset path based on your settings. Enter 3 to keep the original and create two inset paths.


Choose the type of spacing  between subsequent inset paths.

•	Uniform: Spacing is equal between each inset.

•	Farther: Spacing between each inset becomes closer at farther distances from the original path.

•	Nearer: Spacing between each inset becomes closer at nearer distances to the original path.


Using the document’s current unit of measurement specify a positive distance to contract the path or a negative distance to expand the path.


Rasterize
Rasterize (Modify menu)

When FreeHand graphics require conversion to bitmap images, rasterize them directly in FreeHand. The rasterized objects become an embedded TIFF file residing in the FreeHand document.

If a graphic is too large to rasterize directly in FreeHand, an error message appears. For more complex graphics, use the FreeHand export option. Macintosh users may opt to increase the memory allocation for FreeHand.

To rasterize one or more objects in FreeHand:

1	Select one or more objects.

2	Choose Modify > Rasterize or use Alt-Control-Shift-Z.

The Rasterize dialog box appears.

3	Type or choose a resolution, choose an anti-aliasing setting, and click OK.

The original vector objects are deleted and are replaced with a bitmap image.


Lock
Lock (Modify menu)

Locks selected objects in place on a layer to prevent accidentally moving, cutting, or deleting them.

•	You cannot move, rotate, scale, skew, or reflect locked objects.

•	You can apply stroke and fill attributes such as a color to a locked object.

Knowing the lock status of an object

A lock icon [image] appears on the Info Bar when you select a locked object.

You can also click [image] on the Main Toolbar to lock a selected object. When a selected object is locked, the Unlock command becomes active in the Modify menu and on the Main Toolbar.

  Related Topics


Unlock
Unlock (Modify menu)

Unlocks a selected, locked object.

Knowing the lock status of an object

A lock icon [image] appears on the Info Bar when you select a locked object. The icon disappears when you unlock an object.

You can also click [image] on the Main Toolbar to unlock selected, locked objects. When the selected object is unlocked, the Lock command becomes active in the Modify menu and on the Main Toolbar.

  Related Topics


Ungroup
Ungroup (Modify menu)

Separates a group into individual objects. Ungrouped objects can be individually modified. Ungroup objects created with the Rectangle and Ellipse tools in order to modify their path points. With groups selected, you can also click [image] on the Main Toolbar to ungroup objects.

Ungrouping objects originating on different layers

When you group objects from different layers, all objects in the group move to the active layer.

When you ungroup a group containing objects from different layers, each object returns to its original layer, when the General >“Remember layer info” preference is checked.

  Related Topics


Group
Group (Modify menu)

Freezes two or more selected objects or path points in relation to one another. When modifying groups, they act as a single unit, while each object within the group retains its individual attributes.

•	Grouped objects transform (move, rotate, scale, skew, and reflect) and resize as a unit.

•	Objects created with the Rectangle and Ellipse tools are grouped by default.

Objects you group can have different stroke and fill attributes. Different types of objects, such as paths and images, may be grouped together.

Selecting an object within a group

Hold down Alt and click to select an object within a group (up to eight nested levels).

Grouping objects across layers

When you group objects from different layers, all objects in the group move to the active layer.

When you ungroup a group containing objects from different layers, each object returns to its original layer, when the General >“Remember layer info” preference is checked.

  Related Topics


Constrain
Constrain (Modify menu)

Sets the angle of the invisible axis for drawing with the Rectangle and Ellipse tools. The default angle is 0 (zero). If you change the constrain angle, the Rectangle or Ellipse tool draws objects on the new axis.

Hold down Shift as you draw an object with the Polygon, Line, Pen, or Bezigon tool to align it with the new axis. The object aligns to the axis in 45-degree increments from the specified constrain angle.


Font
Font (Text menu)

Displays a submenu of fonts that you can apply to selected text or to a selected text block. A checkmark indicates the font applied to the selected text.

•	If no text is selected, the default font is checked on the submenu.

•	If no name is checked on the submenu, either more than one font is applied to the selection or the font used in the selection is not installed.

Change fonts in three places:

•	Text > Font

•	Font pop-up [image] on the Text Toolbar.

•	Font pop-up on the Text Inspector.

  Related Topics


Size (Text menu)

Displays a submenu of type sizes. A checkmark indicates the type size applied to the selected text.

•	If no text is selected, the default type size is checked on the submenu.

•	If no size is checked on the submenu, either more than one size is applied to the selection or the size used in the selection is not listed on the menu. Use the Text Inspector to view and change text sizes not listed in the submenu.

To change the type size:

1	Select text.

2	Choose Text > Size and choose a point size.

You can also choose one of the following:

Other: Displays a dialog box for entering a custom point size

Smaller: Reduces selected text one point size

Larger: Increases selected text one point size.

Change type size in three places:

•	Text > Size

•	Size pop-up [image] on the Text Toolbar.

•	Size pop-up on the Text Inspector.

  Related Topics


Style (Text menu)

Displays a submenu with the following type styles: Plain, Bold, Italic, and BoldItalic. A checkmark indicates the type style applied to the selected text.

•	When no text is selected, a checkmark indicates the default type style.

•	Available type styles depend on the selected font. Type styles not available for a particular font appear grayed out and cannot be selected.

Change text style in three places:

•	Text > Style

•	Style pop-up [image] on the Text Toolbar

•	Text Inspector.

Style shortcuts

Plain	F5, Control-Shift-Alt-P
Bold	F6, Control-Alt-B
Italic	F7, Control-Alt-I
BoldItalic	F8, Control-Shift-Alt-O
  Related Topics


Text Effect
Text Effect (Text menu)

Applies one of six special styles to text.

•	 Highlight

•	 Inline

•	 Shadow

•	 Strikethrough

•	 Underline

•	 Zoom.


Highlight text effect

Surrounds the selected text with a gray box.

Highlight options

Choose Text > Effects > Highlight to display the Highlight Effect dialog box.

•	Position: Enter a positive number to shift the highlight box above the text baseline. Enter a negative number to shift the highlight box below the baseline.

•	Dash: Select a dash effect to apply to the highlight.

•	Stroke Width: Enter a number to set the vertical width of the highlight box. The width of the highlight box defaults to the size of the text.

•	Stroke color: Choose a color for the highlight from the pop-up.

•	Overprint: Check to overprint the Highlight Effect.

  Related Topics


Inline text effect

Draws an outline around each letter of the selected text, similar to the effect of Inset Path.

Inline Effect options

Choose Text > Effects > Inline to display the Inline Effect dialog box.

•	Count: Enter the number of concentric outlines.

•	Stroke Width: Enter the point size of the stroke of each outline.

•	Stroke color: Choose a color for the text or the inline effect from the pop-up.

•	Background Width: Enter the distance in points between the text and each ring of the effect.

•	Background color: Choose a color for the space between the text and the effect path from the pop-up.

  Related Topics


Shadow text effect

Creates a gray shadow behind the selected text.

  Related Topics


Strikethrough text effect

Draws a line through the middle of the selected text.

Strikethrough Effect options

Choose Text > Effects > Strikethrough to display the Strikethrough Effect dialog box.

•	Position: Enter a positive number to shift the strikethrough up in relation to the text baseline. Enter a negative number to shift the strikethrough down in relation to the text baseline.

•	Dash: Select a dash effect for the strikethrough.

•	Stroke Width: Enter the point size of the stroke of the strikethrough.

•	Stroke color: Choose a color for the strikethrough from the pop-up.

•	Overprint: Check to overprint the strikethrough.

  Related Topics


Underline text effect

Draws a line below the selected text.

Underline Effect options

Choose Text > Effects > Underline to display the Underline Effect dialog box.

•	Position: Enter a positive number to shift the underline up in relation to the text baseline. Enter a negative number to shift the underline down in relation to the text baseline.

•	Dash: Select a dash effect to apply to the underline.

•	Stroke Width: Enter the point size of the stroke of the underline.

•	Stroke color: Choose a color for the underline from the pop-up.

•	Overprint: Check to overprint the underline.

  Related Topics


Zoom text effect

Applies a 3D effect on selected text.

Zoom Effect options

Choose Text > Effects > Zoom to display the Zoom Effect dialog box.

•	Zoom to: Enter a percentage you want the zoom to scale to as it zooms. For example, entering 50% causes the zoom to start at its original size and zoom down to 50% of the original size by the end of the zoom path.

•	Offset: Enter numbers to define the direction and distance (in points) of the zoom.

°	x: Entering a positive number zooms text to the right. Entering a negative number zooms text to the left.

°	y: Entering a positive number zooms text up. Entering a negative number zooms text down.

•	From: Choose a color from the pop-up for the starting color of the zoom. This color starts closest to the original text.

•	To: Choose a color from the pop-up for the ending color of the zoom.

  Related Topics


Alignment
Alignment (Text menu)

Choose to align text in relation to the text block.

The following text alignments are available:

•	Left:   (Control-Shift-Alt-L) Aligns the left side of a column of text to the left edge

•	Right:   (Control-Shift-Alt-R) Aligns the right side of a column of text to the right edge.

•	Center:   (Control-Shift-Alt-M) Centers text in the current column

•	Justified:   (Control-Shift-Alt-J) Aligns text to the right and left sides of a column, adjusting spacing between words.

Change text alignment in three places:

•	Text > Alignment

•	Alignment buttons [image] [image] [image] [image] on the Text Toolbar

•	Alignment buttons on the Text Inspector.

  Related Topics


Leading
Leading (Text menu)

Displays leading options. FreeHand adjusts the leading of individual lines of text, paragraphs of text, or entire text blocks.

Leading options

•	Other: Select to make detailed adjustments to the leading of the selected line, paragraph, or text block.

•	Extra: Enter a number equal to the point size of the type plus the extra leading you specify. If your type is 10 points and you enter 2, then the leading is 12 points.

•	Fixed: Enter the leading at the point size you specify. If you enter 12, then the leading is 12 points, regardless of the type size.

•	Percentage: Enter the percentage to scale the leading. Standard leading is 120 percent. If type is 10 points and you enter 120 for Percentage, then leading is 12 points.

•	Solid: Set the leading equal to the point size of the text.

•	Auto: Set the leading to 120% of the point size of the text.

Change leading in three places:

•	Text > Leading

•	Leading pop-up [image] on the Text Toolbar.

•	Leading pop-up on the Text Inspector.

  Related Topics


Convert Case
Convert Case (Text menu)

Case is the condition of a letter pertaining to whether it is uppercase (capital letters) or lowercase (small letters). Choose from five options for applying to selected text a case format from the Text > Convert Case menu. Letters entered after a case format is applied do not conform to the format.

Checking a Convert Case option under Use Exceptions for protects all words in the list of exceptions whenever the checked option is applied.

  Related Topics


Set reduction as a percentage of uppercase letters


Converts to uppercase all letters in a selected text block.


Converts to lowercase all letters in a selected text block.


Converts to uppercase all letters in a selected text block, then reduces the point size specified in the Text > Convert Case > Settings dialog box.


Converts to uppercase the first letter of each word in a selected text block.


Converts to an uppercase letter only the first letter of each sentence in a selected block of text.


Designating exceptions to capitalization options


Enter one or more exceptions in the entry field. If entering more than one, separate each with a space.


Delete a highlighted exception.


Special Characters
Special Characters (Text menu)

Inserts a special character from the Special Characters submenu. A special character appears after the insertion point inside a text block.

To insert a special character:

1	Use the Text tool [image] to place an insertion point.

2	Choose Text > Special characters, and choose a special character.

Special characters

•	End Of Column: Forces text after insertion point to top of next column

•	End Of Line (Shift-Enter): Breaks the current text line, wrapping text following the insertion point

•	Non-Breaking Space (Control-Shift-H): Keeps words together on the same line

•	Em Space (Control-Shift-M): Inserts a space the width of the current type size

•	En Space (Control-Shift-N): Inserts a space one-half the width of the current type size

•	Thin Space (Control-Shift-T): Inserts a space one-tenth the width of the current type size

•	Em Dash: Inserts a dash the width of the current type size

•	En Dash: Inserts a dash one-half the width of the current type size

•	Discretionary Hyphen (Control-_ (underscore)): Inserts a hyphen after the last letter before a break in the text line.

Using other special characters

Your Windows software contains other special characters that you can use in FreeHand. Consult your system documentation to learn how to insert these characters.

  Related Topics


Text Editor
Text Editor (Text menu)

Use the Text Editor to enter text into a dialog box instead of into a text block, especially when working with text at small point sizes, large amounts of text, or text attached to a path.

Showing non-printing text symbols

To show non-printing text symbols in the Text Editor, check Show invisibles. These symbols are only visible and editable in the Text Editor, except em dash and en dash, which are visible in all text.

Note	Use a discretionary hyphen to hyphenate without checking Hyphenate in the Text Paragraph Inspector.

To insert a text symbol in text, whether in the Text Editor or in a text block, place the text cursor in the appropriate place in text, choose Text > Special Characters, and then choose the appropriate symbol. Space, tab, and end-of-paragraph symbols are inserted using the spacebar, Tab key, and Return key, respectively.

Displaying the Text Editor

•	To create a new text block and open the Text Editor simultaneously, hold down Alt when creating a text block.

•	To simultaneously make the text active and display the Text Editor, hold down Alt, and double-click a text block with the Pointer tool.

•	To always edit text in the Text Editor, check the Text > “Always use Text Editor” preference.

Note	Right-click a text block, and then choose Editor from the menu to display the Text Editor.

Setting the Text Editor as the default

With the Text > “Always use Text Editor” preference checked, the Text Editor appears when creating or editing a text block.

  Related Topics


How to use the Text Editor

1	Select the text block and choose Text > Editor or use ||Command-Shift-E|Control-Shift-E@ to display the Text Editor.

2	Edit the text in the Text Editor.

Check the 12 Point Black checkbox in the Text Editor to ignore formatting attributes and display text in 12-point black type. This option does not affect the actual text in a document.

3	Click OK, Cancel, or Apply.

°	Click OK to apply changes to the text and close the Text Editor.

°	Click Cancel to close the Text Editor without applying changes.

°	Click Apply to apply changes to the text without leaving the Text Editor.


Spelling
Spelling (Text menu)

Opens the Spelling panel, which can be used to automatically check spelling.

When one text block is active or selected, the Spelling panel checks only the selected text block and its links. When no text blocks are selected, the Spelling panel checks the entire document.

Using the Spelling panel

Click an element below for more information:

View each occurrence of a word in context across the bottom of the Spelling panel.

Set the behavior of the Spelling panel in the Spelling preferences. Change how words are added to the dictionary as well as whether or not duplicate words and capitalization errors are detected.

  Related Topics


Word entry field: View unknown or potentially misspelled words. To verify spelling for a word, enter it directly into this field.


Displays Start before checking and then displays Ignore.

•	Click Start to start the spelling check.

•	Click Ignore to leave this occurrence of the suspect word unaltered.


Ignores this and all future occurrences of the word, until you quit FreeHand.


Change: Replaces the suspect word with the word displayed in the word entry field.

Delete: Removes a duplicate word and finds the next suspect word.


Changes this and all future occurrences of the word, until you quit FreeHand.


While checking, this button adds the current word to the dictionary.

Tip	Add words before you start by typing them in the Word entry field and clicking the Add button.


Lists possible alternatives to the suspect word.


Choose the appropriate language dictionary for checking spelling.


Scrolls the document as necessary during a Spelling session to ensure that the current found word remains on screen.


When a suspect word is found, this field displays suggestions for the correct spelling. Suggestions are displayed based on the selected dictionary.


Displays the suspect word in its context.


Displays the suspect word as it appears in the document.


Run Around Selection
Run Around Selection (Text menu)

Flows text around a selected object, keeping the text away from the object by a specified distance. Select an object and choose Text > Run Around Selection to set options.

•	Click [image] to remove text run around.

•	Click [image] to flow text around a selected object.

Note	Run Around Selection is unavailable when a group or blend is selected. To flow text around a group, blend, or bitmap image draw a path around it and then set text run around for the path. Alternatively, subselect objects in a group or blend and then set text run around.

Standoff distances

Enter a positive value or a negative value to set the minimum distance between text and the selected object.

  Related Topics


Flow Inside Path
Flow Inside Path (Text menu)

Flows a selected text block inside a selected, closed path.

If no text block is selected, Flow Inside Path creates an empty text block flowed inside the selected path.

How Flow Inside Path works

•	Text flowed inside a closed path starts at the top of the closed path, and flows to its edges. The path acts as a boundary.

•	To specify how far text is inset from the edge of the path select the text and display the Object Inspector to set Inset distances.

•	Text formatting (font, size, and type style) remains intact when flowed inside a path.

•	Edit text flowed inside a path directly, without removing it from the path.

•	Text can be flowed inside a visible or invisible path. Display the borders of an invisible path by checking the Display border option in the Object Inspector.

•	Text flowed inside a path can be rotated, scaled, skewed, or reflected.

•	When you select a path with text flowed inside it, a box below the path indicates whether all the text is visible. When the box is empty, all of the entered text is visible. A black dot indicates that there is text overflow.

Removing text from a path

Choose Text > Detach from Path to remove text from inside a path and place it back inside a text block.

  Related Topics


Attach to Path

Attaches a selected text block to a selected path. If no text block is selected, Attach to Path creates an empty text block attached to the selected path.

Use Attach to path to position text around objects, or paths—for example, around the perimeter of a circle.

How Attach to Path works

•	Text formatting (font, size, and type style) remains intact when attached to a path.

•	With the Text tool, double-click text attached to a path and edit it without removing it from the path.

•	Text flows onto a path based on the direction of the path. If the text reads in the wrong direction, subselect the path (Alt-click) and choose Modify > Alter Path > Reverse Direction.

•	Text can be attached to a visible or invisible path. Display the path by checking Show path in the Object Inspector or by working in Keyline mode.

•	Use the Object Inspector to rotate characters along a path, skew the text horizontally or vertically, or change the text alignment.

•	Text attached to a path can be rotated, scaled, skewed, or reflected.

•	Drag [image] to move text attached to a path. Enter values in the Inset entry fields in the Object Inspector to move text to a precise location along a path.

FreeHand 8 automatically adjusts spacing of left-aligned text on a path to avoid overlapping letters due to path curvature. FreeHand 8 does not adjust text on a path in files created in earlier versions of FreeHand, unless you detach them from and re-attach them to the path. Conversely, left-aligned text attached to paths in FreeHand 8 retains the adjustment when opened in previous versions of FreeHand.

Removing text from a path

Choose Text > Detach from Path to remove text attached to a path and place it back inside a text block.

  Related Topics


Detach From Path
Detach from Path (Text menu)

Separates text from a path when text is attached to or flowing inside the path.

•	Detaching text from a path results in two individual objects: the text block and the path.

•	Detaching text from a path returns the text to its original form. Any transformations are removed.

  Related Topics


Remove Transforms
Remove Transforms (Text menu)

Removes any transformations applied to a text block.

Remove Transforms removes:

•	Rotate

•	Skew

•	Reflect

•	Flow Inside Path

•	Attach to Path.

  Related Topics


Convert To Paths
Convert To Paths (Text menu)

Changes the selected text into editable vector objects.

How Convert to Paths works

•	When you convert text to paths, each character becomes a single path or composite path, and all the paths are grouped as a single object.

•	Select Modify > Ungroup to edit individual words or letters within the text group.

•	Letters with more than one component, like the letter i, convert to composite paths. Letters with enclosed spaces, like the letter O, convert to composite paths with transparent holes.

•	Once converted to paths, a text’s font, type size, and type style are no longer editable.

Note	You cannot convert paths to text. If you want the text as it was before you converted it to paths, you can choose Edit > Undo repeatedly until you undo the Convert to Paths command. If you do not have enough Undo levels to do this and you have not saved the document since converting to paths, choose File > Revert. This restores the text to an editable form, but you lose all other unsaved changes.

  Related Topics


New Window
New Window (Window menu)

Selecting New Window opens an additional document window for the active document. Move, resize, scroll, and zoom the secondary window independently of the original window.

Use up to eight windows per document to simultaneously view different parts of the document.


UserPrep file

FreeHand ships with several UserPrep files designed to help customize FreeHand for high-end printing to specific output devices.

Choose from the list of installed files containing PostScript code in the UserPrep file pop-up in the Print Setup dialog box to modify printing to PostScript printers. Choose None to print without a UserPrep file. You will not need a UserPrep file when printing to most desktop printers.

The UserPrep files are located in the Macromedia \ English \ Userprep directory.


Wizards

Use FreeHand’s wizards to quickly begin a project and to simplify your workflow. Wizards are interactive screens that guide you through and actually perform a variety of tasks.

To view the wizards, choose Help > Wizards. The Choose a wizard screen offers access to five topics: Welcome, Setup, Screen-based, Stationery, and Publication.

Choosing a wizard

Use	To
Welcome	Create a new document, open the previous document, choose and open a document from a list, open a template on the FreeHand 8 CD-ROM, or launch FreeHand Help. This screen appears when launching FreeHand.
Setup	Create a document based on an illustration style, either freehand or technical. Choose colors, color mode, unit of measurement, page size, and page orientation.
Screen-based	Create a document optimized for creating graphics, either for the Internet or multimedia/image editing. Choose colors and set the size and orientation for onscreen designs.
Stationery	Create documents for common business usage: letterhead stationery, envelopes, and business cards. Choose colors and a standard paper size. You also can browse through a variety of layout ideas.
Publication	Create multiple-page documents. Choose page size, number of pages, page orientation, colors, unit of measurement, and styles.
Note	With some wizard settings, you can add more than one preset color palette to the Color List.


Toolbox

Contains 17 tools used to draw, edit, or view the document.

Click an element below for more information:

Double-click tools that have a bracket in the upper, right corner to open a dialog box and make custom settings for that tool.


Pointer Tool

 Selects, moves, or resizes objects.

•	Click an object to select it. Points or handles are displayed on or around selected objects.

•	Click a point on an ungrouped curved path to display the curve handles associated with the point.

•	Double-click an object to display 8 transformation handles and a moveable centerpoint, when the General > "Enable transform handles" preference is checked.

Selecting objects

To select	Do this
Objects, paths, or points within a group	Alt-click
Objects, paths, or points behind another object	Control-click
Multiple objects or points	Shift-click
Multiple objects or points	Click and drag a selection area
Moving objects

To	Do this
Move objects, paths, or points	Click and drag
Constrain movement to 45 or 90 degrees	Shift-click and drag
Constrain curve handle movement to original angle	Alt-Shift-click and drag
Resizing objects

To	Do this
Resize object	Click and drag a point or handle or Double-click and use transform handles
Resize an ellipse to a circle	Shift-click and drag
Resize a rectangle to a square	Shift-click and drag
Maintain ratio of group or text	Shift-click and drag
Resize object from center	Alt-click and drag
  Related Topics


Text tool

 Use the Text tool to insert a text block.

•	Click and drag to create a new text block, or

•	Click to place an auto-expanding text block.

Sizing a text block

With the Text tool, click and drag to size a text block as you create it. With the Pointer tool, drag a corner handle on an existing text block to resize.

Creating an auto-expanding text block

By default, clicking with the Text tool creates an auto-expanding text block and dragging with the Text tool creates a standard (non-auto-expanding) text block. This behavior is controlled by the Text “New default-sized text containers auto-expand” preference. By deselecting this preference, all newly-created text blocks are non-auto-expanding.

•	To create a text block that auto-expands horizontally, press Control while dragging vertically to define the fixed height.

•	To create a text block that auto-expands vertically, press Control while dragging horizontally to define the fixed width.

  Related Topics


Rectangle tool

 Use the Rectangle tool to draw rectangles or squares.

•	 Click and drag the crosshair cursor to position and size a rectangle.

•	 Ungroup a rectangle to change it to a path.

Constraining the shape of a rectangle

To	Do this
Draw a square	Shift-click and drag
Draw a rectangle from center	Alt-click and drag
Draw a square from center	Alt-Shift-click and drag
Drawing a rounded-corner rectangle

Double-click the Rectangle tool to open the Rectangle Tool dialog box.

Corner radius: Enter a value from 0 to 100 points or drag the slider. A zero radius creates rectangles with 90-degree corners.

Use the Object Inspector to edit the corner radius of selected rectangles.

  Related Topics


Polygon tool

 Use the Polygon tool to draw polygons or stars. Polygons and stars are ungrouped, freeform paths.

•	Click and drag the crosshair cursor to create a polygon or star based on the current settings in the Polygon tool dialog box.

Tip	Hold down Shift to constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree angles.

Polygon tool dialog box

Double-click the Polygon tool to open the Polygon tool dialog box.

Number of sides: Enter a value or drag the slider to change the number of sides for a polygon or star.

Shape: Click to choose a polygon or star.

Star points: With a star selected, use the following options to edit star points:

Automatic: Click to set the default acuteness or obtuseness of the star.

Manual: Drag the acute / obtuse slider to manually adjust the acuteness or obtuseness of the star.

  Related Topics


Ellipse tool

Draws ellipses and circles.

•	 Click and drag the crosshair cursor to position and size the ellipse.

•	 Ungroup an ellipse to change it to a path.

Constraining the shape of an ellipse

To	Do this
Draw a circle	Shift-click and drag
Draw an ellipse from center	Alt-click and drag
Draw a circle from center	Alt-Shift-click and drag
  Related Topics


Line tool

Draws a line segment, which is an ungrouped path consisting of two points.

Constraining line segments

To	Do this
Draw a line segment at 45 or 90 degrees	Shift-click and drag
Draw a line segment from center point	Alt-click and drag
Draw a line from center at 45 or 90 degrees	Shift-Alt-click and drag
  Related Topics


Freehand tool

Draws lines, which are converted into ungrouped, freeform paths. When drawing a curved line, FreeHand converts it to a Bezier curve.

Constraining the shape of a freehand path

To	Do this
Draw straight path	Alt-click and drag
Draw path at 45 degree angle	Shift-Alt-click and drag
Erase path as you draw	Press Control without releasing the mouse button, and retrace the path.
Continue drawing existing path	Select a path, position the cursor on an endpoint, and drag to continue drawing.
Freehand tool dialog box:

Double-click the Freehand tool to open the Freehand tool dialog box and click to select one of three tool operations or tool-specific options.

Tool operation

Select the operation you want this tool to perform:

Freehand tool
Variable stroke tool
Calligraphic pen tool
The Freehand tool icon in the Toolbox changes to represent the current tool.

Options

Tight fit: Click to use the maximum number of points along a path.

°	Creates more accurate paths

°	Requires more memory

Draw dotted line: Click to show a dotted line as you draw. The line represents the sample points, and drawing is more responsive. The line becomes a normal path when you release the mouse button.

  Related Topics


Variable Stroke tool

Draw closed paths of varying widths.

Use the Variable stroke tool to draw pressure-sensitive paths that look like brush strokes. When used with a pressure-sensitive stylus, increasing pressure increases the stroke width.

If you do not own a pressure-sensitive stylus, use the keyboard to vary the stroke width:

To	Do this
Increase stroke width	Press 2 or right cursor key
Decrease stroke width	Press 1 or left cursor key
Options

•	Tight fit: Click to use the maximum number of points along a path.

°	Creates more accurate paths

°	Uses more memory

•	Draw dotted line: Click to show a dotted line as you draw. The line represents the sample points, and drawing is more responsive. The line effect disappears when you release the mouse button.

•	Auto Remove overlap (slow): Click to automatically perform Remove Overlap on variable stroke paths.

Width

Min: Enter a value or drag the slider to set the minimum stroke width. The number is in the document’s unit of measurement.

Max: Enter a value or drag the slider to set maximum stroke width. The number is in the a document’s unit of measurement and can range from 0 to 72 points (or the equivalent).

  Related Topics


Calligraphic pen tool

Draws closed paths that look like calligraphy.

Options

•	Tight fit: Click to use the maximum number of points along path.

°	Creates more accurate paths

°	Uses more memory

•	Draw dotted line: Click to show a dotted line as you draw. The line represents the sample points, and drawing is more responsive. The line effect disappears when you release the mouse button.

•	Auto remove overlap (slow): Click to automatically perform Remove Overlap on calligraphic stroke paths.

Width

•	Fixed: Click to draw a path of constant width. Enter a value or drag the slider to set stroke width.

•	Variable: Click to draw a path of variable width. Enter values or drag sliders for minimum and maximum stroke width.

•	Min: Enter a value or drag the slider to set minimum stroke width. The number is in the document’s unit of measurement.

•	Max: Enter a value or drag the slider to set maximum stroke width. The number is in the document’s unit of measurement, Values range from 0 to 72 points (or the equivalent).

Angle

Enter a value or turn the dial to set the angle of the calligraphic stroke.

As with a real calligraphic pen, the actual width of the stroke at a given location on the path depends on the direction in which you drag. For example, a 90 degree angle causes a vertical stroke to be narrower than a horizontal stroke.

  Related Topics


Bezier Pen tool
Pen tool

Draws paths by placing curve, corner, and connector points, adjusting them as you draw. The Pen tool draws a curved path as a Bezier curve.

With the Pen tool, you have more control over the exact shape of the path.

Selecting point type

To place a	Do this
Curve point	Click and drag
Corner point	Click
Connector point	Alt-click and drag
Working with points as you draw with the pen tool

To	Do this
Place the next point at a 45 degree angle	Shift-click and drag
Erase the most recent point	Delete
Move a point as you draw	Control
To close a path, click the path’s starting point.

  Related Topics


Knife tool

Cuts a selected, ungrouped path.

Operation

Freehand: Cuts across an object much like the Freehand tool draws.

Straight: Cuts a straight line across the object.

Width

Enter a value from 0 to 72 points to designate the width of the cut line.

Options

Close cut paths: Closes both sides of the path along cut lines, creating separate closed paths.

Tight fit: Closely follows the original cut line.

Click the Knife tool at the location on the path where you want to cut the path. When you cut a closed path once, it becomes a single open path. To cut a closed path into separate paths, cut it at two or more places.

Note	When you cut a path with the Knife tool, the position of other points does not change.

  Related Topics


Bezigon tool

Draws straight lines and arcs by placing curve, corner, and connector points.

The Bezigon tool draws shapes easily because the program draws perfectly straight lines and applies automatic curvature to curves as you draw.

Selecting point type

Select the Bezigon tool. Click a button in the Object Inspector or use a modifier key to place a specific point type.

To place	Click this icon	Or do this
Curve point	Left	Alt-click
Corner point	Center	Click
Connector point	Right	Alt-right click
To close a path, click the path’s starting point.

  Related Topics


Freeform tool

Use the Freeform tool to push or pull any part of the path. Unlike Bend-O-Matic, the Freeform tool automatically adds points, deletes points, or changes point type along the path as you edit the path. The Reshape Area feature reshapes all paths within an area. Double-click the Freeform tool in the Toolbox to display the Freeform tool dialog box.

Push/Pull

Check to display settings for the Freeform tool’s push and pull features.

Reshape Area

Check to display settings for the Freeform tool’s reshape feature.

Size

To set the diameter of the push cursor, type a number from 1 to 1000 pixels or use the slider.

Precision

To set the accuracy of the push cursor, enter a number from 1 to 10 or use the slider. Lower numbers result in less precision (fewer points added to the path); higher numbers result in more precision (more points added to the path).

Bend

Choose one of two bend methods in the pop-up.

•	To pull a segment between two points on a selected path, choose Between Points.

•	To pull a segment of a specific length with the pull cursor as the centerpoint, choose By Length.

Length

When bending By Length, enter a segment length from 1 to 1000 pixels or use the slider.

Size (Pressure)

Check to activate a drawing tablet’s pressure-sensitive size adjustment capability.

Length (Pressure)

Check to activate a drawing tablet’s pressure-sensitive length adjustment capability.

Freeform Reshape Area

Choose Reshape Area in the Freeform tool dialog box to display the Freeform Reshape dialog box.

With Reshape Area chosen, the Freeform tool button in the Toolbox changes to indicate that Reshape Area mode is active.

  Related Topics


To pull a path segment of a specified length

To pull a path segment between two points

To push a path segment

To reshape an area of a drawing


To pull a path segment of a specified length:

1	Double-click the Freeform tool in the Toolbox to display the Freeform tool dialog box.

2	Choose the Push/Pull option.

3	Choose By Length in the Bend pop-up.

4	Specify the length of the path segment to be pulled in the Length field or use the slider, and then click OK.

5	Point to the selected path, press and hold the mouse button, and drag the path.


To pull a path segment between two points:

1	Double-click the Freeform tool in the Toolbox to display the Freeform tool dialog box.

2	Choose the Push/Pull option.

3	Select Between Points in the Bend pop-up, and then click OK.

4	Move the cursor onto the selected path, click and hold the mouse, and drag the path.


To push a path segment:

1	Double-click the Freeform tool in the Toolbox to display the Freeform tool dialog box.

2	Choose the Push/Pull option.

3	Type the size (diameter) of the push cursor from 1 to 1000 pixels or use the slider.

4	Type the precision from 1 to 10 or use the slider, and then click OK.

5	Move the cursor away from the path and click and hold the mouse button.

The push cursor appears. If the pull cursor appears instead, select the path.

6	Drag the push cursor along the path.

The outer circle pushes the path.

Note	To increase the width of the push cursor, press the right cursor key, the number 2 key, or the close bracket key. To decrease the width, press the left cursor key, the number 1 key, or the open bracket key.


To reshape an area of a drawing:

1	Double-click the Freeform tool in the Toolbox to display the Freeform tool dialog box.

2	Check the Reshape Area option.

3	Type the size (diameter) of the reshaping circle from 1 to 1000 pixels or use the slider.

4	Type the strength of the reshaping circle from 1 to 100 percent, and click OK.

With the General > “Smoother editing” preference checked, the distance between the red inner circle and the outer circle represents the strength setting.

5	Move the reshape area cursor over an area to be reshaped.

6	Hold down the mouse button and drag the reshape area cursor.


Magnification tool

Magnifies all or parts of the document.

Use the Magnification tool

To	Do this
Zoom in	Click
Zoom out (half of current magnification)	Alt-click
Magnify specific area	Click and drag a box around an area
  Related Topics


Trace tool

The Trace tool traces any object that can appear on screen in a FreeHand document: TIFFs, EPSs, LRGs, text, or native graphics. The Trace tool automatically traces graphics according to the settings in the Trace tool dialog box. Double-click the Trace tool button on the Toolbox to display trace settings.	Click an element below for more information:


To trace an object

Choosing a color mode

Choosing the number of colors

Considering resolution and memory allocation

Choosing trace layers

Choosing the way FreeHand creates trace paths

Setting trace conformity

Setting noise tolerance


To trace an object

1	Click the Trace tool in the Toolbox.

2	Use the Trace tool crosshair cursor to drag a selection area around the object you want to trace.

°	Hold down Shift to constrain the Trace tool’s selection area to a square.

°	Hold down Control to trace from the center of the selection area.


Choosing a color mode

To set the color mode of your resulting trace, choose either Colors or Grays from the Color mode pop-up. Whether your original graphic is bitmap or vector, use the Trace tool to convert a graphic in one of the following ways:

•	From color to color

•	From grayscale to grayscale

•	From color to grayscale.

For example, if you wish to trace a color TIFF in grayscale, then choose Grays from the Color mode pop-up. In the resulting vector graphic, gray values are substituted for the original color pixels in the TIFF.

Tip	Use the Name All Colors Xtra to place colors from imported or traced graphics into the Color List. Choose Xtras > Colors > Name All Colors


Choosing the number of colors

FreeHand internally identifies the frequency of each color in a graphic and then averages all color values evenly within the number of colors set in the Color mode pop-up (up to 256). Since the colors available determine how true of a match your trace is to the original graphic, choose a high value when tracing graphics with subtle color variations. Otherwise, you may lose these variations in your trace.

If the graphic goes beyond the limit you specify, FreeHand automatically converts the excess values to the closest values of the colors selected in the graphic. In the Color mode pop-up, either enter a color value limit in the entry field or choose from the pop-up. Settings higher than 16 use more RAM.


Considering resolution and memory alloction
Considering resolution and memory allocation

When tracing graphics, choose High, Normal, or Low resolution in the Resolution pop-up to determine the degree of detail in the resulting trace. A setting of High will capture more details than a setting of Normal, and a setting of Normal more than a setting of Low. However, there are two advantages of using Normal or Low. conversion time is less than when using the High setting and the Low setting requires less RAM than the Normal setting and Normal less than High.

When the amount of system RAM limits your ability to trace a high-resolution graphic and you cannot allocate more RAM, FreeHand uses the lowest allowable resolution setting.


Choosing trace layers

With the Trace layers pop-up, designate traceable layers: All, Foreground, or Background. FreeHand traces all paths on the layers designated.


Choosing the way FreeHand creates trace paths

Trace paths can be either open or closed. FreeHand converts your graphics into paths according to the settings in the Path conversion pop-up.

The Path conversion pop-up has four choices: Outline, Centerline, Center/Outline, and Outer edge. These settings determine the placement of strokes in the resulting trace paths.

•	Outline—FreeHand traces along the outside border of the graphic elements. The resulting trace objects are closed, filled paths.

Choosing Outline displays the Overlap paths checkbox:

°	With Overlap paths checked, the trace objects overlap each other to prevent light leaks. Checking this option is most suitable when tracing continuous-tone images such as scans of photographs, paintings, and rendered graphics.

°	Uncheck Overlap paths when tracing logos, line art, and text.

•	Centerline—FreeHand traces at the center of the graphic strokes. This option is best suited for tracing line-intensive graphics that have almost no filled areas, such as technical drawings and schematics.

Choosing Centerline displays the Uniform lines checkbox.

°	Checking Uniform lines yields a trace object with a consistent stroke width of one point throughout, even though the original graphic contains lines of varying widths.

°	With Uniform lines unchecked, FreeHand generates open paths with varying stroke widths.

•	Centerline/Outline—Choose this to use a combination of both Outline and Centerline methods. FreeHand evaluates the original graphic and decides what attributes to give each trace path based on the Open paths below XX pixels option.

Enter a value from 2 to 10 pixels in Open paths below XX pixels entry field. The default value is 3 pixels. The Trace tool uses this value to determine which paths are drawn as open paths. For example, using the default setting of 3, FreeHand draws an open, stroked trace path for any item in the graphic that is less than 3 pixels wide.

•	Outer edge—FreeHand traces only the outer contours of the graphic, providing an accurate clipping path so that the original graphic can be pasted inside.


 Setting trace conformity

Use the Trace conformity slider/entry field, with values ranging from 0 to 10, to define how closely the trace paths conform to the curved and straight lines of the original graphic. A setting of 10 produces trace paths that closely conform to the original graphic, but it increases the number of points in the trace paths. A setting of 0 has the least amount of conformity to the original graphic and has fewer points, resulting in a smaller converted graphic file. This setting is useful to create traces that are more approximate versions of the original graphic.


 Setting noise tolerance

With the Noise tolerance slider/entry field, FreeHand eliminates stray pixels, or noise, most frequently found in bad scans or original graphics of poor quality. The higher the setting the more FreeHand ignores noise. In contrast, a minimum setting tells FreeHand to keep as much file information as possible.


Enter or choose the number of colors or gray levels for the trace. Choose a high value when tracing graphics with subtle color variations.

If the graphic goes beyond the limit you specify, FreeHand then automatically converts the excess values to the closest values of the colors selected in the graphic.


Set the color mode of your resulting trace. Choose either Colors or Grays.

For example, if you wish to trace a color TIFF in grayscale, then choose Grays from the Color mode pop-up. In the resulting vector graphic, gray values are substituted for the original color pixels of the TIFF.

Tip	Use the Name All Colors Xtra to place colors from imported or traced graphics into the Color List. Choose Xtras > Colors > Name All Colors.


Choose High, Normal, or Low resolution to determine the degree of detail in the resulting trace. A setting of High captures more details than a setting of Normal, and likewise, a setting of Normal more than a setting of Low.

High-resolution traces take longer and use more RAM, but they retain greater detail.

Note	For high-resolution tracing, FreeHand may require large amounts of RAM.


Designate traceable layers: All, Foreground, or Background. FreeHand traces all paths on the layers you designate.


Trace paths can be either open or closed. FreeHand converts your graphics into paths according to the setting you choose in the Path conversion pop-up.

•	Outline: FreeHand traces along the outside border of the graphic’s objects. The resulting trace objects are closed, filled paths.

•	Centerline: FreeHand traces at the center of the graphic strokes. This option is best suited for tracing line-intensive graphics that have almost no filled areas, such as technical drawings and schematics.

•	Centerline / Outline: Choose this to use a combination of both Outline and Centerline methods. By means of the Open paths below [É] pixels option, FreeHand evaluates the original graphic and decides what attributes to give each trace path.

°	Enter a value from 2 to 10 pixels in Open paths below [É] pixels entry field. The Trace tool uses this value to determine which paths are drawn as open paths.

•	Outer edge: FreeHand traces only the outer contours of the paths, providing an accurate clipping path so that the original graphic or clone of a graphic can be pasted inside.


Choosing Outline for Path conversion displays the Overlap paths checkbox:

•	With Overlap paths checked, the trace objects overlap each other to prevent light leaks. Checking this option is most suitable when tracing continuous-tone images such as scans of photographs, paintings, and rendered graphics.

•	Uncheck Overlap paths when tracing logos, line art, and text.

Choosing Centerline for Path conversion displays the Uniform lines checkbox.

•	Checking Uniform lines yields a trace object with a consistent stroke width of 1 point throughout, even though the original graphic contains lines of varying weights.

•	With Uniform lines unchecked, FreeHand generates open paths with respectively varying stroke widths.


Define how closely the trace paths conform to the curved and straight lines of the original graphic. Higher settings conform more closely to the original paths.


Set the amount that FreeHand ignores stray pixels, called noise, in bitmap images when tracing. The higher the setting, the more FreeHand ignores noise. In contrast, a minimum setting tells FreeHand to keep as much file information as possible.


Object Inspector

The Object Inspector provides feedback for a selected object. The type of object selected affects the information displayed. Enter data into the Object Inspector’s entry fields and press Enter to apply changes to a selected object.

The Object Inspector displays different information for each of the following object types:

•	 Point

•	 LRG, TIFF, or EPS image

•	 Path

•	 Text or text block

•	 Text attached to a path

•	 Blend

•	 Rectangle or Ellipse


Object Inspector with a point selected
Object Inspector (with a point selected)

With a point selected, the Object Inspector displays point characteristics.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


If unchecked, the selected path is open. Check this box to close the path by joining the two endpoints with a single path segment.

If checked, the selected path is closed. Uncheck to open the path by removing the last path segment drawn.


When checked, overlapping sections of a filled object are transparent.


Displays the total number of points in a selected path.


Determines the smoothness of a curve when printed to a PostScript output device.

Lower values print curves more smoothly, but higher values speeds printing by flattening segments of a curve.


Changes a selected point to a curve point.


Changes a selected point to a corner point.


Changes a selected point to a connector point.


Retracts the outgoing Bezier point handle


Retracts the incoming Bezier point handle.


Check to automatically adjust point handles.


Displays the coordinates for the location of a selected point. Enter values in the x and y entry fields to change the location of a selected point.

These entry fields are unavailable with multiple points selected.


Object Inspector with an imageselected
Object Inspector (with an image selected)

With an imported LRG, TIFF, or EPS selected, the Object Inspector displays information about the image.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Displays the percentage that the image has been scaled.

Enter a percentage in these entry fields to scale the selected image horizontally (x) or vertically (y).


Click to make the white pixels of a monochrome bitmap image transparent.

In a transparent grayscale image, gray levels above 50 percent convert to black, and gray levels below 50 percent become transparent.

Note	This checkbox applies to only monochrome or grayscale images. To create transparency effects for color bitmap images, use alpha channels. To create transparency effects for vector objects, use the Transparency Xtra.


Select the Color Profile for the image source of the selected image to more accurately display it on screen.


Click to open the Links Management dialog box and view or change the link status of a selected image.


Object Inspector with a path selected
 Object Inspector (with a path selected)

With a path selected, the Object Inspector displays path characteristics.

Click an element below for more information:

To edit other characteristics of paths, see information regarding the Stroke Inspector and Fill Inspector.

  Related Topics


Object Inspector with text selected
 Object Inspector (with text selected)

With text or a text block selected, the Object Inspector displays the dimensions and inset values of the text block.

Click an element below for more information:

To edit other characteristics of text, see information regarding the Text Inspector.

  Related Topics


Displays the coordinates of the upper, left corner of the selected text block.

Enter coordinates in the x and y entry fields to change the position of the text block on the page.


Displays the width (w) and height (h) of the selected text block.

Enter numbers in the w and h entry fields to change the width and height of the text block.

Note	If the text block is set to auto-expanding for either its width or its height, the corresponding entry field is unavailable.


Click to make the selected text block auto-expand horizontally.


Click to make the selected text block auto-expand vertically.


Enter values to change the distance from the edges of a text block to the corresponding left (l), top (t), right (r), and bottom (b) edges of the text.


Check to make the edge of the text block or the surrounding path visible.


Object Inspector with text attached to a path selected
 Object Inspector (with text attached to a path selected)

With text attached to a path selected, the Object Inspector displays information allowing you to edit alignment, orientation and inset of the text.

Click an element below for more information:

To edit other characteristics of text, see information regarding the Text Inspector.

  Related Topics


Specify which part of the text aligns to the top and bottom of a closed path. Choose from None, Baseline, Ascent, and Descent.


Specify how text aligns in respect to the text’s orientation relative to the path. Choose from Rotate around path, Vertical, Skew Horizontal, and Skew Vertical.


Check to make the path visible, or uncheck to hide the path.


The Left entry field shows the distance from the beginning of the path to the left edge of left justified and fully justified text.

The Right entry field shows the distance from the right edge of the path to the right edge of right-justified text.


Object Inspector (with a blend selected)

With a blend selected, the Object Inspector displays information allowing you to edit some characteristics of the blend.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Displays the number of steps in a selected blend; enter a value to change the steps.


Shows where the blend begins and ends in relation to the first and last blend object.

For example, entering 10 in the First field and 70 in the Last field sets the blend steps to span only from 10% to 70% of the distance between the objects.


Object Inspector with text in a path selected
 Object Inspector (with text in a path selected)

With text in a path selected, the Object Inspector displays information about the position, dimension, and inset of the text.

Click an element below for more information:

To edit other characteristics of text, see information regarding the Text Inspector.

  Related Topics


Object Inspector with a rectangle or ellipse selected
 Object Inspector (with a rectangle or ellipse selected)

With a rectangle or an ellipse selected, the Object Inspector displays information about the dimensions of the object.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Displays current position and dimensions of the selected object.

•	Enter values in the x and y entry fields to move the selected object in relation to its upper, left corner.

•	Enter values in the w and h entry fields to change the width and height of the selected object.


(Rectangle only) Enter a value other than 0 (zero) to round the corners of a rectangle.


 Stroke Inspector

Displays stroke attributes for a selected path, text character, or text block.

To display the Stroke Inspector when it is behind other panels, click its tab [image] to bring the panel to the front. The type of stroke selected determines the options displayed in the Stroke Inspector.

Stroke types

•	 None: Removes the stroke, making the path disappear in Preview mode and when you print.

•	 Basic: Applies a solid color, provides arrowheads, dashed lines, and other stroke characteristics.

•	 Custom: Applies 1 of 23 preset PostScript patterns.

•	 Pattern: Applies 1 of 64 editable bitmap patterns.

•	 PostScript: Applies a stroke created by entering PostScript language code.

Note	You need programming experience with the PostScript language to use PostScript Fills.

  Related Topics


 Stroke Inspector (Basic stroke)

Choose Basic from the Stroke Inspector pop-up to apply a solid color stroke to a selected path.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Displays the stroke color of a selected path.

To apply a stroke color, drop a color chip onto the color well or choose a color from the pop-up.


Check to overprint the stroke of a selected path.


Displays the current stroke width of the selected path.

Enter a custom stroke width or choose a preset stroke width from the pop-up.


Butt cap

Applies a squared end flush with the end of the path.


Round cap

Applies a round end that extends half the stroke width beyond the end of the path.


Square cap

Applies a squared end that extends half the stroke width beyond the end of the path.


Applies a miter join.


Applies a round join.


Applies a beveled join.


Miter limit is the ratio between the length of the miter join and the stroke width.

Enter a number between 1 and 57 to set the maximum length of a miter join before it automatically converts to a beveled join.

For example, if you enter 2 as the miter limit for a stroke width of 3 points, the miter join converts to a beveled join when the length of the miter join exceeds 6.


Choose a dash for the selected path.


Choose an arrowhead for each end of a selected path.

Choose new to open the Arrowhead Editor dialog box and create your own arrowhead.


 Stroke Inspector (Custom stroke)

Choose Custom from the Stroke Inspector pop-up to apply 1 of 23 preset PostScript patterns to a selected path.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Choose a Custom stroke from this pop-up.


Sets the length of each repeating pattern of the Custom stroke.


Sets the distance between each repeating pattern of the Custom stroke.


Displays a preview of the selected Custom stroke.


 Stroke Inspector (Pattern stroke)

Choose Pattern from the Stroke Inspector pop-up to apply a bitmap pattern to the selected stroke.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Edit the pattern pixel by pixel.

Click a pixel to toggle it between black and white. Black pixels are opaque and display as the stroke color. White pixels are transparent.


Displays a preview of the effect of the pattern.


Clears the pattern from the edit and display boxes.


Inverses the pixel color—black pixels become white and white pixels become black.


Choose 1 of 64 preset patterns to apply to the selected object.


 Stroke Inspector (PostScript stroke)

Choose PostScript from the Stroke Inspector pop-up and enter PostScript code in the entry field to apply a pattern to a selected path.

PostScript strokes appear solid on screen and print to all PostScript output devices. Color appears on the solid portions of the PostScript pattern.

  Related Topics


 Fill Inspector

Displays fill attributes for a selected path, text character, or text block.

To display the Fill Inspector when it is behind other panels, click its tab to bring the panel to the front. The type of fill selected determines the options displayed in the Fill Inspector.

A fill applied to closed open, or composite paths appears on screen.

Fill types

•	 None: Removes an existing fill.

•	 Basic: Applies a solid color.

•	 Custom: Applies 1 of 10 preset PostScript patterns, which do not display on screen and print only to a PostScript output device.

•	 Gradient: Applies a multi-color fill with a smooth transition from one color to another.

•	 Pattern: Applies an opaque, low-resolution bitmap pattern, useful for non-PostScript printers but not recommended for PostScript level 1 output devices.

•	 PostScript: Applies a PostScript fill created by entering PostScript language code. PostScript fills do not display on screen and print only to a PostScript output device.

Note	You need programming experience with the PostScript language to use this fill type.

•	 Textured: Applies 1 of 9 preset PostScript textures, which do not display on screen and print only to a PostScript output device.

•	 Tiled: Applies repeating tiles created from objects. Use to create high-resolution color-separable patterns for PostScript output devices.

•	 Lens: Transforms a selected object into any of six special-effect lenses—Transparency, Magnify, Invert, Lighten, Darken, and Monochrome. These effects in turn modify the appearance of images, objects, and text over which the lens is placed.

  Related Topics


 Fill Inspector (Basic fill)

Choose Basic from the Fill Inspector pop-up to apply a solid color fill to a selected path.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Displays the fill color of a selected path.

To apply a fill color, drop a color chip onto the color well or choose a color from the pop-up.


Check to overprint the fill of a selected path.


 Fill Inspector (Gradient fill)

Choose Gradient from the Fill Inspector pop-up to apply a multi-color fill to a selected path.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Drag a color chip to this ramp to change the starting color or the ending color, or to add intermediate colors to a Gradient fill.

•	To replace a color , drag and drop the color chip onto a chip on the ramp.

•	To move a color on the ramp, drag the chip.

•	To remove a color from the ramp, drag the chip off of the Fill Inspector.


Click to make the Gradient fill a Graduated fill.

A Graduated fill changes colors along a straight line—from one end to another.


Click to make the Gradient fill a Radial fill.

A Radial fill changes colors in a circular pattern—from the center to the outer edges.


Select the way the fill changes from one end to the other.

Linear: Progresses in increments of equal width from one color to another.

Logarithmic: Progresses from a narrow band of color to increasingly wider increments towards another color.


This color well displays the current color for one end of the Gradient fill.

To change this color, drop a color chip onto the color well or choose a color from the pop-up.


For a Graduated fill, select the angle the fill travels by moving the dial or entering a value in the entry field.

For a Radial fill, move the center point of the fill by dragging the knob to a new location.


 Fill Inspector (Custom fill)

Choose Custom from the Fill Inspector pop-up to fill a selected path with 1 of 10 preset PostScript patterns.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Select one of the preset custom fills.


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
 Black & White Noise (Custom Fill)

Applies an opaque fill to a selected object. Black & white noise is one of ten Custom fills.

You cannot apply color to Black & white noise fills.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects behind the Black & white noise fill are not visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
 Bricks (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, opaque fill to the selected object. Bricks is one of ten Custom fills.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects positioned behind the Bricks fill are not visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

Changing the Bricks color

Drag and drop a color onto the Bricks color wells or onto the object, or onto Fill Selector in the Color List.

Brick: The color well displays the current Brick fill color.

Mortar: The color well displays the current Mortar fill color. To change the Mortar color, drag and drop a new color onto the Mortar color well.

Width: Enter a value to change the brick width of the fill. Values are based on the document's unit of measurement.

Height: Enter a value to change the brick height of the fill. Values are based on the document's unit of measurement.

Angle: Enter a value to rotate the Bricks. A negative value rotates the fill counterclockwise. A positive value rotates the fill clockwise.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
 Circles (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, transparent fill to the selected object. Circles is one of ten Custom fills.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects behind the Circles fill are visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

Changing the Circles color

Drag and drop a color onto the Circles color well or onto the object, or onto Fill Selector in the Color List.

Radius: Enter a value to change the size of circles in the fill. Values are based on the document's unit of measurement.

Spacing: Enter a value based on the document's unit of measurement to change the amount of space between circles in the fill. Spacing is measured from radius point to radius point. To avoid overlapping circles, set the spacing to more than twice the radius.

Angle: Enter a value to rotate the Circles. A negative value rotates the fill counterclockwise. A positive value rotates the fill clockwise.

Stroke width: Enter a value to change the stroke width of the circles in the fill pattern.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
Hatch (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, transparent fill to the selected object. Hatch is one of ten Custom fills.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects positioned behind the Hatch fill are visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

Changing the Hatch color

Drag and drop a color onto the Hatch color well or onto the object, or onto Fill Selector in the Color List.

Angle 1: Enter a value to rotate the first set of parallel lines used to create the Hatch fill. A negative value rotates the fill counterclockwise. A positive value rotates the fill clockwise.

Angle 2: Enter a value to rotate the second set of parallel lines used to create the Hatch fill. A negative value rotates the fill counterclockwise. A positive value rotates the fill clockwise.

Spacing: Enter a value to change the amount of space between hatch strokes.

Stroke width: Enter a value to change the width of the hatch strokes.

Dashed lines: Click the checkbox to draw hatch strokes using dashed lines.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
 Noise (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, opaque fill to the selected object. Noise is one of ten Custom fills.

You cannot apply color to a Noise fill.

Whiteness value %: Enter a value ranging from 0 (zero) to 100 percent to adjust the range of the darkest to lightest noise in the fill. A value of 0 (zero) is black and a value of 100 percent is white.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects positioned behind the Noise fill are not visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
 Random grass (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, transparent fill to the selected object. Random grass is one of ten Custom fills.

You cannot apply color to a Random grass fill.

# of blades: Enter a value from 1 to 32,000 to change the density of blades in the fill.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects positioned behind the Random grass fill are visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
Random leaves (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, transparent fill to the selected object. Random leaves is one of ten Custom fills.

You cannot apply color to a Random leaves fill.

# of leaves: Enter a value from 1 to 32,000 to change the density of leaves in the fill.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects positioned behind the Random leaves fill are visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
Squares (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, transparent fill to the selected object. Squares is one of ten Custom fills.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects positioned behind the Squares fill are visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

Changing the Squares color

Drag and drop a color onto the Squares color well or onto the object, or onto Fill Selector in the Color List.

Side length: Enter a value to change the size of squares in the fill. Values are based on the document's unit of measurement.

Spacing: Enter a value based on the document's unit of measurement to change the amount of space between squares in the fill. Spacing is measured from center to center. To avoid overlapping squares, set spacing to more than a side length.

Angle: Enter a value to rotate the Squares fill. A negative value rotates the fill counterclockwise. A positive value rotates the fill clockwise.

Stroke width: Enter a value to change the stroke width of the squares inside the object.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
Tiger teeth (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, opaque fill to the selected object. Tiger teeth is one of ten Custom fills.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects positioned behind the Tiger teeth fill are not visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

Changing the Tiger teeth color

Drag and drop a color onto the Tiger teeth color wells or onto the object, or onto Fill Selector in the Color List.

Tooth: The color well displays the current Tooth fill color.

Background: The color well displays the current Background fill color.

# of teeth: Enter a value from 1 to 700 to change the density of teeth in the fill.

Angle: Enter a value to rotate the Tiger teeth fill. A negative value rotates the fill counterclockwise. A positive value rotates the fill clockwise.

  Related Topics


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
Top Noise (Custom Fill)

Applies an editable, transparent fill to the selected object. Top noise is one of ten Custom fills.

You cannot apply a color to a Top noise fill.

Gray value: Enter a percentage value from 0 zero (black) to 100 (white) to change the value of the noise dots in the fill.

On screen versus in print

Custom fills appear on screen as a pattern of C’s. Objects positioned behind a Top noise fill are visible when printed.

•	Custom fills print according to your specifications to a PostScript output device.

•	Custom fills are suitable for high-resolution output.

•	Custom fills are suitable for color separations.

  Related Topics


 Fill Inspector (Pattern fill)

Choose Pattern from the Fill Inspector pop-up to fill a selected path with a bitmap pattern.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


 Fill Inspector (PostScript fill)

Choose PostScript from the Stroke Inspector pop-up and enter PostScript code in the entry field to apply a pattern to a selected path.

PostScript fills appear on screen as a pattern of PS’s and print to all PostScript output devices. Color appears on the solid portions of the PostScript pattern.

  Related Topics


 Fill Inspector (Textured fill)

Choose Textured from the Fill Inspector pop-up to fill the selected path with a preset, non-editable PostScript pattern.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Choose 1 of the 9 preset Textured fills.


Displays a preview of the selected Textured fill.


 Fill Inspector (Tiled fill)

Choose Tiled from the Fill Inspector pop-up to fill the selected path with a repeating pattern of objects or text. Tiled fills are patterns based on a repeating object, or tile, that you create. Create a tiled fill using graphics or text pasted into the Fill Inspector. FreeHand will not allow EPSs, bitmap images, or other tiled fills in a tiled fill.

Click an element below for more information:

Spacing

The bounding box of each repeating object of a tiled fill abuts those of its neighbors and determines the space between each object. When the tiled fill consists of text, the text block determines the size of the tile, unless the text is first converted to paths. The more complex the fill, the slower it prints and redraws on screen.

  Related Topics


Displays a preview of one tile of the Tiled fill.


Pastes the fill object into the Fill Inspector from the Clipboard.

Tip	Select the objects and choose Edit > Copy to copy them to the Clipboard. Click the Paste In button to make the selected objects a Tiled fill.


Copies the tile to the Clipboard.


Move the dial or enter a number in the entry field to change the angle of the Tiled fill.


Enter x and y values to set percentages of the original object’s height and width. Enter equal values to scale proportionally or different values to create distortion.


Enter a positive value or a negative value to realign the pattern within the object you are filling by the amount you specify.

•	Positive x values move the fill to the right

•	Negative x values move the fill to the left

•	Positive y values move the fill up

•	Negative y values move the fill down.


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
To create and apply a Tiled fill

To realign a tiled fill within an object


 To create and apply a Tiled fill

1	Create an object to use as the tile and choose Edit > Cut or Copy.

2	Select an object. Choose tiled from the Fill Inspector and click Paste in.

Tip	To create a tiled fill with space between its repeating tiles, draw a rectangle with a stroke and fill of None around the tile, and paste them in together.


 To realign a Tiled fill within an object

1	Select the object with a tiled fill.

2	Display the Transform panel and uncheck the Fills checkbox.

3	Drag the object with the Pointer tool over its tiled fill, realigning them.

4	Check Fills in the Transform panel and reposition the object as needed.


Fill Inspector (Lens fill)

A Lens fill transforms a selected object into any of six special-effect lenses—Transparency, Magnify, Invert, Lighten, Darken, and Monochrome. These effects in turn modify the appearance of images, objects, and text over which the lens is placed. Spot colors under a lens are converted to process colors for output. Use the Eyedropper Xtra tool to capture new colors created by a Lens fill effect.	Click an element below for more information:
Lens fill types

•	Transparency: Enter a number from 0 (completely transparent) to 100 (completely opaque) or use the slider to adjust the opacity of the transparency lens.

•	Magnify: Enter a number from 1 to 100 or use the slider to adjust the number of times the magnify lens magnifies objects under it.

•	Invert: Colors under the invert lens appear as their complementary CMYK colors (their opposites on a color wheel).

•	Lighten: Enter a number from 0 (no change) to 100 (completely white), or use the slider to adjust the percentage by which the lighten lens lightens colors under it.

•	Darken: Enter a number from 0 (no change) to 100 (completely black), or use the slider to adjust the percentage by which the darken lens darkens colors under it.

•	Monochrome: Choose a color for the monochrome lens to use. Colors under the monochrome lens appear as monochrome degrees of that color. Each color under the monochrome lens appears as a tint of the chosen color. The amount of lightness in the original color determines the tint value.

Using Lens fills

A lens does not actually change properties of the objects under it; it creates duplicate objects inside the lens. This is apparent when Centerpoint is checked and the lens is moved from the centerpoint or vice versa.

Remember that using Lens fills, especially on top of each other, can quickly add hundreds of objects to the document, greatly increasing both file size and print time, which may render your file unprintable.

An awareness of the placement of layers, as well as the arrangement of objects within a layer, is key to successful use of Lens fills.

EPS files are not affected by Lens-filled objects. An object with a paste inside cannot receive a Lens fill; however, a Lens-filled object can be pasted inside another object. Text cannot receive a Lens fill unless the text is converted to paths.

To remove a Lens fill, select the Lens-filled object, and then choose None or another type of fill in the Fill Inspector, or delete the Lens-filled object.

Up to eight lenses can be stacked on top of each other. When a ninth lens is stacked upon eight others, the bottom lens no longer affects the lenses above it.

  Related Topics


Choose a type of Lens fill.

Note	Choosing a new Lens type automatically unchecks Centerpoint, Objects Only, and Snapshot.


Choose a color.


Enter a number from 0 (completely transparent) to 100 (completely opaque) or use the slider to adjust the opacity of the transparency lens.


Check to display a moveable centerpoint handle at the center of a selected lens. Drag the centerpoint anywhere in the document using the Pointer tool. Shift-clicking the centerpoint returns the centerpoint to the center of the lens. Unchecking Centerpoint removes the centerpoint. Deselecting the lens causes the centerpoint to disappear without changing the lens effect.


Check to apply the lens effect to objects, but not empty areas, under the lens.


Check to capture the current contents of the lens, allowing the lens to be moved anywhere in the document without changing the lens contents.


Text Inspector

Use the Text Inspector to change the properties of text or text blocks.

The Text Inspector has five different subpanels:

•	 Character

•	 Paragraph

•	 Spacing

•	 Columns and Rows

•	 Adjust Columns


Text Inspector (Character subpanel)
Text Inspector (Character)

The Character subpanel contains the most frequently used text functions.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Choose a font.


Choose a character style.


Choose a the point size.


Click to left-align a selected paragraph.


Click to center-align a selected paragraph.


Click to right-align a selected paragraph.


Click to fully justify a selected paragraph.


Enter a value to determine how far non-justified text spreads across a column.


Enter a value to set the distance from the baseline of one line of text to the baseline of the preceding line of text.


Change this value to increase or decrease the spacing between letters.


Enter the distance to move the selected text up (positive values) or down (negative values) in relation to the baseline.


Select a text effect for the selected text.


Select a paragraph style for the selected paragraph.

Note	Only styles added to the Styles panel are available in this pop-up.


 Text Inspector (Paragraph)

The Paragraph subpanel of the Text Inspector contains controls for paragraph spacing, paragraph indents, and hyphenation.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Enter values to add space before or after a paragraph.


Enter values to set the distance between text and the sides of a column or text block.


Check to place punctuation outside left and right paragraph margins.


Check to turn hyphenation on and off.


Click to display hyphenation options.


Choose to apply a rule below the last line of a paragraph.


 Text Inspector (Spacing)

The Spacing subpanel contains controls for character scaling, spacing, and grouping.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Enter values to change the width of characters in proportion to the type size.


Enter the minimum, optimum, and maximum percentages of space between words.

These values are the allowable deviation from the spacing of the font in use—as defined by the size of the font’s space.


Enter the minimum, optimum, and maximum percentages of space between characters.

These values are the allowable deviation from the spacing of the font in use—as defined by the size of the font’s space.


Check to prevent text from breaking in undesirable ways when it reaches the end of a line, column, or text block. This option to prevents text from breaking at the end of a line and creating a widow, a word appearing alone in the last line of a paragraph.


 Text Inspector (Columns and Rows)

The Columns and Rows subpanel contains controls for setting the height, spacing, and rules of columns and rows.

Click an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Enter the number of columns for a selected text block.


Set the height of the column.


Set the distance between columns.


Select to draw a rule (or line) between columns of a text block.

Full height: Draws rules the full height of the text block, even across the space between columns.

Inset: Draws rules across just the height of a column, leaving a gap in the rule for the space between columns on different rows, if multiple rows are defined.


Enter the number of rows for the selected text block.


Enter a set width for rows in a text block.


Enter the amount of space between each row.


Select to draw a rule (or line) between rows of a text block.

Full width: Draws rules the full width of the text block, even across the space between rows.

Inset: Draws rules across just the width of a row, leaving a gap in the rule for the space between columns, if multiple columns are defined.


Text Inspector (Copyfit)
 Text Inspector (Adjust Columns)

The Adjust Columns subpanel contains copyfitting controls.

Click an element below for more information:


Check to evenly distribute lines of text among columns in a selected text block.


Check to add leading so text fills a column.


Set the percentage of a column that text must fill before applying leading.


Alter type size and leading proportionally to fit the selected text block.


Specify the distance from the top of the text block to the baseline of the first line of text, according to the leading specified.


 Document Inspector

Use the Document Inspector to add pages, remove pages, change page size, or move pages on the pasteboard.

The Document Inspector contains a miniaturized view of FreeHand’s pasteboard, showing thumbnail icons for each page in the document.

Choose an element below for more information:

  Related Topics


Click to add, remove, or duplicate pages.

•	Add: Adds a new page using the current size selected in the Document Inspector.

•	Duplicate: Makes a copy of the selected page and its contents.

•	Remove: Deletes the selected page and all its contents.


These are three levels of magnification.


Displays a miniature view of the pasteboard, each page of the document represented by a numbered thumbnail.

With the Pointer tool, move the thumbnails to position the corresponding pages.

Tip	Press the Spacebar to change the Pointer tool to the Grabber Hand. Using the Grabber Hand, click and drag to scroll the view of the pasteboard.


Choose a page size, or choose Custom to enter custom page size dimensions.


Choose portrait orientation for a page that is taller than wide.


Choose landscape orientation for a page that is wider than tall.


If Custom is selected for the page size, enter horizontal (x) and vertical (y) dimensions for the page.


Specify the area of an object that extends off the page to print beyond the edge of the page.


Choose a printer resolution for the document, or enter a custom resolution.


Layers Panel

Layers divide an illustration into discrete planes, as though the different components of the illustration were drawn on separate tracing paper overlays.  Every object in an illustration resides on a layer. Only objects on visible, unlocked layers are editable. Create all layers before you draw or add individual layers as you need them.	Click an element below for more information:
  Related Topics


Adding, duplicating and removing layers

Turning layers on and off

Locking and unlocking layers

Viewing layers in Preview or Keyline mode

The Guides layer

To move an object to another layer

To move one layer in front of or behind another layer

To copy layer information to another document

Using highlight colors to distinguish objects on different layers

To select all objects on a single layer in a multiple-layer document


Adding, duplicating and removing layers

To	Do this
Add a new layer	Choose New from the Options pop-up.
Duplicate a layer and all objects on it	Select a layer name and choose Duplicate from the Options pop-up.
Remove a layer and all objects on it	Select a layer name and choose Remove from the Options pop-up.
Remove several layers and all objects on them	Hold down Control and select the layer names. To remove contiguous layers, hold down Shift as you select the multiple layers. Choose Remove from the Options pop-up.


Turning layers on and off

To	Do this
Display objects on a layer	Click to the left of the unchecked layer name.
Hide objects on a layer	Click the check mark to the left of the layer name.
Turn on all layers	Choose All on from the Options pop-up, or hold down Control and click to the left of an unchecked layer name.
Turn off all layers	Choose All off from the Options pop-up, or hold down Control and click to the left of a checked layer name.
Tip	To print only visible layers, choose File > Print > Setup > Imaging or File > Output Options, and uncheck Include invisible layers.


Locking and unlocking layers

To	Do this
Lock a layer	Click the open padlock to the left of the layer name.
Unlock a layer	Click the closed padlock to the left of the layer name.
Lock all layers	Hold down Control and click an unlocked padlock.
Unlock all layers	Hold down Control and click a locked padlock.


Viewing layers in Preview or Keyline mode

To	Do this
View a layer in Preview mode	Click the hollow Keyline icon.
View a layer in Keyline mode	Click the filled Preview icon.
View all layers in Preview mode	Hold down Control and click a Keyline icon.
View all layers in Keyline mode	Hold down Control and click a Preview icon.


The Guides Layer

To view guides, turn on the check mark at the far left of the Guides layer name. To hide the guides, turn off the layer. To view the guides in black, set the drawing mode to Keyline for the Guides layer. To view them in the color set in the Color > Guide color preference, set the viewing mode to Preview.

To turn an object into a guide, select the object and click the Guides layer. The object displays in the guide color. To turn a guide into an object, double-click the guide and click Release in the Guides dialog box. The object returns to its original layer.


To move an object to another layer

1	Select an object.

The object’s layer name appears highlighted on the Layers panel.

2	Choose the destination layer by clicking the destination layer name.


To move one layer in front of or behind another layer

1	Choose Edit > Select > None to deselect all objects in the document.

2	On the Layers panel, select the name of the layer you want to move.

3	Drag the layer name to a new position, either above or below another layer name.


To copy layer information to another document

1	Check the General “Remember layer info” preference.

2	Select an object in the source document and choose Edit > Cut or Edit > Copy.

3	Open the destination document and choose Edit > Paste.

If the layer name in the destination document is the same as the one in the original document, then FreeHand places the object on that layer. Otherwise, a new layer with the original layer name is created.


Using highlight colors to distinguish objects on diferent layers
Using highlight colors to distinguish objects on different layers

With the General > “Smoother editing” preference checked, highlight colors for each layer can distinguish objects on one layer from those on another. The customizable color wells on the Layers Panel display the highlight color of a particular layer.

With the General > “Highlight selected paths” preference checked, the layer highlight color appears as a one-point line on top of selected, ungrouped paths. View and edit highlighted paths on any layer without bringing them to the front of your illustration. The highlight color does not affect the color of the object.

To highlight selected objects, handles, and points, but not draw a highlight line on top of paths, check the General > “Highlight selected paths” preference.

To assign a highlight color, check the General > “Smoother editing” > “Highlight selected paths” preference and drop a color chip from any color well onto the color well next to the layer name. FreeHand now uses the new color in the color well to highlight all selected items on that layer. Check “Smoother editing” to eliminate all highlight colors. Although the “Smoother editing” preference uses more RAM, this feature also provides other drawing enhancements in addition to highlight color. For best results, leave “Smoother editing” turned on.


To select all objects on a single layer
To select all objects on a single layer in a multi-layer document

1	Hold down Control and click any open padlock on the Layers panel to lock all layers.

2	Unlock the layer containing the objects you want to select.

3	Choose Edit > Select > All in Document to select all objects on the unlocked layer.


Options pop-up

•	New: Creates a new layer with no objects.

•	Duplicate: Copies the selected layer and the objects on it.

•	Remove: Removes the selected layer and the objects on it.

•	All on: Displays all layers in the Layers panel.

•	All off: Hides all layers in the Layers panel.


Click to show or hide layers. A checkmark indicates a visible layer.

Tip	Press Ctrl as you click to show or hide all layers.


Click to change the mode of all objects on a layer.

•	A gray circle indicates Preview mode.

•	A white circle with an x in the center represents Keyline mode.

Tip	Press Ctrl as you click the icon to display all layers in Preview or Keyline.


Locks or unlocks a layer when you click. A closed lock icon indicates a locked layer.

Note	Objects on a locked layer cannot be altered.

Tip	Press Ctrl as you click to lock or unlock all layers.


Displays the default highlight color for the selected objects on a layer.

Assign highlight colors to each layer to quickly identify selected objects on different layers.


Guides appear on this layer. You can move the Guides layer, but you cannot rename or remove it.

Note	Any object moved to this layer becomes a guide.


Objects on layers below this movable line appear grayed out on screen and do not print.


This layer appears by default below the layer bar, and it does not print. However, you can move or rename it.


This is the default drawing layer.


Styles panel

Use the Styles panel to create and apply graphic or text styles. If you edit a style later, FreeHand automatically applies the changes to all objects with the style applied. Double-click any name in the Styles panel to rename a style. If you modify an object with an applied style, you override the style. A plus sign (+) in front of a style name in the Styles panel indicates an overridden style. Click the style name to reapply the original style.	Click an element below for more information: With names visible With names hidden
  Related Topics


New: Creates a new style based on the stroke, fill, and halftone attributes applied to the selected object. If no object is selected, the new style is based on the default stroke, fill, and halftone attributes.

Duplicate: Copies the selected style.

Remove: Removes the selected style from the list without altering the attributes applied to the objects using the style.

Edit Style: Displays the Edit Style dialog box. Use the Edit Style dialog box to modify existing styles.

•	Graphic styles: Displays options for stroke and fill attributes and halftones.

•	Paragraph styles: Displays current settings and all attributes retained by styles.

•	Redefine: Displays the Redefine style dialog box. Select a style to redefine it.

•	Set parent: Displays Set parent dialog box. Select a style in the dialog box to be the parent of the selected (child) style. When you later redefine the parent style, the attributes in the parent undefined or shared by the child style also change in the child style.


Graphic styles are listed in Roman type with an icon that can be dragged and dropped onto any object on the document. Graphic styles may also be applied by selecting an object and then selecting a style name.


Paragraph styles are listed in italic type with a paragraph icon that can be dragged and dropped onto text. Text styles may also be applied by selecting a text block and then selecting a style name to apply. The style applies to the paragraph or to the entire text block, depending on the selections made in Text preferences.


To add, duplicate, and remove styles

To apply a style

To copy style information to another document

To edit an object style

To edit a paragraph style

To redefine a style based on a selected object or text

To base a style on another style

To override a style, or remove a style override


To add, duplicate, and remove styles

To	Do this
Add a new style	1. Choose Edit > Select > None to deselect objects. 2. Set object or text attributes. 3. Choose New from the Options pop-up.
Add a new style based on existing attributes	1. Select an object or text.  2. Choose New from the Options pop-up.
Duplicate a style	1. Choose Edit > Select > None to deselect objects. 2. Select a style name from the Styles panel. 3. Choose Duplicate from the Options pop-up.
Remove a style	1. Choose Edit > Select > None to deselect objects. 2. Select a style name from the Styles panel. 3. Choose Remove from the Options pop-up.


To apply a style

To apply a style	Do this
To selected objects or text	1. Select one or more objects, paragraphs, or text blocks.  2. Select a style name to apply the style’s attributes to the object or text.
Using drag and drop	Drag and drop a style from the Styles panel to an object or text.
Using the paragraph styles pop-up in the  Window > Inspector > Text > Character Inspector	1. Select one or more paragraphs or text blocks.  2. Select a style name to apply the style’s attributes to the text.
From one object to another using Copy and Paste Attributes	1. Select the source object. 2. Choose Edit > Copy Attributes or use Control-Shift-Alt-C. 3. Select the destination object and choose Edit > Paste Attributes or use Control-Shift-Alt-V.


To copy style information to another document

1	Select an object, paragraph, or text block in the source document and choose Edit > Cut or Copy.

2	Open the destination document and choose Edit > Paste.

The object or text appears in the document, and its style appears on the Styles panel.

If a style in the destination document has the same name as the style you want to copy, the object’s attributes will override, but will not redefine the style.


To edit an object style

1	Select an object style name.

2	Choose Edit from the Options pop-up to display the Edit Style dialog box.

3	Change any attribute and click OK to save your style.

You can modify any stroke, fill, color, or halftone attribute in the Edit Style dialog box.


To edit a paragraph style

1	Select a paragraph style name.

2	Choose Edit from the Options pop-up to display the Edit Style dialog box.

3	Change any text attribute and click OK to save your style.


To redefine a style based on a selected object or text

1	Highlight the style you want to redefine.

2	Select an object and apply the desired attributes.

3	Choose Redefine from the Options pop-up.

The style now takes on the attributes of the selected object or text.


To base a style on another style

Use Set Parent from the Options pop-up to base variations of a style on another style. The resulting style, called the child style, depends on the attributes of its source style, called the parent style. When you edit a parent style, the attributes shared by the child style also change. Those attributes unique to the child style do not change.

If you remove a child style from an object or text, the parent style becomes the active style, but the object or text retains all of its attributes.

1	Choose Edit > Select > None to deselect all objects.

2	Select the style name for the child or dependent style.

3	Choose Set Parent from the Options pop-up to display the Set Parent dialog box.

4	Choose another style to be the parent or base style, and click.


To override a style, or remove a style override

To	Do this
Override a style	1. Select an object, paragraph, or text block. 2. Change any stroke, fill, color, halftone, or text attribute. 3. When you select the object or text, the overridden style appears highlighted with a “+” in front of it.
Remove a style override	1. Select an object, paragraph, or text block with an overridden style. 2. Click its style name. 3. The original style applies to the object or text, removing any override.


Color List

Use the Color List to store, name, and apply colors used in the document. Editing a Color List color automatically changes the color of objects with that color applied. Color names display in the Stroke and  Fill Inspectors when objects using those colors are selected.	Click an element below for more information:
After a color applied to a selected object is named, the color name appears in the Stroke Inspector and Fill Inspector in the pop-up next to the color well.

•	To add a color to the Color List, drop an unnamed color onto the color drop box or onto the empty area at the bottom of the Color List. You can also choose New from the Options pop-up.

•	To replace a color on the Color List, drop a new color chip onto the old one or choose Replace from the Options pop-up.

•	To rearrange the order of colors, drag a color name to a new position in the Color List.

•	To sort colors by their names, choose Xtras > Colors > Sort Color List by Name.

Process colors: Color names appear in italic type.

Change a color from process to spot by selecting Make spot from the Options pop-up.

Spot colors: Color names appear in Roman type.

Change a color from spot to process by selecting Make process from the Options pop-up.

Changing color names

Double-click a color name to edit it, and then press Enter or click elsewhere in the document.

  Related Topics


Fill Selector: Displays the fill color of the selected object or the current default fill color when no object is selected.

Change the fill color of a selected object by dropping a new color onto the Fill Selector.


Stroke Selector: Displays the stroke color of the selected object or the current default stroke color when no object is selected.

Change the stroke color of a selected object by dropping a new color onto the Stroke Selector.


Both Selector: Simultaneously apply a color to the stroke and fill of a selected object.

When a selected object’s stroke and fill are different colors, the Both Selector displays a —.


Options pop-up

•	New: Add the current color in the Color Mixer to the Color List.

•	Duplicate: Make a duplicate of the selected color. The duplicate has the same name with “Copy of” appended to it.

•	Remove: Remove the selected color from the Color List.

°	Removing spot colors from the Color List converts these colors to process. Spot colors from an EPS cannot be removed.

•	Replace: Replace the selected color with another color in the Color List, or a color from a color library.

•	Hide / Show Names: Toggle the names of the colors on the Color List on and off.

•	Make spot: Convert a selected process color to a spot color.

•	Make process: Convert a selected spot color to a process color.

•	Make CMYK: Convert the selected color to a CMYK color.

•	Make RGB: Convert the selected color to an RGB color.

•	Import: Retrieve colors from saved color libraries, such as the PANTONE library.

•	Export: Save selected colors as a custom color library.


Color drop box: Drag and drop a color from a color well to the down arrow to add a color to the Color List.


Color chip.

Color chips display samples of created or imported colors.

•	Drag color chips to objects to apply the color.

•	Drag color chips to the Fill Selector or Stroke Selector on the Color List to apply color to the fill or stroke of the selected object.

•	Double-click a color chip on the Color List to open the Color Mixer with that color active.


No color is applied. The area is transparent.

None is a default color and cannot be removed or replaced.


White: Solid white, opaque.

Black: Defined as a process black.

Black and White are default colors and cannot be removed or replaced.


Registration: Use to print objects used as registration marks. Objects with the Registration color appear on all separations.

Registration is a default color and cannot be removed or replaced.


Denotes a color is RGB.


Color Libraries

Color Libraries contain pre-defined colors to use in FreeHand.

Library name	Type	Description
Focoltone	Process	Colors are organized by whether they share a common percentage of either cyan, magenta, yellow, or black.
MUNSELL	Process	Colors are organized by hue, value, and chroma.
PANTONE	Spot	Colors are organized in chromatic order.
PANTONE	Process (four-color and Hexa-chrome)	Colors are organized in chromatic order, including process-color simulations of the spot-color library.
Toyo	Process	Colors are organized first by hue and then by saturation.
Trumatch	Process	Colors are specified in small CMYK increments to avoid color gaps.
Web Safe	8-bit compatible	Each of 216 colors is named after its RGB and heaxadecimal values.


To add colors to the Color List from a color library

To export colors to create a custom color library


To add colors from a color-matching system library:
To add colors from a color library:

1	Choose a color library from the Options pop-up on the Color List.

2	Select colors from the library dialog box and click OK to add them to the Color List.

Color libraries and the Colorlib.dll file are in the FreeHand 8 > English > Colors folder.

If a custom color library is stored outside of the  FreeHand 8 > English > Colors folder, choose Import from the Color List Options pop-up to locate and open the library.


To export colors to create a custom color library
 To export colors to create a custom color library:

1	Choose Export from the Color List Options pop-up, select the colors for export, and click OK.

Export colors from the Color List as a custom color library and share them among multiple documents.

2	In the Create Color Library dialog box, specify a Library name, and then specify a file name. Enter the number of rows and columns and any notes.

3	Click Browse and specify the  FreeHand 8 > English > Colors folder as the destination.

4	Click Save.


Color Mixer

Use the Color Mixer to create a new color for use in the document based on one of five color models. Choose one of the interchangeable models to create colors for the document, based on your final printing needs. See Color Models for more information regarding uses of different color models.	Click an element below for more information:
  Related Topics


 CMYK: Drag the sliders or enter precise values to create CMYK colors.


RGB: Drag the sliders or enter precise values to create RGB colors.


 HLS:

•	H: Drag the dial around the edge of the color wheel or enter a value to create a color by specifying its position in degrees.

•	L: Drag the slider or enter a value to change the lightness by specifying the percentage of black or white in a hue.

•	S: Drag the dial toward the center of the color wheel, or enter a value to change the saturation by specifying the percentage or intensity of color.


Windows button: Displays the Windows Basic Colors panel, which contains 48 basic colors.


Click the to add a mixed color to the Color List. Name the color and specify Spot or Process in the Add to Color List dialog box. Hold down Control while clicking the Add to Color List button to bypass the dialog box and reuse the last choice of Process or Spot.


Drag sliders to increase or decrease the levels of a particular color of the selected Color Models.


Displays the original color.

Note	Uncheck the Colors > “Color Mixer/Tints panel uses split color well” preference to view the new color across the entire color well.


Displays the newly created color.

Note	Uncheck the Colors > “Color Mixer/ Tints panel uses split color well” preference to view the new color across the entire color well.


To create CMYK or RGB colors

To create a tint of a color

To replace a color

To alter a color

To convert colors to process, spot, RGB, CMYK or Hexachrome


To create a CMYK color or an RGB color:

1	In the Color Mixer, click either the CMYK button or the RGB button to display the appropriate view.

2	To adjust color component values, move the sliders or enter numerical values in each of the entry fields. Use the color well to monitor the color as you mix it.

When you switch from the CMYK view to the RGB view, or vice versa, notice that each view displays the appropriate component values for the current color.


To create a tint of a color:

1	Create a base color in one of the other Color Mixer views and then switch to the Tints panel.

2	Choose the Add to Color List command from the Color List pop-up to base the tint on a newly created color or choose an existing color from the same pop-up.

Using the Add to Color List command assigns the appropriate name to the color and adds it to the Color List. The base color’s name appears in all Color List pop-ups.

3	Choose a preset tint from the tint bar or create a custom tint.

Double-clicking a color chip in the tint bar applies the tint color to the tint color well. The percentage of the tint appears in the tint value entry field.

To create a custom tint, move the slider or enter a percentage value in the custom tint entry field.

Note	When adding the newly created tint from a Tints panel color well to the Color List, FreeHand names both the tint and its base color. FreeHand also updates the base color well in the Tints panel.


To alter an existing color:

1	Drag a color chip from the Color List to the color well in the Color Mixer.

2	Adjust the color values in the Color Mixer by entering new values in any of the entry fields or by moving the corresponding sliders.

3	Drag a color chip from the Color Mixer’s color well and drop it onto the original chip in the Color List.

To prevent color names from automatically changing when altering color values, uncheck the Colors > “Auto-rename colors” preference. The default name of a color is retained when dragging the replacement color chip onto the original color chip.


To replace a color in the Color List:

1	Select a color name and choose Replace from the Color List Options pop-up.

A dialog box prompts you to select another color from the Color List or from a color library. With None, Registration, Black, or White selected, Replace is disabled in the Color List Options pop-up.

2	Choose a color from the Color library pop-up or the Color List pop-up and click OK.

All selected objects with an old color will display the new color.

Checking or unchecking Auto-rename colors does not affect replacing colors by choosing Replace from the Color List Options pop-up and does not affect colors with custom names.


To convert colors:

Designate how a color should print to separations by converting it to either a spot or process color.

•	From Process to Spot—Select a color name in the Color List. Choose Make spot from the Options pop-up.

•	From Spot to Process—Select a color name in the Color List. Choose Make process from the Options pop-up.

Converting colors from CMYK to RGB, or vice versa, involves transferring colors from one color space into another.

•	From CMYK to RGB—Select a color name in the Color List. Choose Make RGB from the Options pop-up. Make RGB changes the CMYK color to the nearest RGB value.

•	From RGB or Hexachrome to CMYK—Select a color name in the Color List. Choose Make CMYK from the Options pop-up. Make CMYK changes the RBG or Hexachrome color to the nearest CMYK value.


 Tints panel

The Tints panel displays options for creating tints. Use the Color Mixer toolbar button to display the Tints panel, unless the Tints panel has been removed from the Color Mixer. Choose Window > Panels > Tints, or use Control-Shift-3 to display the Tints panel. Note In FreeHand 8, the Tints panel is a tabbed panel. In previous versions, the Tints panel was a Color Mixer view.	Click an element below for more information:
Creating tints

Tints are colors derived from percentages of a base color. Choose a base color from the Color List or drag a color onto either base color well.

To create a tint:

1	Display the Tints panel.

2	Drag a color chip onto either of the Tints panel’s base color wells, or choose a base color from the Color List pop-up.

3	Click on a preset tint from the tint bar, create a custom tint by moving the slider, or enter a percentage from 1 to 100 in the entry field.

4	Drag a chip from the color well to apply directly to an object’s stroke or fill, or add the newly created tint to the Color List.

If not on the Color List already, the base color is added to the Color List along with the newly created tint. The tint’s name comprises the tint percentage and the original name.

  Related Topics


Click to name a tint, specify spot or process, and add it to the Color List.


Choose a base color from the Color List pop-up.


Click to choose a tint preset in 10% increments.

Note	Changes made to a base color in the Color List automatically affect tints based on that color.


Enter a value from 1 to 100 to specify a custom tint percentage value.


Halftones panel

Applies halftone screen settings to a selected object, overriding the document-wide settings. Use this option to specify halftone screen settings that are different from the document-wide settings in the currently selected PPD (PostScript printer description) file. Settings made using the Halftones panel apply only to selected objects. If you use the Halftones panel to apply a screen angle or frequency to an object that uses a process color, all four process inks will use the angle and frequency you specified. This is usually not desirable.	Click an element below for more information:
  Related Topics


Screen: Applies a halftone dot shape to the selected object. Select one of four halftone dot shapes:

•	Default: Applies the default halftone dot shape specified by the currently selected PPD file.

•	Round dot: Halftone dot shape is a circle.

•	Line: Halftone dot shape is a line.

•	Ellipse: Halftone dot shape is elliptical.


Angle: Sets the angle of the halftone screen when you drag the dial or enter a value. To use the value specified in the currently selected PPD file, clear the entry field.


Frequency: Sets the screen ruling of the halftone screen when you drag the dial or enter a value in lines per inch. To use the value specified in the currently selected PPD file, clear the entry field.


Operations panel

Displays names and icons representing Xtra Operations loaded in the current FreeHand session. The following Xtras appear in the Operations panel:

•	 Fractalize

•	 Multi-Color Fill

•	 Set Note

•	 Trap

•	 Crop

•	 Transparency

•	 Inset Path

•	 Expand Stroke

•	 Union

•	 Punch

•	 Intersect

•	 Blend

•	 Simplify

•	 Remove Overlap

•	 Reverse Direction

•	 Correct Direction

•	 Envelope

•	 Add Points

Resize this panel by dragging the resize box.

Use the Options pop-up to show or hide names or to change the orientation of the panel from tall to wide.


Xtra Tools panel

Displays names and icons representing Xtra Tools loaded in the current FreeHand session. The following Xtras shipping with FreeHand appear in the Xtra Tools panel:

•	 3D Rotation

•	 Arc

•	 Fisheye Lens

•	 Smudge

•	 Spiral

•	 Roughen

•	 Eyedropper

•	 Chart

•	 Bend

Resize this panel by dragging the resize box.

Use the Options pop-up to show or hide names or to change the orientation of the panel from tall to wide.


URLs Panel
URLs Editor

Use the URLs Editor to attach URLs (Universal Resource Locator) to objects.

When a FreeHand document containing URLs is viewed through a web browser using the Shockwave Flash plug-in, click an object with an attached URL to jump to the web site defined by the URL.

  Related Topics


Xtras

Xtras are plug-in components for FreeHand that add tools or functionality. FreeHand Xtras are developed by Macromedia and third party companies.

Use Xtras by choosing them from the Xtra menu, or by clicking them on the Xtra Tools panel or Operations panel.

Some Xtras incorporate MOA (Macromedia Open Architecture). These Xtras may be used in other Macromedia applications.

Installing Xtras

Xtras that ship with FreeHand are automatically installed with FreeHand. Other Xtras may be installed by placing them in the Xtra folder in the FreeHand folder. MOA Xtras must be placed in the  FreeHand 8 > English > Xtras directory to be used by other Macromedia applications.

Customize Xtras loaded by FreeHand using the Xtras Manager.

  Related Topics


Repeat (Xtras menu)

Use Repeat to apply the Xtra last performed again.

  Related Topics


Xtras Manager
Xtras Manager (Xtras menu)

Use the Xtras Manager to turn Xtras on and off while working in FreeHand.

To turn Xtras on or off, open the Xtras Manager and click the name of the Xtra to turn on or off. A checkmark beside the name denotes that the Xtra is on. Turn Xtras on and off any time; you do not have to restart FreeHand for changes to take effect.

Tip	Turn on and off groups of related Xtras by clicking on bolded text items in the Xtras Manager. Every Xtra that appears under a bold text item will be turned on or off. Xtras turned of in this manner are grayed out in the Xtras Manager and will not appear in the FreeHand Xtras menu.

  Related Topics


Chart Xtra
Chart Xtra (Xtras menu)

Use the Chart Xtra to edit charts and create or remove pictographs from existing charts.

Edit a chart by selecting it and clicking [image] in the Xtra Tools panel or by choosing Xtras > Chart > Edit.

  Related Topics


How to create a chart

1	Click [image] on the Xtra Tools panel to activate the Chart tool.

2	Click and drag.

This positions and sizes the chart and opens the Chart dialog box.

3	Enter data in the Chart dialog box and select the type of chart.

4	Click OK.


Animate xtras
Animate Xtras (Xtras menu)

Use Animate Xtras to create animations from FreeHand. The following Animate Xtras ship with FreeHand:

•	 Release to Layers


Cleanup Xtras
Cleanup Xtras (Xtras menu)

Use Cleanup Xtras to decrease the complexity of the document. Cleanup Xtras can make the document smaller and easier to print. The following Cleanup Xtras ship with FreeHand:

•	 Simplify

•	 Remove Overlap

•	 Reverse Direction

•	 Correct Direction


Color Xtras
Colors Xtras (Xtras menu)

Use Colors Xtras to affect colors in the document. The following Colors Xtras ship with FreeHand:

•	 Color Control

•	 Darken Colors

•	 Desaturate Colors

•	 Import RGB Color Table

•	 Lighten Colors

•	 Name All Colors

•	 Randomize Colors

•	 Saturate Colors

•	 Sort Color List By Name


Create Xtras
Create Xtras (Xtras menu)

Use Create Xtras to create new objects from existing objects. The following Create Xtras ship with FreeHand:

•	 Blend

•	 Emboss

•	 Trap


Delete Xtras
Delete Xtras (Xtras menu)

Use Delete Xtras to delete unused objects from the document. The following Delete Xtras ship with FreeHand:

•	 Delete Empty Text Blocks

•	 Delete Unused Named Colors


Distort Xtras
Distort Xtras (Xtras menu)

Use Distort Xtras to modify and restructure existing paths. The following Distort Xtras ship with FreeHand:

•	 Add Points

•	 Envelope

•	 Fractalize


Other Xtras
Other Xtras (Xtras menu)

This Xtra also ships with FreeHand:

•	 Set Note


Path Operations
Path Operations(Xtras menu)

Use Path Operations Xtras to perform actions on existing paths. The following Path Operation Xtras ship with FreeHand:

•	 Crop

•	 Divide

•	 Expand Stroke

•	 Inset Path

•	 Intersect

•	 Punch

•	 Transparency

•	 Union


Color Control (Xtra)

Use Color Control to add a percentage of a color value to all colors in the selected objects.

Selection buttons for CMYK, RGB, or HLS mode:

CMYK & RGB mode

Moving a slider to the right adds the percentage up to 100 percent indicated in its respective entry field to the color of each selected object.

Moving a slider to left subtracts the negative percentage to as little as -100% indicated in the entry field from the color of each selected object.

HLS mode

Move sliders to the right to increase Hue, Lightness, and Saturation, or move them to the left to decrease Hue, Lightness, and Saturation.

Check Preview to see the effect of your changes as you make them.

Note	If colors already consist of minimum or maximum values, Color Control will have no effect.

Note	Objects with named colors which have been modified with Color Control will have unnamed colors. The original named colors remain in the Color List. Use Name All Colors to add them to the Color List.

  Related Topics


Darken Colors (Xtra)

Use Darken Colors to darken the colors of selected objects.

To use Darken Colors:

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Xtras > Colors > Darken Colors.

Colors will darken in appearance each time you use Darken Colors until the maximum darkness is reached.

Tip	For more precise control of colors, use the Color Control Xtra.

  Related Topics


Desaturate Colors (Xtra)

Use Desaturate Colors to dull the colors of selected objects.

To use Desaturate Colors:

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Xtras > Colors > Desaturate Colors.

Notice the colors have an increasingly grayed appearance each time you select Desaturate Colors until the minimum saturation is reached.

Tip	For more precise control of colors, use the Color Control Xtra.

  Related Topics


Lighten Colors (Xtra)

Use Lighten Colors to brighten the colors of selected objects.

To use Lighten Colors:

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Xtras > Colors > Lighten Colors.

Colors will lighten in appearance each time you use Lighten Colors until the maximum lightness is reached.

Tip	For more precise control of colors, use the Color Control Xtra.

  Related Topics


Multi-Color Fill (Used only for exporting file to earlier versions of FreeHand)
Multi-Color Fill (Xtra)

In FreeHand 8, Multi-Color fills should be created using the Gradient Fill Inspector.

The Multi-Color Fill Xtra continues to ship with FreeHand to maintain compatibility with earlier versions. It can be found on the FreeHand CD.

Use Multi-Color Fill to create Graduated and Radial fills with up to 64 colors.

To use the Multi-Color Fill Xtra:

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Multi-Color Fill from the Xtras > Colors > Multi-Color Fill to display the Multi-Color Fill dialog box.

In the Multi-Color Fill dialog box, drag and drop a color chip from the Color List or the Color Mixer to a location in the ramp. Redefine any color by dropping another chip onto the existing one. Move colors to different locations in the fill by dragging the color chip right or left. Remove colors by dragging them off of the color ramp.

°	Graduated: Select an angle, and Linear or Logarithmic.

°	Radial: Locate the center of the Radial fill.

3	Click the Apply button to preview your selected fill.

4	Click OK to apply the fill and close the Multi-Color Fill dialog box.


Name All Colors (Xtra)

Using Name All Colors scans the document for all unnamed colors used in paths, fills, and text, and then places them in the Color List with their default CMYK value names if they are not already there.

Use Name All Colors to list current colors for adjustments you've made using Color Control, Desaturate, Darken, Lighten, Randomize, and Saturate Colors Xtras.

Tip	Name All Colors does not name colors in bitmap images. To add a color from a bitmap image to the Color List, use the Eyedropper tool.

  Related Topics


Randomize Named Colors (Xtra)

Randomize Named Colors changes the color of all colors in the Color List but has no effect on unnamed colors. The color values applied are completely random. Experiment with this Xtra for new color combinations.
  Related Topics


Saturate Colors (Xtra)

Use Saturate Colors to brighten the colors of the objects you have selected.

To use Saturate Colors:

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Xtras > Colors > Saturate colors.

Each time you select Saturate Colors, the colors have an increasingly brightened appearance until the maximum saturation is reached.

Tip	For more precise control of colors, use the Color Control Xtra.

  Related Topics


Sort Color List by Name (Xtra)

Sort Color List By Name arranges the Color List in numerical, then alphabetical order.

Use this Xtra to organize your Color List or help locate a specific color in a long list.

Note	The default colors (None, White, Black, and Registration) always appear at the top of the Color List.

  Related Topics


Trap (Xtra)

Use the Trap Xtra to create traps for objects with Basic strokes and Basic fills. Traps create adjoining objects that overlap slightly to compensate for misregistration of printing presses.

•	Trap width—Enter the width of a trap.

•	Reverse traps—Check to force traps to spread when they would normally choke.

•	Trap color method—Click Use maximum value or Use tint reduction to determine the method used to create a trap color.

With Use tint reduction selected, enter a percentage value to lighten a trap color.

Tip	To use Traps on text, convert your text to paths first.

Note	Consult your printer for recommendations on trapping before generating traps.


Delete Empty Text Blocks (Xtra)

Use Delete Empty Text Blocks to remove all unused text blocks. Only text blocks with no text in them (spaces and returns are considered characters) are removed.

Paths with flowed inside text or attached text will not be deleted.


Delete Unused Named Colors (Xtra)

Use Delete Unused Named Colors to remove all colors from the Color List not in use.

  Related Topics


Fractalize (Xtra)

Use Fractalize on any object or path to create intricate, square-like patterns. The path will become more complicated as the effect is repeated.

To use Fractalize:

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Xtras > Distort > Fractalize or click {fractalizebutton.bmp} on the Operations panel.

Note	Each time you use Fractalize the number of points on the selected object will almost double.


3D Rotation (Xtra)

Use the 3D Rotation tool to apply 3D effects to the 2D drawings.
3D Rotation options

Double-click the button to display the 3D Rotation tool dialog box.

Easy: Select from the following options in the pop-up:

•	Rotate from: Choose the point of rotation.

°	Mouse click: Choose to rotate from the point you click with your mouse.

°	Center of selection: Choose to rotate from the center of the object selected.

°	Center of gravity: Choose to rotate by the visual center of the object.

°	Origin: Choose to rotate from the lower, left corner of the object.

•	Distance: Enter a value, or drag the slider to the left (smaller values) to maximize distortion, or drag to the right (larger values) to minimize distortion.

Expert: Increase your options for 3D Rotation.

•	Project from: Select the point of projection.

°	Mouse click: Choose to make the projection (vanishing point) extend to the location you click with your mouse. XZ and YZ coordinates display below the pop-up.

°	Center of selection: Choose to make the projection (vanishing point) center behind the object selected. XZ and YZ coordinates display below the pop-up.

°	Center of gravity: Choose to make the projection (vanishing point) center behind the visual center of the object. XZ and YZ coordinates are displayed below the pop-up.

°	Origin: Choose to make the projection (vanishing point) begin at the lower-left corner of the object. XZ and YZ coordinates display below the pop-up.

°	X / Y coordinates: Choose to input x and y coordinates for the projection (vanishing point). This value defaults to the last mouse coordinates and can be manually changed.


How to rotate an object in 3D

1	Select an object.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the object, and drag to rotate it.

Hold down Shift to constrain the rotation to 45 degree increments.


Photoshop Filter (Xtra)

Filter Plug-ins

These plug-ins apply special effects to TIFF images placed in FreeHand. They appear in the FreeHand Xtras menu with the word TIFF appended before them.

To use a Filter plug-in, select a TIFF image. Then, select a filter from the Xtras menu. If a dialog box appears, make any additional settings, and then click OK.

Acquisition Plug-ins

These plug-ins receive data directly from scanners or other digital imaging hardware. These plug-ins appear in Xtras > Acquire.

To use an Acquisition plug-in, select the plug-in from the Xtras menu. When the dialog box appears, choose any settings, and click OK. FreeHand will convert the read data into a TIFF image and place it in the center of the active window, or place it in the lower-left corner of a new document if no document was open.

Tip	For more information on controlling settings in plug-ins, consult the documentation for the plug-in.

Any image modified or imported in FreeHand using a Photoshop-compatible filter becomes an embedded TIFF. To lower document size, use the Extract feature to write the TIFF’s data to an external file.

Apply Photoshop-compatible filters to any image drawn or placed in FreeHand by first exporting the images as a bitmap format. Then import the image and apply Photoshop-compatible filters.

  Related Topics


Arc tool (Xtra)

Use the Arc tool to create quarters of an ellipse.

To use the Arc tool:

1	Click [image] on the Xtra Tools panel.

2	Click and drag to draw an arc.

Arc tool options

Double-click the Arc tool on the Xtra Tools panel to display the Arc dialog box.

The preview box shows the current status of the Arc tool visually. Check boxes appear for the following options:

•	Create open arc: Check to draw only the arc curve. Unchecked to draw the arc as a quarter pie shape.

•	Create flipped arc: Check to flip the orientation of the arc.

•	Create concave arc: Check to draw the arc with an outer corner.

Modifier keys

•	Control: Toggles between an open and closed arc.

•	Shift: Constrains the arc to 90 degrees of a circle.

•	Alt: Toggles between concave and convex arc.


Fisheye Lens (Xtra)

Use the Fisheye Lens Xtra to apply a 3D, spherical effect, or bubble effect, to selected objects.
Double-click the Fisheye Lens button to display the Fisheye Lens dialog box, and enter settings to control the depth of the distortion, as well as whether the effect is concave or convex. The entry field accepts values from -100 (most concave) to 100 (most convex).


To apply a lens effect

1	Select an object.

2	Double-click the Fisheye Lens button in the Xtra Tools panel to display the Fisheye Lens dialog box.

3	Use the Perspective slider to define the lens effect.

4	Click and drag over the object.

The tool only affects the portion of the selected object within the circular lens area.

5	Release the mouse button.


Send Mail (Xtra)

If a MAPI32-compliant mail system is available in your Windows NT or Windows 95 environment, selecting File > Send creates a new outgoing mail message with the selected FreeHand document attached. This feature will not work with 16-bit MAPI services. Two options are available when sending an e-mail: include active document and include all documents.

•	Choose [File name] to attach the active document.

•	Choose All Open Documents to attach all currently open documents to your mail message.

The document is attached in its current state. If the document is unnamed, it will be attached with the default name.


Set Note (Xtra)

Use Set Note to attach labels or notes to objects.

To view an object’s notes, select the object and choose the Set Note Xtra.

Tip	Use Set Note with Find & Replace Graphics to search for objects with names to find and replace several objects or object attributes.

Note	FreeHand 3.1 files with notes will be read in automatically. Notes longer than 254 characters will be truncated. When exporting to FreeHand 3.1, object names are not included.


How to attach a note to an object

1	Select an object.

The same name or note may be applied to more than one object.

2	Choose Xtras > Other > Set Note or click the Set Note button in the Operations panel.

3	Type an entry in the Object name and note field and press Return or Enter.

FreeHand automatically wraps text at the end of a line. Pressing Return or Enter assigns the entry.


Eyedropper tool (Xtra)

Use the Eyedropper Xtra to select colors in paths, type, color wells, and bitmap images. The Eyedropper preserves the color's name, if it is named.
  Related Topics


To sample colors from an object or imported image
 To sample a color using the Eyedropper tool:

1	Click the Eyedropper button in the Xtra Tools panel.

The cursor becomes an Eyedropper.

2	Move the cursor over a color in an object.

3	Hold down the mouse button to sample a color.

The cursor changes to a color chip containing the sampled color.

4	Drag the color chip to another object or a color well and release the mouse.

The color applies to the destination object.


Smudge tool (Xtra)

Use the Smudge Xtra to soften the edges of objects or create a drop shadow effect.
To customize a smudge, do one of the following:

•	If the object has a stroke, choose a stroke color.

•	To smudge without a stroke, choose a stroke of None in the Stroke Inspector for the original object.

•	Create a drop shadow by choosing a slightly darker tint of the background color as the Smudge-to color and by choosing no stroke.

•	Create a soft edge by holding down Alt@ while smudging.

Double-clicking the Smudge tool displays the Smudge dialog box. In the Smudge dialog box, change the stroke and fill colors for the end of the smudge.


To create a smudge, or shadow
To create a smudge or shadow effect

1	Select an object and double-click the Smudge tool in the Xtra Tools panel.

2	Drop color chips onto the Fill and Stroke color wells in the Smudge dialog box to assign colors defining the blend color and click OK.

3	Move the cursor over the path to smudge.

4	Click and drag outward from the original path.

With the mouse button held down, a preview of the selection appears, linked to the original object by a line.

Hold down Alt to smudge outwards from the center.

5	Release the mouse button.


Add Points (Xtra)

Adds points halfway between every pair of points on a selected path.
If the distance between a particular pair of points is short enough to cause an additional point to overlap, FreeHand does not add a new point between those two points.


Envelope (Xtra)

Use Envelope to Distort objects and groups of objects by altering their outer boundary.


To distort an object using the Envelope tool

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Xtras > Distort > Envelope, or click [image] on the Operations panel.

3	In the Envelope dialog box, move any of the eight points attached to the boundary, or their handles, to manually distort the selection or use the presets to position the points.

°	OK: Click to apply the Envelope settings to the selected object and close the Envelope dialog box.

°	Apply: Click to apply the Envelope settings to the selected object without closing the Envelope dialog box.

°	Reset: Click to reset the Envelope dialog box, undoing any changes made in the Envelope shape.

°	Tighter Fit: Click to make the object follow the edges of the Envelope bounding box more closely.

Create your own preset and save by choosing Save from the Presets pop-up.

Note	Moving an enveloped object or altering its path shape yields an object that is no longer editable in the Envelope dialog box. Until the object is moved or altered, reset the object to its original shape in the Envelope dialog.

Note	Convert text to paths before applying Envelope.


Spiral tool (Xtra)

Use Spiral to create open paths in the shape of spirals.
Spiral tool options

Double-click the Spiral tool to open the Spiral dialog box.

Click an element below for more information:


To draw a spiral

1	Click [image] on the Xtra Tools panel. The cursor changes to a crosshair.

2	Click and drag to draw the spiral.

3	Release the mouse button.


Click to create a concentric spiral with equal distance between rotations.


Click to create a nautilus spiral with the distance between spirals increasing with each rotation.


Enter a percentage of the increase in the distance between the first ring and the last ring of a nautilus spiral.


Choose the way the spiral is drawn.

•	Rotations: Enter a specific number of rotations in the spiral. The ring size created when drawing by rotations depends on the object's size.

•	Increments: Enter the Increment width (for concentric spirals) or Starting radius (for nautilus spirals). The number of rotations created when drawing by increments depends on the size of the object.


Number of rotations: Available with Draw by Rotations selected. Enter the number of times the spiral makes a complete rotation regardless of its size.

Increment width: Available with Draw by Increments and Concentric selected. Enter the radius of the rings of the spiral, in the current unit of measurement.

Starting Radius: Available with Draw by Increments and Nautilus selected. Enter the radius of the first, and innermost, ring of the spiral in the current unit of measurement.


Define the way the Spiral tool is used to draw the spiral.

•	Center: Draws a spiral with its center at the starting point and its edge at the mouse up location.

•	Corner: Draws a spiral within the area defined by the starting point and the mouse up location.

•	Edge: Draw a spiral with its edge at the starting point and its center at the mouse up location.


Set the direction the spiral expands, clockwise or counterclockwise.


Roughen tool (Xtra)

Roughen adds points to a selected path and randomly distributes them away from the original path’s location.
Roughen options

Double-click the Roughen tool to open the Roughen tool dialog box.

Amount: Enter the number of points added per inch.

Edge: Select the type of points used.

°	Rough: Uses corner points to create a jagged edge.

°	Smooth: Uses curve points to create a smooth, but distorted, edge.


To roughen paths or objects

1	Select a path.

2	Double-click the Roughen button in the Xtra Tools panel to display the Roughen dialog box.

3	Enter the number of points added per inch in the Amount entry field. Click Rough Edge to apply sharp corner points to paths. Click Smooth Edge to apply smooth curve points to paths.

The settings yield results varying from a soft, hand-drawn look to a jagged, spiked effect.

4	Click anywhere on the path and drag. Dragging farther from the path makes the path rougher.

5	Release the mouse button to apply the effect.

Note	To apply this effect to text, choose Convert Text to Paths first.


Bend tool (Xtra)

Curve paths inward or outward from the point where the mouse is clicked.


To bend or bloat a path or object

1	Select a path.

2	Click [image] on the Xtra Tools panel.

Double-click the Bend tool to set the amount of distortion. The higher the value, the greater the distortion.

3	Click and drag.

The distortion centers on the point where the mouse was clicked.

°	Drag up to create a spiked effect, curving the path inward while the anchor points are moved outward.

°	Drag down to create a bloated effect, curving the path outward while the anchor points are moved inward.

4	Release the mouse.


Transparency (Xtra)

Using Transparency creates the effect that an object placed over another object is transparent.

Note	In FreeHand 8, use a Lens fill to create editable transparent objects.

The Transparency Xtra creates a new path from the portions of selected paths that overlap, leaving the original paths. The original paths are retained as the new path is created from the intersection of the original paths.

Transparency options

Double-click the Transparency button on the Operations panel to set the transparency value.

•	A value of 50 creates the illusion that both selected closed paths are equally transparent.

•	A value greater than 50 makes the foreground object appear more transparent, and a value less than 50 makes the foreground object appear less transparent. The new path has no stroke.

Note	All selected paths must intersect. If any selected path does not intersect all other selected paths, there will be no transparency effect.

  Related Topics


Emboss (Xtra)

Use Emboss to create a three-dimensional effect in which the edges of an object are raised or impressed. Use the Emboss Xtra only on objects that are closed paths with Basic, Gradient, or Pattern fills. Applying the Emboss Xtra creates multiple objects much like blending or smudging. Choose Window > Xtras > Operations to display the Operations panel, select one or more objects, and click the Emboss button to display the Emboss dialog box.	Click an element below for more information:
Choose one of five effects from the buttons across the top: Emboss, Deboss, Chisel, Ridge, or Quilt. Set options, and click Apply to preview the effect, or click OK to apply the effect and close the dialog box.

Note	To apply the effect without opening the dialog box, hold down Control, and click the Emboss button. Alternatively, choose Xtras > Create > Emboss to display options and apply the effect.


Emboss


Deboss


Chisel


Ridge


Quilt


The Vary option sets the way in which an object’s colors create highlight and shadow. Choose either Contrast or Colors from the pop-up. Contrast uses tints of the path’s original colors to create highlight and percentages of black combined with the path’s original color to create shadow. Colors uses colors you specify in the Highlight and Shadow color wells available with this option.

The Emboss Xtra creates incremental colors to achieve each effect. Applying Emboss, Deboss, Chisel, Ridge, or Quilt to objects with spot, Hexachrome, or RGB colors yields incremental CMYK process colors.


Depth controls the distance by which the effect is raised or impressed. Slider values range from 1 to 20, but you can enter a value up to 72 in the field. Values are measured in the document’s unit of measurement.


Angle controls the placement of the light source, which affects the direction of the highlight and shadow. Values are measured in degrees.


Check Soft Edge to apply a blended look to the relief. Soft Edge is available only with Emboss and Deboss.


Vector Hose(Xtra)
 Graphic Hose tool (Xtra)

Use the Graphic Hose tool in the Xtra Tools panel to spray frequently used objects on your document page for quick illustration. Each hose consists of up to 10 objects that can reside in a FreeHand document, including groups, blends, text, EPSs, and TIFFs. Choose from a collection of preset hoses, or create your own hoses. Choose Window > Xtras > Xtra Tools to display the Xtra Tools panel, and click the Graphic Hose button. To spray objects, drag the tool on your document page. The speed and direction that you drag the tool affects how objects are placed.
Note	Use the left and right cursor keys to increase or decrease the spacing as you spray hose objects. Use the up and down cursor keys to increase or decrease the scale factor as you spray hose objects.

Managing hoses

Double-click the Graphic Hose button to display options. The Graphic Hose panel has two buttons: Hose and Options.

To activate a hose, click the Hose button on the Graphic Hose panel and choose from available hoses listed in the active hose pop-up. The Rename and Duplicate commands in the active hose pop-up only affect the active hose. Choose New when adding a hose to the list. The Contents pop-up lists each object available in the active hose and previews each in the window provided.


Choose either Hose or Options to toggle between the main pane of the Graphic Hose panel and the Options pane.


New: Create a new graphic hose.

Rename: Change the name of an existing graphic hose.

Duplicate: Create a copy of an existing graphic hose.

List of hoses: Choose the active graphic hose.


Displays a preview of the current graphic hose object of the current graphic hose.


Click to paste an object from the clipboard into the current graphic hose.


Click to delete the previewed hose object from the current graphic hose.


Click to copy the previewed hose object to the clipboard.


Choose a hose object from the current graphic hose.


Setting Graphic Hose Options

To add a new hose

To delete a hose

Managing hose objects


To add a new hose:

1	Click the Hose button on the Graphic Hose panel, and choose New from the active hose pop-up.

2	Name the new hose in the Hose dialog box, and click Save to add it to the list.

3	Select one or more objects, choose Edit > Cut or Copy, and click Paste in to add it to the list of active hose objects in the Contents pop-up.

When basing a new hose on a default hose, duplicate and rename the default hose to prevent inadvertent modification.


To delete a hose:

Discard the corresponding FreeHand file of the same name from the Xtras > Graphic Hose folder in the FreeHand application folder. If you modify a default hose and cannot retrieve it by using Edit > Undo, you must uninstall and then reinstall FreeHand to regain the default set of hoses.


Managing hose objects

The Contents pop-up lists the objects available in the active hose. To add an object to the active hose, select it, cut or copy it, and click Paste in. The maximum number of objects that can comprise a single hose is 10. Each new object is assigned a name: Object-1, Object-2, and so on. Choose an object name from the Contents pop-up to display it in the preview. Once an object is deleted from the active hose, it is not possible to use Edit > Undo to retrieve it.

Note	Avoid placing too many memory-intensive objects such as EPS and TIFF images in a hose because spraying a great number of these generally results in larger and slower documents.


Vector Hose(Xtra)
Setting Graphic Hose options

On the Graphic Hose panel, click the Option radio button to specify the way in which hose objects are sprayed in your document. Define how objects are ordered, spaced, scaled, and rotated.	Click and element below for more information:


Control the rotation of sprayed objects.

Uniform	Rotate objects progressively by a fixed rotation angle.
Incremental	Rotate objects by progressively increasing or decreasing the rotation angle.
Random	Randomly rotate objects by applying a rotation angle ranging from 0 to the angle specified in the entry field.


Control the size of sprayed objects.

Uniform	Scale objects progressively by a fixed percentage, ranging from 1 to 300.
Random	Randomly scale objects based on a percentage of randomness ranging from 0 to 300, where 0 indicates no deviation from the percentage specified in the entry field.


Control the distance between sprayed objects.

Grid	Space objects in rows and columns defined by a fixed distance.
Variable	Space objects based on a specified value. Slider values range from 0 to 100, where 0 is Tight and 100 is Loose. Enter a value of up to 300 in the entry field.
Random	Randomly space objects based on a percentage of randomness ranging from 0 to 200, where 0 indicates no deviation from the value specified in the entry field.


Control the order of sprayed objects.

Loop	Place objects in the order in which they appear in the Contents pop-up.
Back and Forth	Place objects from first to last and then from last to first in the order they appear in the Contents pop-up.
Random	Randomly place objects listed in the Contents pop-up.


Mirror (Xtra)
Mirror tool(Xtra)

Use the Mirror Xtra tool to create simple or complex patterns by creating one or more reflections of an existing path. To choose the Mirror Xtra tool, select a path, then click the Mirror tool button on the Xtra Tools panel.

Click and drag the mirror cursor to specify the halfway point between the selected path and its reflection or the centerpoint of a group of reflections. Keylines show the position of each reflection upon release.

To	Do this
Rotate the keylines around the cursor	Hold down Alt.
Constrain rotation to 45° degree increments	Hold down Alt-Shift
Toggle between reflect and rotate when setting Multiple mirrors	Up and Down cursor keys
Increase or Decrease number of axis when setting Multiple mirrors	Right and Left cursor keys
Note	An entire path, text container, or image must be selected when you use the Mirror tool. If only some points on a path are selected, FreeHand selects the entire path to mirror.

Double-click the Mirror Xtra tool to display the Mirror dialog box.

Choose	To create
Vertical	A copy of the selected object flipped along its vertical edge (default).
Horizontal	A copy of the selected object flipped along its horizontal edge.
Horizontal and Vertical	A 2x2 matrix of reflections centered on the cursor location.
Multiple	A radial array of either clones and their reflections or clones only, centered on the cursor location.
Choosing the Multiple option displays additional options.

Reflection factor: Type a number 1 through 100 or use the slider to enter 1 through 50. If Reflect is set, the object and its reflection are multiplied. If Rotate is set, only the object is multiplied. To increase the reflection factor while using the tool, press the right cursor key. To decrease the reflection factor, press the left cursor key.

Effect type: Choose between multiple clones of objects and their reflections (Reflect) or multiple clones of paths only (Rotate). To switch between Reflect and Rotate while using the tool, press the up or down cursor key.

Close Paths: With Close Paths checked, FreeHand closes any open paths whose endpoints are no farther apart than the width specified by the General > “Snap distance” preference.


Release to Layers (Xtra)

The Release to Layers Xtra ungroups blends or objects attached to a path and assigns each ungrouped object to a layer in consecutive order. The Xtra places the first object on the original layer and the last object on the last newly created layer. For best results, design the frames of your movie to animate upwards from the bottom layer to the top layer.

Release to Layers affects the following objects:

•	Blends and blends on a path

•	Text blocks

•	Text on or in a path

•	Inline graphics on or in a path

Note	Applying the Release to Layers command to text blocks converts the text to paths.

To ungroup the blend steps to layers, one step to each layer, select the blend and choose Xtras > Animate > Release to Layers. Always select objects before choosing Release to Layers. When a blend is released to layers, the first object in the blend remains on the original layer by default. The subsequent blend steps are placed on layers named New Layer, New Layer-1, New Layer-2, and so on. Display the Layers panel to see how the layers are created and named.

  Related Topics


Shadow (Xtra)
Shadow tool (Xtra)

Use the Shadow tool in the Xtra Tools panel to apply drop shadows to FreeHand vector objects. The Shadow tool does not apply shadows to bitmap images, EPSs, clipping paths, or text. Choose from three types of shadows: Hard Edge, Soft Edge, and Zoom.Designate the color for the Zoom shadow type using two color wells—one for the stroke color and one for the fill color.

The Shadow tool creates incremental colors to achieve the Soft Edge and Zoom effects. Applying soft-edged or zoomed shadows to objects with spot, Hexachrome, or RGB colors yields incremental CMYK process colors.


To apply a drop shadow

To apply a drop shadow to text

Setting the drop shadow's fill


To apply a drop shadow:

1	Select one or more objects.

2	Choose Window > Xtras > Xtra Tools to display the Xtra Tools panel, and click the Shadow tool.

Double-click the Shadow tool to display options.

3	Drag the Shadow tool on the original object or objects to initiate the shadow, move the Keyline preview of the shadow to a desired location, and release the mouse button.

Moving the Shadow tool moves only the shadow, not the original object. The original object and its shadow comprise a group.


To apply a drop shadow to text

First convert the text to paths. To apply a drop shadow to a clipping path, apply the shadow to an object before using it as a clipping path or cut the contents of a paste inside to apply the shadow only to the clipping path. Then, select the contents, choose Edit > Cut, subselect the clipping path within its group, and choose Edit > Paste Inside.


Setting the drop shadow’s fill

Fill options vary depending upon the shadow type. For Hard Edge and Soft Edge shadows, choose from these options in the Fill pop-up:

•	Tint: Define the shadow color as a tint of the original object’s color. A value of 0 yields white; a value of 100 yields 100 percent of the original object’s color.

•	Shade: Define the shadow color as a percentage of black added to the original object’s color.

•	Color: Define the shadow color according to the color chip dropped onto the color well available with this option.

Soft Edge has these additional options:

•	Fade to: Drop a color onto the Fade to color well to define the shadow’s background color. The default is white.

•	Soft edge: Define the degree to which the shadow’s edges are softened to the Fade to color. A value of 0 yields a hard edge; a value of 100 softens the shadow throughout.


Import RGB Color Table

Import the colors from a Photoshop or xRes color index table into FreeHand so that the color values are the same in either application. Choose Xtras > Colors > Import RGB Color Table, and then choose the Photoshop ACT file or xRes CTB file that contains the index to import.


Spinning cursors

When you perform an operation that takes several seconds, FreeHand changes the cursor to a spinning hourglass. For extremely long operations, FreeHand displays a progress bar estimating the remaining time.

Note	Turn off animated Windows cursors to see the spinning cursor in FreeHand.


Math entry fields

Enter mathematical equations in any entry field in FreeHand.

Using math entry fields

The math entry fields accept the standard math symbols:

*	Multiplication
/	Division
+	Addition
-	Subtraction
Note	When * and / are used in conjunction with + or -, the * and / will be evaluated first.

The math entry fields also accept these standard unit overrides as follows:

#i	inches	Example: 7i = 7 inches
p#	points	Example: p6 = 6 points
#p	picas	Example: 6p = 6 picas
#m	millimeters	Example:12m = 12 millimeters
To reduce the size of a 100 x 100 rectangle by half its width, enter 100/2 in the width entry field in the Object Inspector. The object resizes to 50 x 100.

For an invalid entry, FreeHand either uses what it can or defaults to 0 (zero).

Example: Entering 500dogs results in 500,and entering Dogs500 results in 0.


Smart Cursors

FreeHand’s cursors are designed to give you feedback as you move around the document.

FreeHand tool, Pen tool, and Bezigon tool cursors

These cursors give feedback as you draw using the Freehand tool, the Pen tool, or the Bezigon tool.

	Standard cursor: Crosshair cursor that appears when using the Freehand tool, the Pen tool, or the Bezigon tool.
	Create path cursor: When you initially click with the Pen or Bezigon tool, this cursor indicates the start of a new path. Once the first point is created, FreeHand reverts to the standard cursor. Since the Freehand tool creates a new path every time it is used, the Create Path cursor will not appear.
	Close path cursor: Shows that you are about to close a path.
	Insert point cursor: Shows that you are about to insert points on a selected path using the Pen tool or the Bezigon tool.
	Continue path: When you move the Freehand over the endpoints of a path, this cursor indicates the continuation of a path.
Drag and drop color cursors

	This cursor appears when you hold down Shift to force a color to apply to the fill of an object. The result is a Basic fill.
	This cursor appears when you hold down Control-Shift to force a color to apply to the stroke of an object.
	This cursor appears when you hold down Control to apply a Graduated fill as you apply colors.
	This cursor appears when you hold down Alt to apply a Radial fill as you apply colors.
Creating object cursor

	The cursor appears when creating an object from its center point or constrained at the center. This cursor appears only when you are holding down Alt or Shift-Alt before beginning to draw an ellipse, rectangle, or line, and it will revert to the standard cursor when you finish drawing the object.
Snapping to cursors

Snap to cursors appear an object is about to snap to a guide or point.

	Snap to vertical guide cursor: Appears when an object is about to snap to a vertical guide.
	Snap to horizontal guide cursor: Appears when an object is about to snap to a horizontal guide.
	Snap to point: Appears when an object is about to snap to a point on another object. Also shows when you are moving the Pointer tool across a point of any object.


Color models

Color models are processes by which colors are created or displayed. FreeHand works with five color models.

Use the Color Mixer to switch from one model to another. The K (black) value in CMYK colors converts to RGB or HLS.

Regardless of the model used, all new colors are defined as process colors because FreeHand assumes the final output of most documents require color separations. Convert a process color to a spot color using Options on the Color List or specify Spot in the Add to Color List dialog box when you create the color.

The five color models are:

•	 CMYK: Displays the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black color model, which is based on a subtractive process. Use this model to create process colors.

Use CMYK colors for blended objects and for Graduated or Radial fills.

•	 RGB: Displays the red, green, and blue color model which is based on an additive process. This model is generally used to create spot colors.

•	 HLS: Displays the hue, lightness, and saturation model, which is an additive process where:

°	H: Hue is a color, such as orange, pink, or green.

°	L: Lightness indicates the lightness or darkness of a hue.

°	S: Saturation refers to the vividness or dullness of a hue.

•	 Tints panel : Creates lighter shades of a spot or process color.

Tints are based on a percentage of the spot or process color, and print with the base color when separated.

•	 Windows button: Displays the Windows Basic Colors panel, which contains 48 basic colors.


Working with charts

Use the Chart dialog box to create and edit charts. The Chart dialog box opens when you use the Chart Xtra to create a chart or when you edit an existing chart.

In the Chart dialog, there are two main areas:

	Worksheet	Click to display the Worksheet dialog box to enter or edit chart data.
	Chart Type	Click to display the Chart type dialog box to select a type of chart and adjust its appearance.
Treat the chart like any other graphic. The chart may be enlarged, scaled, rotated, or moved and still be edited as a chart. However, once ungrouped, the chart permanently becomes a graphic and you can no longer edit it using the Chart Xtra.

To edit chart elements, subselect one element, such as a column. Press Tilde (~) to add all the elements of that series. For instance, change the color of the columns using the Fill Inspector.


To create a pictograph

1	Select and copy an object.

2	Subselect one of the columns in that series.

3	Choose Xtras > Chart > Pictograph.

The Pictograph dialog box appears.

4	Click Paste in.

The copied object appears in the preview area.

5	Check Repeating to cause the columns to be composed of stacked copies of the object.

Partial objects are used to represent values that are not whole increments. Leave Repeating unchecked to cause the object to appear as one object, scaled to fill the space occupied by the column.

6	Copy out returns the object to the Clipboard.


Chart Worksheet dialog
Chart Worksheet dialog box

Use the Worksheet dialog box to enter and edit data for the chart.

To navigate in the Worksheet:

•	Click a cell with the mouse.

•	Use the cursor keys.

•	Press Tab to move to the cell on the right.

•	Press Return to move to the cell below.

Note	The Chart tool plots empty cells as having zero values. Keep your chart compact. Do not skip spaces, with the exception of top-left cell.

Labeling categories and items in the legend

Each row of data on the Worksheet becomes grouped on the chart. Transpose the data and the grouping changes. These groupings are called categories.

Category labels are placed in the first column at the beginning of the row they describe. Items in the legend are labeled in the first row of the Worksheet at the top of the column they describe. Neither category nor legend labels are required by FreeHand.

Note	Place straight quotation marks around labels that are numbers so they will not be read as data.


To edit data in a chart

To edit data in a single cell, simply select the cell and enter the data.

For more extensive manipulation of data, use the buttons to the left of the chart.

•	Undo: Reverse the last change made to the Worksheet data. There is only one level of undo.

•	Cut: Remove data from highlighted cells.

•	Copy: Copy data from highlighted cells.

•	Paste: Paste copied or cut data into cells starting with the cell currently highlighted.

Note	Tab-delimited data can be pasted in from other applications such as Microsoft Excel®.

•	Transpose: Switch columns, moving the data.

•	Switch XY: Valid for Scatter charts only. Reverses the X and Y axes.


To enter data into a chart

1	Select a cell.

2	Type in the data, which appears in the Cell Edit box.

3	Enter the data by moving to another cell or by clicking Apply, OK, or the Chart button.

4	Repeat until all data is entered.

For more precise manipulation of data:

•	Set the decimal precision. The value in the box indicates the number of decimal places to which the data will be rounded.

•	Check the box next to the Thousands separator to punctuate values of one thousand or greater.

•	Click and drag triangles directly above the Worksheet cells to adjust column width.


Chart Type dialog

Chart types

To display the Chart Type dialog, click the button with a picture of a chart on it.

•	Grouped Column: Compare data using bars. Each bar represents one cell of data.

•	Stacked Column: Compare the progress of data. Each bar represents a row of data.

•	Line: Show the trend of data over a period of time. Each line represents a column of data.

•	Pie: Display data in a circular graph with wedges. Each cell of data represents a single wedge. Each row of data produces a Pie chart.

•	Area: Display filled areas representing the progress of data over time. Each area represents a column of data in the Worksheet. Each column’s value is added to the previous column’s total.

•	Scatter: Plot data as paired sets of coordinates to identify trends in data. Each coordinate represents a row of data containing two cells.

Chart options

•	Data numbers in chart: Displays the data from the Worksheet next to the points in the Chart.

•	Drop shadow: Adds a dark shadow behind and to the right of the chart.

•	Legends across top: Places the legends side-by-side above the chart, rather than stacked to the right of the chart.

•	Column width: Changes the column width. In the case of Grouped column charts, adjustments are made with respect to cluster width and the number of columns.

•	Cluster width: Changes the amount of space designated for each group of columns.

•	Separation: Adjusts how far out a pie piece is removed.

•	Data markers: Choose from None, Square, Diamond, Triangle, or Circle.

•	Axis display: Sets the vertical axis of the chart appears: to the right, to the left, or on both sides of the chart.

•	Gridlines: Makes gridlines appear. X gridlines extend from left to right along the X axis. Y gridlines extend from top to bottom along the Y axis. Checking both boxes creates a grid behind the chart.

•	Axis options: Finely manipulates the appearance of the X and Y axes.

°	Axis values are calculated from the data. Adjust these settings manually. Each axis is manipulated separately. Enter the smallest value to appear on the axis in the box for Minimum. Enter the largest value to appear on the axis in the box for Maximum. Specify the increments into which the axis is divided in the Between box.

Note	If you want the axis to start with a higher number and end with a lower number, enter a negative number in the Between box.

°	Major tick marks correspond to numbers or category labels on the axes. Minor tick marks are evenly spaced, supplemental marks. They can be placed across, inside, or outside of an axis.

°	Axis value labels show what the values on the axis mean. For instance $1,000 or 65% rather than 1,000 or 65. Labels before the value are entered in the prefix box. Labels after the value are entered in the suffix box.


Working with alpha channels
Alpha channels

Use alpha channels to export bitmap images with complex masking and transparency for use in bitmap editing applications. An alpha channel is a layer of a graphic that defines which areas of the graphic are transparent and which areas of the graphic are opaque.

Using alpha channels, quickly define an outline or edge of an object created in FreeHand. This is especially useful if you are creating a graphic for a web page, or for use in multimedia or video where you want to see a background graphic through areas of an image.

FreeHand can export these formats with an alpha channel:

•	 xRes LRG (32 bit)

•	 TIFF (32 bit)

•	 TGA (32 bit)

•	 PNG (32 bit)

•	 BMP (32 bit)

Creating an alpha channel

When exporting a bitmap format that supports alpha channels, check Include alpha channel in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog to automatically create an alpha channel on export. This alpha channel is a mask, or outline, of all the objects on the FreeHand page. When the image is opened in an application that supports alpha channels, the edges of objects in the image can be easily defined.

Note	The formats must be exported as 32-bit to support alpha channels. Access bit depth options by clicking the More button in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog.

  Related Topics


Creating custom transparency when exporting bitmaps

Using FreeHand’s Background layer, define custom areas of transparency on graphics exported as bitmap images with alpha channels.

To define custom transparency:

1	Create or open an illustration.

2	On the Background layer, draw the desired mask.

Use only black and white colors (or grays) for masking.

°	Black areas in the Background layer appear opaque in the resulting bitmap.

°	White areas in the Background layer are transparent.

°	Grays, or Gradient fills, become transparent. Darker grays appear more opaque and lighter grays appear more transparent.

Note	Because the Background layer of a FreeHand document is not printed, defining an alpha layer this way does not affect printing of the document.

3	Choose File > Export. Select a MIX format that can include alpha channels.

The formats xRes LRG, TIFF, TGA, PNG, and BMP can include alpha channels.

4	Click Setup.

In the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog, set the resolution and anti-aliasing. Make sure Include alpha channel and Alpha includes background are checked.

5	Click More on the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog. Select a 32-bit format that has an alpha channel, then click OK.

6	Click OK.

7	Click Export.

  Related Topics


Working with PDF files
Working with PDF

Importing a PDF document

FreeHand can open documents saved in the Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) format, the standard developed by Adobe for use by its Acrobatª line of products. For more information on the capabilities and limitations of the PDF, consult the Adobe Acrobat product specifications.

•	To open a PDF document, select File > Open. Multi-page PDF documents open in FreeHand as multi-page documents. Each page has the same size and orientation as the original PDF document.

PDF Import does not provide automatic font substitution. When a font specified in the PDF file is not present on your system, FreeHand’s Missing Font dialog appears and asks you to select replacement fonts.

Supported fonts

FreeHand’s PDF Import Xtra supports all font formats allowed by the PDF format. These include PostScript Type 1, PostScript Type 3, and TrueType fonts. FreeHand displays any font in a PDF document if that font is installed on your system. For more information about the types of fonts PDF supports, please consult the Adobe Acrobat documentation.

PDF creation tools sometimes output PDF documents that separate single or partial lines of text according to their differing font attributes. Therefore, when FreeHand opens a PDF file, the document may contain a large number of individual text boxes. This is a normal occurrence resulting from the manner in which the PDF creation tool structured the original PDF document. If desired, combine these individual text blocks in FreeHand using traditional text manipulation methods.

Supported graphics

The PDF format supports RGB, grayscale, and monochrome bitmaps. FreeHand can modify these bitmap images just like any placed or imported bitmap image.

Depending on the structure of the original PDF document, an entire page may appear as a single object with the graphic elements pasted inside. Select the page with the Pointer tool and choose Edit > Cut Contents to release the graphic elements.

EPS images in a PDF document open as editable objects.

The PDF format supports almost everything that can be created or placed in FreeHand. However, here are some exceptions:

•	Page sizes: The maximum page size for a PDF document is 3240 x 3240 pixels (about 45 inches x 45 inches). A larger page will be clipped to fit the maximum PDF page size.

•	Fills : Custom, Textured, and PostScript fills are not supported by the PDF format.

•	Strokes: Custom and PostScript strokes are not supported by the PDF format. Also, PDF format does not support arrowheads.

•	Alpha channels: Alpha Channel transparency is not supported by the PDF format.

•	EPS: EPSs are not supported by the PDF format. If an EPS has a TIFF preview, FreeHand exports the preview instead of the EPS file.

•	Text effects: Text effects do not export to the PDF format.

•	Overprint: PDF does not support overprinting. Overprinting applied to objects is turned off when exporting to PDF.

Note	When it finds any incompatible object, the PDF Export Xtra displays a cautionary dialog upon completion of export.

  Related Topics


To export in PDF format
To export as a PDF

1	Choose File > Export and choose PDF as the format.

2	Click Setup.

3	Make desired settings in the PDF Export dialog.

4	Click OK to close the PDF Export dialog.

5	Click OK in the Export dialog.

  Related Topics


PDF Export options

These options are available in the PDF Export dialog box. This dialog box appears when you choose File > Export, select PDF as the format, and click OK.

Choose	To
Image Compression: Color	Set JPEG compression level for color bitmap images in the exported PDF document. Available levels of compression are Maximum, High, Medium High, Medium, Medium Low, Low, and None.
Image Compression: Grayscale	Set JPEG compression level for grayscale bitmap images in the exported PDF document. Available levels of compression are Maximum High, Medium High, Medium, Medium Low, Low, and None.
Pages: All	Export all pages in your FreeHand document to a PDF document.
Pages: FromÉTo	Export a range of pages from your FreeHand document to a PDF document. Enter the beginning page of the range in the From: field, and the ending page of the range in the To: field.
Compression

The compression level of your color and grayscale images greatly affects the file size and the quality of printing for the PDF. Images at higher compression levels create smaller file sizes, but bitmap images print with lower quality. Little or no compression yields larger documents that print with higher quality.

When designing a PDF document for print, choose little or no compression. When designing a PDF document for on-screen viewing, choose higher levels of compression.

  Related Topics


Basic point handle manipulation

Adjust the curvature and the angle of path segments by manipulating point handles. The range and direction of handle movement varies for each type of point. In FreeHand, point handles are slender with small point knobs. If you wish to use larger handles, uncheck the General > “Use smaller handles” preference.

The farther you drag a handle away from a corner, curve, or connector point, the more pronounced the curve becomes.


To extend point handles manually

To extend point handles using the Object Inspector

To retract point handles manually

To retract point handles automatically


To extend point handles manually

1	Select a point.

2	Hold down Alt and click and drag handles, one at a time, from the selected point.

The first handle you extend curves the path segment following the point. The second handle you extend curves the path segment preceding the point.


To extend point handles using the Object Inspector

1	Select a curve point with handles retracted.

2	Use Control - I to display the Object Inspector.

3	Check Automatic to adjust point handles and adjacent path segments to best conform to the existing path.

The curve point handles do not necessarily return to the position in which they were first placed.

Note	Checking Automatic does not extend the handles of corner or connector points.


To retract point handles automatically

1	Select a point with handles extended.

2	Use Control - I to display the Object Inspector.

3	For curve points, click the left and right point handle buttons.

For corner and connector points, check Automatic and FreeHand automatically adjusts the adjacent path segments.


To retract point handles manually
To retract point handles automatically

1	Select a point with handles extended.

2	With the Pointer tool, click and drag the end of each handle into the point.


Using templates

To work more efficiently and avoid design inconsistencies, create templates for documents that share common design elements and production settings.

A template’s settings and attributes are defaults for creating other documents. Save a document as a template when you want to create new documents with the same objects, settings, colors, and object and paragraph styles. For example, to create a series of designs that have the same page size and layout, save the first one as a template and then use it to create the rest in the series.

A template file saves what is in a FreeHand document, including the following:

•	Guides

•	Layer information

•	Object styles

•	Paragraph styles

•	Custom colors

When opening a template, an untitled copy of it appears. Use the untitled copy to create or replace an existing template. You can also designate a template as your default for new documents.

For best results, create templates in FreeHand 8. Do not use templates from previous versions. To restore the original FreeHand 8 defaults, Quit or Exit FreeHand. Delete the Fhprefs.txt in the FreeHand 8 folder. Restart FreeHand.


To save a document as a template

To edit a FreeHand template

To set a template as the default for new documents


To save a document as a template

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Enter a name for your template file in the Save Document dialog box.

3	Choose FreeHand Template from the Save as type pop-up.

4	Choose a destination and click Save. In Windows, an FT8 extension is added to the file name.


To edit a FreeHand template

1	Open the template, make changes, and then choose File > Save.

2	Save the newly revised document as a template with the same name and location.

3	FreeHand prompts you to replace the original template file. Click Replace and the new template replaces the old one.


To set a template as the default for new documents

1	Open and edit a template.

To edit the default template, choose File > New and edit the untitled copy.

2	Save the template in the same folder as the FreeHand application.

The default template must be kept in the folder with the FreeHand application.

3	Enter the template’s file name in the Document > “New document template” preference.

The next time you choose File > New, an untitled copy of your new default template appears.


Animation in FreeHand
Animation using FreeHand and Macromedia Flash

The Flash Export Xtra exports a FreeHand document as an animated movie in the Shockwave Flash SWF format. Import the SWF file into Macromedia Flash 2, view it with the Shockwave Flash 2 player, or view it in a web browser (Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer) with the Shockwave Flash plug-in. Download Shockwave plug-ins for free from www.macromedia.com.

To export a FreeHand file to the Flash 2 SWF format, choose File > Export. In the Export Document dialog box, choose Flash 2 SWF from the Save as type pop-up. Click Options to display settings for path compression, image compression, text, number of pages to export, method of animation (layers, pages, or both), and frame rate.

Click an element below for more information:

Supported features

These FreeHand features are supported in the Flash SWF format:

•	Basic strokes and fills

•	Gradient fills

•	Indexed or RGB TIFFs, LRGs, and embedded images (JPEG, GIF, PNG)

•	Blended paths

•	Composite paths, including text converted to paths

•	Objects pasted inside clipping paths (clipping paths are ignored)

•	Text blocks

Reducing SWF file size

Placing objects on layers for animation

The Release to Layers Xtra ungroups blends or objects attached to a path and assigns each ungrouped object to a layer in consecutive order.

  Related Topics


This option affects graphic quality by controlling the precision used to convert FreeHand paths to Flash paths. More precision specifies more points on a path; less precision specifies fewer points on a path. Options range from None (highest quality, no compression, most points) to Maximum (lowest quality, greatest compression, fewest points).


Bitmap images convert to JPEG format upon export. This option controls the image quality and the compression of color JPEG files. Options range from None (highest quality, lowest compression) to Maximum (lowest quality, highest compression).


•	Choose Maintain blocks to keep all the text together in a FreeHand text block for editing in Flash 2.

•	Choose Convert to Paths to convert text to vector paths, so the text is no longer editable as text. Text attached to a path or text flowing inside a path is automatically converted to paths and therefore is not editable in Flash.

•	Choose None to omit all text from the exported file.


This option specifies all pages or a range of pages. Each frame is the same size as the first page exported.


Choose any combination of the Animation options to export layer-based frames, page-based frames, or both:

•	If neither Animate layers nor Animate pages is checked, each page of the FreeHand file is exported as a separate SWF file. The layers of each page make up a still image for that page.

•	If only Animate pages is checked, each page is exported as a Flash frame, saving all pages into one SWF file. The layers of each page make up the image for that page (frame).

•	If only Animate layers is checked, each layer is exported as a Flash frame. FreeHand exports each page as a separate SWF file, with numbered file names to denote the sequence. The layers (frames) for each page are included in the file for that page. Frames of animation are sequenced from the bottom layer to the top layer. The Guides layer and hidden layers (layers that are turned off) are not exported.

•	If both Animate layers and Animate pages are checked, only one SWF file is exported. All layers of the first page are exported as a sequence of frames, followed by all layers of the second page, and so on. Each page can be used as a scene.


This option specifies the frame rate of the Flash movie in frames per second (fps). As in Flash, choose a frame rate from 0.01 fps to 120 fps, in increments of 0.01. For smooth animations use 12 fps.


Use Flash 2 to significantly reduce the size of an SWF movie exported from FreeHand.

To reduce the file size:

1	Open or import the SWF movie file in Flash 2.

2	Choose Modify > Movie.

The Movie Properties dialog box is displayed.

3	Click Match Contents and then click OK to set the dimensions.

4	Choose File > Export Movie, name the file, and click Save.


Managing cross-platform file transfer

FreeHand uses the same native file format for both the Macintosh and Windows versions, so opening files created on the other platform is easy. With a few exceptions, the document does not change at all. The results are the same when printing to PostScript devices from either platform.

Naming files

When transferring files to the other platform, follow these naming limitations:

•	Macintosh file names have a maximum size of 32 characters.

•	Windows file names have a maximum size of 255 characters.

•	Avoid using a space as the beginning character in a file name for Windows, as well as other illegal Windows characters. See the Windows documentation.

If a platform receives a file with a name it cannot recognize, the file name is shortened or changed, and may not be easily recognized. In this case, rename the file and manually update any links to the renamed file.

Transferring images

Remember to transfer any linked EPS, TIFF, or LRG files along with the document since they are stored outside the illustration. If you do not transfer the source files, the graphic does not display or print. Previews do not display on screen properly after transferring to another platform.

Note	Objects imported using Publish and Subscribe (Macintosh) do not have dynamic linking properties when opened in Windows. They must be manually transferred and relinked.

Troubleshooting

If a file does not open after transferring from a Windows-compatible computer to a Macintosh, check the size of the original file against the transferred file size. If the size differs by even one byte, the transfer was unsuccessful. When you transfer from a Macintosh to Windows and a Fetch preview was attached, the file size decreases because the Fetch preview is lost.

Files might not open on a Windows-compatible computer if a memory-intensive network is loaded. Try reopening the file without the network loaded.

On the Macintosh, files must have the correct file type and creator. In Windows, files must have the correct three-character file name extension, such as FH7.

Transferring type

If the correct fonts are not installed on the destination platform, FreeHand displays the Missing Fonts dialog box and ask you to replace the missing fonts. Macromedia Fontographer can use fonts from either platform to create compatible versions for the other platform.

Another way to transfer type across platforms is to convert text to paths . At that point, the text is no longer editable as text, but as a vector graphic object. Converting text to paths is a good way to transfer titles or logos, but converting large amounts of text to paths can slow down screen redraw and increase file size


Object Level Halftones

To apply object-level screen angles and rulings, select an object, choose Windows > Panels > Halftones, and enter a screen angle and a screen frequency. The values you enter in the Halftones panel override ink-level settings for that object. It is important to remember that a screen frequency less than 20 lpi can cause PostScript errors.

In addition to setting object-level Screen Angle and Frequency, you can apply special halftone dot shapes. The options are Default, Round dot, Line, and Ellipse. Although you can adjust object-level screen angles and rulings for full-color images, each separation of the image prints with the angle and ruling specified, which can cause moirŽ patterns when printed on a commercial press.

When printing on an imagesetter that uses a proprietary screening solution, such as Agfa’s Balanced Screening Technology, values you enter may be overridden by ink-level settings or may cause PostScript errors.

To restore the default settings for halftone angle and frequency, backspace to clear the entry fields and press Return.


Overprinting

When one colored object overlaps another, unless overprinting is turned on, the top object will cut out the overlapped portion when printing separations. This knockout may cause a small white border between overlapping objects when printed, which is the result of misregistration problems. To easily identify overprinting objects on screen, check the Redraw > “Display overprinting objects” preference. O’s will appear on screen for overprinting objects. Use Find & Replace Graphics to locate objects set to overprint.

If you want your EPS to overprint in another application, check Overprint when exporting an object with a spot color as an EPS. Otherwise the EPS will knock out the background upon placement in the new application.

Trapping is another way to compensate for misregistration. Talk to your printer before getting started for advice on whether to overprint or trap, and which settings to use.

In general, use overprinting when you want to print a spot color directly on top of an underlying object or background color. You can also use overprinting to inexpensively add a third spot color to a two-color document. For example, overprinting a red spot color on a yellow background gives you orange in that area, without affecting the red and yellow used elsewhere. Overprinting works best when you overprint a dark color on top of a light-colored object or background.

FreeHand supports overprinting the following object types:

Object	Overprinting default status	Check the Overprint checkbox in
Text in text blocks	Black ink set to overprint	The Fill Inspector
Fills in text blocks	Off	The Fill Inspector
Basic stroke	Off	The Stroke Inspector
Basic or gradient fill	Off	The Fill Inspector
TIFFs and LRGs	Off	The Fill Inspector
You cannot set an imported EPS to overprint inside FreeHand. Whether or not an EPS overprints is controlled by objects in the original EPS file.


Overprinting TIFFs

Overprinting Gradient fills

Overprinting inks


Overprinting TIFFs

All bitmap images except TIFFs and LRGs are converted to TIFFs upon import. You can set them to overprint like any other TIFF by selecting them and checking the Overprint checkbox in the Fill Inspector. A color TIFF will appear on the process plates containing its specific color values, and will overprint all spot plates. A grayscale or transparent grayscale TIFF to which a spot color or CMYK value has been assigned will also overprint.

Overprinting works best for spot colors. Overprinting using process colors may give unexpected results. While FreeHand will allow you to overprint a grayscale TIFF to which a process color has been applied, it is generally a bad idea.

What you see on your monitor screen can differ greatly from the final results that emerge from your printer.

In the following examples, the image on the left shows a process TIFF overprinted on a process background. The image on the right shows a spot TIFF overprinted on a process background.


Overprinting Gradient fills

Just like any other object, overprinting gradient fills may overcome trapping problems by allowing a filled object to overprint on the correct color plates. Do not overprint indiscriminately. Unless you are familiar with overprinting, it can result in a third color in the overprinted area that is not what you expected.

Check the Overprint checkbox in the Fill Inspector to set any basic or gradient fill to overprint. The results of overprinting vary greatly depending upon the colors used in the fill and the background. You will get the best results overprinting an object with a gradient fill on a spot color background. The filled object will overprint on the spot plate, eliminating trapping problems.

If you overprint an object with a gradient fill on a process background, the results will vary based on the CMYK values in the background and the CMYK values used in the gradient fill.


Overprinting inks

To set overprinting document-wide for specific spot or process colors, set the desired inks to overprint in the Separations panel in the Print Setup dialog box by clicking in the Overprint column. Set inks to overprint for a single print session or save the overprint status as part of your document. Inks with a check mark in the O column will overprint. Inks with a dash will knock out. Inks with a diamond have an assigned ink overprint threshold.

We recommend setting inks to overprint on a document level only if you have a thorough understanding of working with separations and overprinting.

Set an overprint threshold to specify a limit for shades of an ink to be overprinted. For example, set an overprint threshold of 90% for the black ink when you want all objects that contain 90% or more of black to overprint. Objects containing less than 90% black will knock out. To set the overprint threshold, click in the O column in the Separations panel to display the Overprint Ink dialog box. Enter a value in the percentage entry field. Grayscale TIFFs containing inks with an overprint threshold will always knock out.


General shortcuts
General

Command	Shortcut
Close the document	Control-F4
Close all open multiviews	Control-Shift-F4
Export	Control-Shift-R
Help cursor	Shift-F1
Import	Control-R
Next page	Control-page down
New Window	Control-Alt-N
Previous page	Control-page up
Zoom in magnification	Control-space-click
Zoom out magnification	Control-Alt-space-click


Panels and Tools shortcuts
Panels and Tools

To display this	Use
Align	Control-Alt-A
Arrowhead Editor	Alt-Select Arrowhead
Bezigon tool	8
Blend	Control-Shift-B
Color List	Control-9
Color Mixer	Control-Shift-9
Columns and Rows Inspector	Control-Alt-R
Copyfit Inspector	Control-Alt-C
Dash Editor	Alt-Select Dash
Document Inspector	Control-Alt-D
Ellipse tool	3
Fill Inspector	Control-Alt-F
Freehand tool	5
Grabber Hand tool	Spacebar
Halftones panel	Control-H
Hide or show all open panels	Control-Alt-H
Knife tool	7
Layers panel	Control-6
Line tool	4
Object Inspector	Control-I
Operations panel	Control-Alt-O
Paragraph Inspector	Control-Alt-P
Pen tool	6
Pointer tool	0 (zero)
Polygon tool	2
Rectangle tool	1
Page Rulers	Control-Alt-M
Spacing/Horizontal Scale Inspector	Control-Alt-K
Stroke Inspector	Control-Alt-L
Styles panel	Control-3
Text tool	. (period), A
Text Toolbar	Control-Alt-T
Toolbox	Control-7
Transform	Control-M
Xtra Tools panel	Control-Alt-X


Drawing and editing shortcuts
Drawing and Editing

Command	Shortcut
Clone	Control-Shift-C
Cut Contents	Control-Shift-X
Decrease stroke width next increment	Control-Shift-1
Deselect All	Tab
Grabber Hand	Spacebar
Group	Control-G
Increase stroke width next increment	Control-Shift-2
Paste Inside	Control-Shift-V
Preview/Keyline	Control-K
Select all in document	Control-Shift-A
Select all on page	Control-A
Snap to Guides	Control-Alt-G
Snap to Point	Control-Shift-Z
Variable Stroke/Calligraphic Pen size down	Left cursor key, 1
Variable Stroke/Calligraphic Pen size up	Right cursor key, 2
Ungroup	Control-U


Menu shortcuts
Menus

File menu

Command	Shortcut
New	Control-N
Open	Control-O
Close	Control-F4
Save	Control-S
Save As	Control-Shift-S
Import	Control-R
Export	Control-Shift-R
Print	Control-P
Preferences	Control-Shift-D
Exit	Alt-F4
Edit menu

Command	Shortcut
Undo	Control-Z
Redo	Control-Y
Cut	Control-X
Copy	Control-C
Paste	Control-V
Cut Contents	Control-Shift-X
Paste Inside	Control-Shift-V
Copy Attributes	Control-Shift-Alt-C
Paste Attributes	Control-Shift-Alt-V
Duplicate	Control-D
Clone	Control-Shift-C
Select > All	Control-A
Select > All in Document	Control-Shift-A
Find and Replace > Text	Control-Alt-Z
Find and Replace > Graphics	Control-Alt-E
View menu

Command	Shortcut
Fit Selection	Control-0 (zero)
Fit to Page	Control-Shift-W
Fit All	Control-Alt-0 (zero)
Magnification > 50%	Control-5
Magnification > 100%	Control-1
Magnification > 200%	Control-2
Magnification > 400%	Control-4
Magnification > 800%	Control-8
Preview	Control-K
Panels	Control-Alt-H
Info Bar	Control-Alt-J
Page Rulers	Control-Alt-M
Text Rulers	Control-Shift-Alt-T
Snap to Point	Control-Shift-Z
Snap to Guides	Control-Alt-G
Modify menu

Command	Shortcut
Object	Control-I
Stroke	Control-Alt-L
Fill	Control-Alt-F
Text	Control-T
Document	Control-Alt-D
Transform	Control-M
Transform Again	Control-Shift-G
Arrange > Bring to Front	Control-F
Arrange > Move Forward	Control-Shift-F
Arrange > Move Backward	Control-Shift-K
Arrange > Send to Back	Control-B
Align	Control-Alt-A
Align Again	Control-Shift-Alt-A
Join	Control-J
Split	Control-Shift-J
Combine > Blend	Control-Shift-B
Lock	Control-L
Unlock	Control-Shift-L
Group	Control-G
Ungroup	Control-U
Text menu

Command	Shortcut
Size > Smaller	Control-Alt-1
Size > Larger	Control-Alt-2
Type Style > Plain	F5, Control-Shift-Alt-P
Type Style > Bold	F6, Control-Alt-B
Type Style > Italic	F7, Control-Alt-I
Type Style > BoldItalic	F8, Control-Shift-Alt-O
Effect > None	Control-Shift-Alt-N
Effect > Highlight	Control-Shift-Alt-H
Effect > Strikethrough	Control-Shift-Alt-S
Effect > Underline	Control-Alt-U
Align > Left	Control-Shift-Alt-L
Align > Right	Control-Shift-Alt-R
Align > Center	Control-Shift-Alt-M
Align > Justified	Control-Shift-Alt-J
Special characters > End of Line	Shift-Enter
Special characters > Non-Breaking Space	Control-Shift-H
Special characters > Em Space	Control-Shift-M
Special characters > En Space	Control-Shift-N
Special characters > Thin Space	Control-Shift-T
Special characters > Discretionary Hyphen	Control-_ (underscore)
Editor	Control-Shift-E
Spelling	Control-Alt-S
Run Around Selection	Control-Alt-W
Flow Inside Path	Control-Shift-U
Attach to Path	Control-Shift-Y
Convert to Paths	Control-Shift-P
Window menu

Command	Shortcut
New Window	Control-Alt-N
Toolbars > Text	Control-Alt-T
Toolbars > Toolbox	Control-7
Inspectors > Object	Control-I
Inspectors > Stroke	Control-Alt-L
Inspectors > Fill	Control-Alt-F
Inspectors > Text	Control-T
Inspectors > Document	Control-Alt-D
Panels > Layers	Control-6
Panels > Styles	Control-3
Panels > Color List	Control-9
Panels > Color Mixer	Control-Shift-9
Panels > Halftones	Control-H
Panels > Align	Control-Alt-A
Panels > Transform	Control-M
Xtras > Operations	Control-Alt-O
Xtras > Xtra Tools	Control-Alt-X
Cascade	Shift-F5
Tile	Shift-F4


Constraining shortcuts
Constraining tools

Tool	Shortcut	Action
Pointer	Shift-Pointer tool	Constrain the movement of a selected object to 45 degree increments of the Constrain angle
Text	Shift-Text tool	Constrain the text container to a square
	Shift-Alt-Text tool	Display the Text Editor and create a square text block
Rectangle	Shift-Rectangle tool	Constrain a rectangle to a square
	Alt-Rectangle tool	Draw a rectangle from its center
	Shift-Alt- Rectangle tool	Draw a square along the Constrain angle from its center
Polygon	Shift-Polygon tool	Draw and constrain based on the Constrain angle
Ellipse	Shift-Ellipse tool	Constrain an ellipse to a circle
	Alt-Ellipse tool	Draw an ellipse from its center
	Shift-Alt- Ellipse tool	Draw a circle along the Constrain angle from its center
Line	Shift-Line tool	Draw a line along the Constrain angle
	Alt-Line tool	Draw a line from its center
	Shift-Alt-Line tool	Draw a line along the Constrain angle from its center
Freehand	Alt-Freehand tool	Draw a straight line
	Shift-Alt-Freehand tool	Draw a straight line along the Constrain angle
	Control-Freehand tool	Erase a path while drawing
Pen	Shift-Pen tool	Extract a point handle along the Constrain angle
Knife	Alt-Knife tool	Cut a straight line
	Shift-Alt-Knife tool	Cut a straight line along the Constrain angle
Arc	Shift-Arc tool	Constrain the angle of the arc along the Constrain angle
Bezigon	Shift-Bezigon tool	Constrain point placement along the Constrain angle
Rotate	Shift-Rotate tool	Rotate in 45 degree increments from 0 degrees
Reflect	Shift-Reflect tool	Reflect in 45 degree increments from 0 degrees
Scale	Shift-Scale tool	Scale proportionally from mouse-down
Skew	Shift-Skew tool	Skew in 45 degree increments from 0 degrees
Smudge	Alt-Smudge tool	Smudge from the center of an object
Note	The Constrain angle defaults to 0 degrees. Choose Modify > Constrain to set a different angle.


Text shortcuts

Text

To do this	Shortcut
Attach to Path	Control-Shift-Y
Adjust range kerning for the entire container	Drag a side handle
Adjust word spacing for the entire container	Alt-drag a side handle
Adjust leading for the entire container	Drag a top or bottom handle
Baseline shift down by one point	Control-Alt-Down arrow
Baseline shift up by one point	Control-Alt-Up arrow
Convert to Paths	Control-Shift-P
Decrease point size of selected text or a text container by one point	Control-Shift-Alt-Down arrow
Display the Spelling panel	Control-Alt-S
Display the Text Editor	Control-Shift-E or Alt-Text tool
Extend text selection left one character	Shift-Left arrow
Extend text selection left one word	Control-Shift-Left arrow
Extend text selection right one character	Shift-Right arrow
Extend text selection right one word	Control-Shift-Right arrow
Extend text selection up one line	Shift-Up arrow
Extend text selection down one line	Shift-Down arrow
Flow Inside Path	Control-Shift-U
Increase point size of selected text or a text container by one point	Control-Shift-Alt-Up arrow
Kern or track less by 1% em	Control-Alt-Left arrow
Kern or track less by 10% em	Control-Shift-Alt-Left arrow
Kern or track more by 1% em	Control-Alt-Right arrow
Kern or track more by 10% em	Control-Shift-Alt-Right arrow
Reduce the size of the container to fit text	Double-click the link box
Run Around Selection	Control-Alt-W
Show or hide the Text Ruler	Control-Shift-Alt-T
Show or hide the Text Toolbar	Control-Alt-T
Toggle auto-expansion on and off	Double-click a side or bottom handle


Formats that FreeHand can import
Adobe Illustrator 1.1 - 7 (AI)

 Adobe Photoshop 3 - 4 (PSD)

 Adobe PDF

 AutoCAD DXF

 BMP

 Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

 CorelDRAW 3, 5, 6, 7 (CDR)

 DCS EPS

 EPS

 FreeHand 2 - 7.0.2 (FH3, FH4, FH5, FH7)

 GIF

 JPEG

 Micrografx Designer 3.x (DRW)

 PICT, PICT2

 Portable Network Graphic (PNG)

 Targa (TGA)

 TIFF

 Windows Metafile (WMF)

 Windows Enhanced Metafile (EMF)

 xRes 2, 3 ( LRG)


Formats that FreeHand can export
Adobe Illustrator 1.1 - 7

 ASCII Text

 Adobe PDF

 AutoCAD DXF

 BMP

 CorelDRAW 3, 5, 6

 DCS EPS

 EPS

 FreeHand 3.1 - 7.x

 GIF

 JPEG

 Macromedia Flash 2

 Micrografx DRW

 Photoshop EPS

 Photoshop RGB EPS

 PICT, PICT2

 PNG

 Quark Express EPS

 RTF Text

 Targa (TGA)

 TIFF

 WMF and EMF

 xRes LRG

 xRes paths


EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

EPS is a format that is ideal for use in professional printing. An EPS can contain vector graphics, bitmap images, or both. EPS is the best file format for preserving prepress-ready color.

FreeHand can import and export EPS graphics.

Special notes on exporting an EPS

•	Multiple Pages: When you choose an EPS format, each page exports as a separate EPS file. Specify export of all pages or a range of pages in the Export dialog box.

•	Editable EPS: Editable EPS is a special EPS format that can be opened and edited in FreeHand, and then saved as EPS without exporting again. To save an editable EPS, click Setup in the Export dialog box and check Include FreeHand document.

•	Fonts: If the PostScript Type 1 or TrueType fonts used are not installed on the final PostScript output device, include fonts in the EPS file. To do so, click the Setup button in the Export dialog box and check “Include fonts in EPS.”

EPS export types

FreeHand exports five types of EPSs:

•	Encapsulated Postscript: This is a basic EPS format with no preview attached.

•	EPS with TIFF Preview: This is an EPS with a TIFF preview attached.

•	Photoshop EPS: This EPS format is best for opening or importing into Photoshop.

•	Photoshop RGB EPS: This is the best EPS format for opening or importing into Photoshop.

•	QuarkXPress EPS


DCS EPS

Use DCS EPS (Desktop Color Separation Encapsulated PostScript) files to increase the speed of printing high-resolution EPS files. Each DCS 1.0 EPS is split into five files: one low-resolution composite preview file and one file for each of the four process colors. The DCS 2.0 format is a single file containing all of the data within the five DCS 1.0 files. FreeHand can import DCS 1.0 and DCS 2.0 files and export DCS 2.0 files.

To use a DCS 1.0 EPS, import the low-resolution file from the DCS separations. When FreeHand creates process color separations, it automatically gathers information from the four other component files of the DCS EPS and outputs them to the appropriate plates.

To use a DCS 2.0 EPS, import the single DCS file. FreeHand automatically uses the low-resolution data for display and the high-resolution data for output to the appropriate plates.

To export a FreeHand object or illustration as a DCS EPS, choose File > Export > EPS DCS2. FreeHand exports a single DCS 2.0 EPS file containing a color preview.

Import a DCS as a linked image—do not embed it.


PICT Image

PICT is a Macintosh format that can include both bitmap and vector graphics.

Exporting a PICT

When exporting a PICT from the Export menu, FreeHand exports your image as an object-oriented PICT at 72 dpi.


xRes LRG

LRG is a file format created by Macromedia xRes that allows images to be rapidly opened, imported, and edited on your computer. FreeHand can open and place LRG files.

In most cases, LRGs behave in FreeHand exactly as TIFF images behave. Use the Links dialog box to embed, extract, or change links to LRG files.

Also, FreeHand can apply Photoshop Plug-ins to LRG files. However, once an LRG image has been modified with a Plug-in, it is converted to a TIFF and is embedded in the FreeHand document. After applying a plug-in to an LRG image, use the Edit > Links > Links dialog box to extract the embedded image to an external file.

Note	Link LRG files rather than embed them. Because LRG files tend to be very large, embedding them can cause FreeHand to run very slowly and consume more RAM.

FreeHand can import and export LRG images and can transform imported LRG images.

Tip	Uncheck “High resolution image display” in the Redraw > preferences to greatly increase redraw speed when using LRG files.

LRG export options

Click More in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box to set LRG-specific export settings:

Color depth

24-Bit: Check to export 24-bit color.

32-bit with Alpha: Check to export LRG images in 32-bit color with an alpha channel.


TIFF

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) is a bitmap graphic format widely used in commercial printing.

FreeHand can import and export TIFF images and can transform imported TIFF images.

Exporting TIFF images

When you export an object or document as a TIFF image, FreeHand rasterizes the FreeHand document. Use the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box to set options.

To set TIFF-specific options, click the More button in the Bitmap Export Defaults while exporting as a TIFF. The TIFF specific options are:

Color depth

8-bit: Check to export TIFF images in 8-bit color.

24-Bit: Check to export TIFF images in 24-bit color.

32-bit with Alpha: Check to export TIFF images in 32-bit color with an alpha channel.


HPGL
HPGL graphics

HPGL (Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language) is a vector graphic language used to print to plotters.

FreeHand can import and edit HPGL Graphics.

FreeHand for Windows can print to HPGL language plotters.

Note	TrueType and Type 1 fonts will not work with HPGL graphics. HPGL graphics need special fonts created solely for HPGL graphics. Consult the manufacturer of the plotter for information regarding these fonts.


MIX
Macromedia Information Exchange (MIX)

MIX Xtras enable FreeHand and other Macromedia applications to import and export additional file formats. Add new MIX Xtras to FreeHand as they are developed.

Installing MIX Xtras

The MIX Xtras that ship with FreeHand are automatically installed when you install FreeHand.

To install new MIX Xtras, place them in the FreeHand 8 > English > Xtras folder or directory.

MIX formats

Import or export the following MIX formats using FreeHand:

•	 BMP

•	 GIF

•	 JPEG

•	 Photoshop 3.0

•	 PNG

•	 Targa (TGA)

•	 TIFF

•	 xRes LRG


GIF

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) is a bitmap format developed by CompuServe to easily transfer graphic files online. GIF is an 8-bit (256 color) format that uses LZW compression to make bitmap files smaller—about half of their original size. The GIF format uses the 256 most representative colors for the image so that the final images have small file sizes, but good image quality.

GIF images are also capable of defining one of its colors as transparent, so that when the GIF is placed over another image, either online or in a bitmap editing application, the bottom image is seen through areas defined as transparent. In FreeHand, this transparency is similar to using an alpha channel. GIF images may contain completely transparent or completely opaque areas; partial transparency is not supported.

Because of its small size, high quality, and ability to include transparency, GIF is an ideal format for use in the development of web pages.

Importing GIF

To import a GIF, choose File > Open or File > Import, choose GIF from the File of type pop-up, and GIFs will appear as available files.

Note	GIF images convert to TIFF images when opened or imported.

Exporting GIF

To export a GIF, choose File > Export, and select GIF in the Save as type pop-up and click Save.

When FreeHand exports a GIF, it rasterizes your FreeHand document.

GIF export options

To set resolution and anti-aliasing when exporting, click Setup in the Export dialog box to open the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog.

To set GIF-specific options, click More in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box, when GIF is selected as the export type.

Transparency and the Index color

Create a transparent GIF by checking Transparent Background in the GIF Options dialog box. Use the Index color to define which color is transparent in the exported GIF. The Index color appears highlighted in the Palette display, and its Index number in the palette is shown in the Index field. Select a different Index color by clicking any color in the Palette display, or by entering a number into the Index field.

File size of GIF Images

To create smaller GIF files when exporting from FreeHand, use a reduced color palette (such as Exact Palette, 16 colors, 32 colors, or 64 colors) or turn off dithering. Turning off dithering causes the greatest reduction in file size, especially if the exported object is composed primarily of large, flat areas of color as opposed to photographs or 3D models.


Interlaced GIF: Check to create an interlaced GIF. Interlaced GIF images redraw progressively on screen by drawing every other line of pixels and then filling in the gaps.

Tip	Use Interlaced GIF images on web pages for quick display.


Dither: By default, exported GIF images are dithered so that they better match the colors used in the original object. Uncheck this box to turn off dithering. Undithered GIF files are smaller, but the colors may look different if the original colors are not available in the palette used for export.

Tip	Use dithering when exporting objects containing more than 256 colors, complex blends or gradients, or photographic images.


Palette: Use the Palette pop-up to select the specific set of colors included in the exported GIF image. Using a specific palette:

•	Lowers GIF file size by eliminating unused colors.

•	Prevents color conflicts when creating graphics for use on a web page or in another online medium.

The Palette pop-up choices are:

•	Exact Palette: When selected, FreeHand creates and includes a color palette for the exported GIF consisting only of the colors used in the selected object.

•	Web: The Web palette is the standard 216-color palette used by web browsers. This palette includes the 216 colors that are common to both Macintosh and Windows, and are often called web-safe colors.  Web palette is the default if the exported image has more than 256 colors.

•	64 colors, 32 Colors, 16 Colors: These are preset color palettes to quickly export smaller GIFs by constraining the number of colors to a minimum.

Note	If the original colors differ from the colors in the preset palettes, FreeHand approximates the colors, sometimes producing inconsistent results.

•	3-3-2--This palette was the one used by the original FreeHand GIF Import Export Xtra.

•	Other: FreeHand can export GIFs using Photoshop or xRes palette files. Place the palette file into the Program Files > Common Files > Macromedia > Palettes folder. Then select the installed palette from the Palette pop-up in the GIF Options dialog box to apply it when exporting. Choose Other to browse to a palette file in any folder.


Transparent GIF: Check to create transparency in the exported GIF based on the outline of the objects.


The Index color appears highlighted in the Palette display, and its Index number in the palette is shown in the Index field. Select a different Index color by clicking any color in the Palette display, or by entering a number into the Index field.


Palette display: The Palette display shows all the colors used in the palette selected in the Palette pop-up. X boxes indicate unused color spaces in the palette. Select any one of the color chips to set the Index of the transparent color for the exported GIF.


JPEG

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) is a highly compressible bitmap graphic format.

Importing JPEG

To import a JPEG, choose File > Open or File > Import, choose JPEG from the File of type pop-up, and JPEGs appear as available files.

Note	JPEG images convert to TIFF images when opened or imported.

Exporting JPEG

To export a JPEG, choose File > Export, and select JPEG in the Save as type pop-up and click Save.

When FreeHand exports a JPEG, it rasterizes your FreeHand document.

JPEG export options

To set resolution and anti-aliasing when exporting, click Setup in the Export dialog box to open the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box.

To set JPEG-specific options, click More in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box, when exporting a JPEG.

•	Image Quality: Enter the percentage of quality to maintain when exporting as JPEG. Higher numbers create a better image with less compression. Lower numbers create rougher images with more compression.

•	Progressive JPEG: Check to save as a Progressive JPEG, a format that is optimized for transfer speed. It is ideal for use in creating web pages.


Targa
Targa (TGA)

Targa is a bitmap graphic format developed by Truevision, Inc., and is widely used in professional video editing.

Targa can support 16-bit, 24-bit, and 32-bit color and can contain an alpha channel.

FreeHand can import and export Targa images.

Targa export options

To set resolution and anti-aliasing when exporting, click Setup in the Export dialog box to open the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box.

To set Targa-specific options, click More in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box, when exporting a Targa image.

Color depth and compression

•	8-bit: Check to export Targa images in 256 colors.

•	16-bit: Check to export Targa images in thousands of colors.

•	24-bit: Check to export Targa images in over 16 million colors.

•	32-bit w/alpha: Check to export Targa images in over 16 million colors, and include an alpha channel.

•	Compression: Check to compress Targa images upon export.


PNG
PNG (Portable Network Graphic)

Portable Network Graphic (PNG) is an extensible bitmap image format that features lossless, well compressed storage of bitmap images.

In most cases, PNGs behave in FreeHand exactly as TIFF images behave. Use the Links dialog box box to embed, extract, or change links to PNG files.

Because PNG is an extensible format, extra data may be appended to a PNG file by other applications. Since that data is specific to the application in which the PNG was created, FreeHand will ignore, but not delete, any such data.

Also, FreeHand can apply Photoshop plug-ins to PNG files. However, once a PNG image has been modified with a plug-in, it is converted to a TIFF and is embedded in the FreeHand document. After applying a plug-in to a PNG image, choose Edit > Links to extract the embedded image to an external TIFF file.

PNG can contain an alpha channel.

FreeHand can Import and Export PNG images.

PNG export options

To set resolution and anti-aliasing when exporting, click Setup in the Export dialog box to open the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box.

To set PNG-specific options, click More in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box, when exporting a PNG.

•	8-bit: Check to export PNG images in 256 colors.

•	16-bit: Check to export PNG images in thousands of colors.

•	24-bit: Check to export PNG images in over 16 million colors.

•	32-bit w/alpha: Check to export PNG images in over 16 million colors and include an alpha channel.

•	48- or 64-bit: Check to export PNG images in 48- or 64-bit color depth, yielding an image with an extremely high number of colors.

•	Interlaced PNG: Check to create an interlaced PNG. Interlaced PNG images redraw progressively on screen by drawing every other line of pixels and then filling the gaps.


Windows Bitmap (BMP)
BMP (Windows Bitmap)

BMP is the Windows standard format for bitmap graphics.

BMP is capable of supporting an alpha channel.

FreeHand can import and export BMP images.

BMP export options

To set resolution and anti-aliasing when exporting, click Setup in the Export dialog box to open the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box.

To set BMP-specific options, click More in the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box, when exporting a BMP.

•	8-bit uncompressed: Check to export BMP images in 256 colors without any compression.

•	8-bit compressed: Check to export BMP images in 256 colors and compress the BMP on export.

•	16-bit: Check to export BMP images in thousands of colors.

•	24-bit: Check to export BMP images in over 16 million colors.

•	32-bit w/alpha: Check to export BMP images in over 16 million colors and include an alpha channel.


Autocad DXF
DXF (Document Exchange Format)

DXF is a 2 dimensional vector graphic file exchange format used to transfer files between 3D editing applications, or between 3D editing applications and vector drawing applications.

Most 3D editing applications, including Macromedia’s Extreme 3D, support DXF format.

FreeHand can Import DXF images.


PDF
PDF (Portable Document Format)

Adobe PDF is a format designed to convert documents from any computer platform for viewing or printing on any other platform using Acrobat Exchange and Acrobat reader.

FreeHand can import and export PDF documents.

  Related Topics


EMF (Enhanced Metafile)

The Enhanced Metafile (EMF) format is an updated version of the Windows Metafile (WMF) format. EMF offers significant improvement over WMF, including support for strokes and fills and a description field. Use the EMF format to preserve strokes and fills in an exported FreeHand document.

EMF export options

Include FreeHand document: Check to include the native FreeHand document in the exported file.

Convert type to paths: Check to convert all text to paths on export.

Description: Use text entry field to attach comments to the exported file.


Adobe Illustrator (AI)

Open Adobe Illustrator 1.1 through 7.0 files directly in FreeHand.

FreeHand can export Adobe Illustrator 7.0 files.


Adobe Photoshop
Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

FreeHand takes advantage of Photoshop 4's ability to rasterize any EPS file instead of just Illustrator EPS files, which helps maintain color fidelity between Photoshop and FreeHand.

Exporting objects with RGB colors to Photoshop 4.0

When exporting an object with RGB colors, export it as a Photoshop 4 RGB EPS. This format best preserves color information when opened and rasterized in Photoshop 4. If the object contains any CMYK colors, they are converted to RGB on export. xRes 3 can also use Photoshop 4 RGB EPS.

Note	Photoshop 4 RGB EPS files contain RGB colors only, and they are best suited for screen-based media. Printing four-color separations of a Photoshop 4 RGB EPS separates all colors onto the cyan, magenta, and yellow plates only.

Exporting objects with CMYK colors to Photoshop

When exporting an object with CMYK colors to Photoshop 4.0, export as a Macintosh EPS (Macintosh) or EPS with TIFF preview (Windows).

When exporting an object with CMYK colors to Photoshop 3.x, export as a Photoshop EPS.

Preparing to copy and paste

Export RGB-colored objects to Photoshop 4.0 from FreeHand using copy and paste. RGB color values are preserved when transferring objects in this manner. For best results, set the preference to RGB as

follows. A Yes setting converts colors to RGB; a No setting converts colors to CMYK.

1	Quit FreeHand.

2	Open the FHprefs.txt preferences file, located in Program Files\Macromedia\FH7, in Notepad or another text editor.

3	Find the Photoshop4RGBPaste preference.

4	Change the Photoshop4RGBPaste preference from No to Yes.

5	Save the file.


CorelDRAW
CorelDRAW (CDR)

FreeHand can import CorelDRAW files.

Due to incompatibilities between the CorelDRAW and FreeHand file formats, not all components in the CorelDRAW illustration are retained when the document is imported into FreeHand.

Guidelines for success

When creating CorelDRAW documents for import into FreeHand, keep the following in mind:

•	FreeHand 8 Mac and Windows will only open CorelDRAW 7 Windows files. To open CorelDRAW 8 files, first save them in CorelDRAW 7 format.

•	FreeHand cannot import compressed CorelDRAW documents. If graphics compression is enabled, FreeHand reports “could not read compressed objects” and import opens blank document. If only bitmap compression is enabled, bitmaps import as empty containers and vector objects are unaffected.

•	Using FreeHand for Macintosh to open CorelDRAW files located on a Novell file server results in very slow performance. For optimal results first copy the files to a local volume.

•	When opening CorelDRAW files using FreeHand for the Macintosh, the CorelDRAW files must have names containing fewer than 32 characters and must have Corel’s CDR suffix.

•	CorelDRAW clipart is stored in a proprietary format (CDRX) and will not translate when imported. To open CDRX files, first save them in CorelDRAW 7 format.

Strokes

All unsupported CorelDRAW strokes are converted to 100% black strokes upon import.

The following inconsistencies occur when converting stroked CorelDRAW paths:

•	Strokes with the “scaled with object” attribute set sometimes lose their scaling.

•	Arrowheads are not retained.

•	Calligraphic stroke characteristics are not retained.

•	Path direction is sometimes reversed.

In addition, CorelDRAW’s dashed line definition supports five on-off fields while FreeHand supports only four. The fifth dashed line field is ignored upon import.

Fills

All unsupported fills become 10% gray on import.

The following inconsistencies occur when converting filled CorelDRAW paths:

•	Colored patterned fills are not retained.

•	PostScript fills are not retained.

•	Pattern fills are not retained.

•	Texture and bitmap fills are not retained.

The following anomalies occur when importing objects with graduated or fountain fills:

•	Graduated fills are limited to 32 colors and the edge pad is simulated.

•	Clockwise and counterclockwise color sweeps are replaced with straight-line color transformations.

•	Non-50% midpoints are approximated.

•	Radial fills are substituted for conical and square fountain fills.

Color handling

Corel and FreeHand’s supported color spaces are not identical. As a result, bitmaps in a color space other than RGB and CMYK are imported as x-boxes. Similarly, vector components defined in color space other than RGB and CMYK are converted to 10% gray.

The following inconsistencies occur when translating color data from CorelDRAW and FreeHand:

•	Non-Pantone spot colors (Spectramaster, for example) are converted to 10% gray.

•	Previews of imported documents with Hexachrome colors do not include the orange and green components. However, these documents separate correctly as Hexachrome color separations. In composite images or when separated as RGB or CMYK separations, Hexachrome colors reproduce as 100% black.

•	On-screen color shifting may occur due to subtle differences in the applications’ Color Management systems.

Text

Overall, subtle differences in word wrap, justification, and kerning introduce slight visual differences when importing text from CorelDRAW.

The following inconsistencies occur when converting CorelDRAW text:

•	Multiple-width columns within a single text block are converted to fixed column width.

•	Custom tab settings are lost.

The Tab characters are retained; however, CorelDRAW’s custom Tab settings revert to FreeHand’s default settings when the document is imported.

•	Vertical text has slight inconsistencies in spacing and alignment. For best results, adjust using a percentage of point size instead of a percentage of character height.

•	For custom text wrapping to render properly on screen after import, objects within a text container must be manipulated in some way in order to force the screen to redraw.

•	Vertical text justification is lost.

•	Text bullets may shift position.

•	Drop caps may shift position.

•	Text defined in CorelDRAW as All Caps and Small Caps is imported as normal text.

•	A single text container or series of linked text containers can contain a maximum of 32,000 characters.

•	Text created with CorelDRAW 7J is ignored.

•	Non-uniform-filled text is converted to 100% overprinting black fill.

•	Artistic text upon which the Envelope effect has been applied converts to normal text.

•	Rotated characters within a text block convert to normal text.

•	Text pasted within a compound path flows into a separate text container.

•	Text that has been attached to a path and then removed from the path in CorelDRAW may lose some of its text formatting.

•	Text attached to a closed path may lose its horizontal placement setting.

Importing Images

Bitmaps

Because FreeHand and CorelDRAW support different color spaces, CorelDRAW bitmaps in the LAB color space import as an empty text container.

To accommodate cropping, bitmaps are defined by CorelDRAW as paste insides. These paste inside attributes are retained on import.

Note	CorelDRAW’s color masks are lost.

EPS

CorelDRAW’s EPS images will not import, only the TIFF headers will translate. EPS images without TIFF headers will appear as gray boxes containing the EPS’ file names.

OLE

CorelDRAW’s OLE client objects are ignored on import.

Pagination

Paging model

Differences in the pasteboard design and paging model introduce the following anomalies when importing CorelDRAW illustrations:

•	u	Objects on the CorelDRAW pasteboard are not imported.

•	u	Custom CorelDRAW imposition is not retained.

•	An example of this would be a booklet generated by CorelDRAW.

•	u	Objects placed on facing pages are sometimes displaced.

•	u	Because CorelDRAW’s master pages have no counterpart in FreeHand, master page objects are duplicated on every FreeHand page.

Units of measurement

Due to calculation differences, object dimensions can reflect a rounding error.

Guides

FreeHand does not support CorelDRAW’s ruler guides. These guides are therefore lost on import.

CorelDRAW’s guides layer can contain objects that FreeeHand’s guides layer cannot. On import, a background layer called “Corel Guides” containing all objects from the CorelDRAW guides layer is created.

Layering

FreeHand does not support CorelDRAW’s page-specific layering data. As a result, layers are set on import to match first page.

All layers open in Preview mode.

Custom effects

Lenses

FreeHand does not support Fisheye, Wireframe, Color Add, Color Limit, Heat Map and Custom Color Map lenses.

Note	Unsupported lens effects import as “null lenses,” that is, lenses with 0% lighten attribute.

Blends and Extrudes

For optimal effect translation, check the box “Save blends and extrudes with the file”. This causes FreeHand to read these intermediate steps and save them as a group of static objects.

When extruding, basic objects are preserved; however, shading data is lost.

Perspective

Perspective data is ignored; objects may be displaced on the page, depending on the specific perspective in effect

Envelopes

Envelope data is ignored; objects may be displaced on the page, depending on the specific envelope in effect.


Color Models (definition)
color models

The red, green, and blue (RGB) and hue, lightness, and saturation (HLS) models are based on the properties of transmitted light.

The cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK) model is based on pigments, such as those used in commercial printing.


Process Color (definition)
process color

A method of printing where four colors of ink (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) are used to print tiny dots that collectively make a color in your illustration.

All process colors are created by overlaying tints of various percentages of the four process color inks. Hexachrome uses orange and green process colors in addition to the CMYK used in traditional four-color processing.


Spot Color (definition)
spot color

When printed, uses a separate ink. Spot color inks can be custom-mixed or specified from a color-matching system.


Subtractive method (definition)
subtractive method

The subtractive method used by the CMYK color model means that you create white by subtracting or removing color. Combining all colors at 0% value creates white, and combining all colors at 100% value creates black. Colors created by reflected light use the subtractive method.


Additive Method (definition)
additive method

The additive method used by the RGB color model means that you create white by adding or combining color. Combining all colors at 100% value creates white, and combining all colors at 0% value creates black. Colors created by transmitted light use the additive method.


The Position of Color (definition)
position of color

Hue is determined by the position in degrees a color occupies on the color wheel. You can enter precise values for specific colors or drag the dial around the edge of the color wheel to create other colors.

Enter this degree:	To get this color:
0	red
60	yellow
120	green
180	cyan
240	blue
300	magenta


Percentage of Lightness (definition)
percentage of lightness

Lightness is determined by the percentage of blackness or whiteness in a hue. Moving the slider changes the lightness value for all hues on the color wheel.

Enter a %, or	Drag the slider:	To get this result:
Less than 50	Down	Increase blackness
Greater than 50	Up	Increase whiteness


Percentage of Saturation (definition)
percentage of saturation

Saturation is determined by the percentage (intensity) of color present. Dragging the dial in or out changes the saturation value for all hues on the color wheel.

Enter a %,or	Drag the dial:	To get this result:
Less than 50	Toward the center	Decrease intensity
Greater than 50	Toward the edge	Increase intensity


Font (definition)
font

A complete set of characters for one typeface, such as Helvetica, including uppercase and lowercase characters, numbers, and punctuation marks.


Point Size (definition)
point size

The height of the type body. A standard type measurement system was originally developed by the Parisian type founder Pierre Fournier le jeune in 1737. In the days of metal type, the point size was the total number of points in the height of metal type, including the ascent and descent of the letters, and the metal above and below the letters.


Stacking Order (definition)
stacking order

The order in which objects lie on top of one another within the same layer. Objects created within a single layer are stacked in the order they were created with the last object drawn on top.


Modifying an Object (definition)
modifying an object

Modifying an object means to change it by editing, moving, resizing, or adding colors, lines, or fills.


Transform (definition)
transform

To move, rotate, scale, skew, or reflect a selected object.


Point (definition)
point (or path point)

The location on a path which determines the shape and direction of the path segments extending from that location.


Point (definition)
point (unit of measurement))

In modern desktop publishing, one point is defined to be equal to 1/72 of an inch. The traditional point measurement was slightly more or less than 72 points to the inch, depending upon the typesetting measurement system.


Nested Objects (definition)
nested object

A nested object is a single object, for example a square, that is part of a group of objects. FreeHand lets you select a nested object within a group without selecting the whole group.


Path (definition)
path

An editable line segment connecting two or more path points.


Open Path (definition)
open path

Consists of two or more line segments with endpoints that do not touch.


Closed Path (definition)
closed path

A path consisting of two or more points where the first and last points are the same.


Composite Path (definition)
composite path

A composite path consists of two or more discontinuous closed paths, that are treated as a single path. An effect applied to a composite path, such as a Gradient fill, appears as if the composite path was continuous. If two overlapping paths are joined as a composite path, the result appears as a shape with a hole.


Subpath (definition)
subpath

A closed path that is part of a composite path.


Text Block (definition)
text block

The rectangular container into which text is typed.


Insertion Point (definition)
insertion point

The spot where the flashing cursor appears inside the text block. Typed characters appear at the flashing cursor.


Overflowed Text Block (definition)
overflowed text block

Text blocks appear overflowed when you type more text than they can contain at present size. When a text block is overflowed the flow status box in the lower, right corner contains a black circle.


Group (definition)
group

Two or more objects frozen in relation to each other. Groups rotate, reflect, scale, skew, and move as a unit.


Fill (definition)
fill

The color, tint, or pattern applied to the area within a closed path or text character.


Stroke (definition)
stroke

The color, tint, or pattern applied to the outline of a path or text character. Applying a stroke makes a path outline visible.


Registration Marks (definition)
registration mark

Marks that print outside the image area of a document and are used as guides for aligning each color when printing process separations.


Style (definition)
style

A set of object attributes such as color, fill, stroke, and halftone screens or paragraph attributes such as font, style, space before and after, indents and tabs, and alignment.

You can define, name, and save a style. Styles save you time and help you achieve design consistency by letting you apply or edit a set of graphic or text attributes to many objects in one quick step.


Tile (definition)
tile

An object created using shapes, open or closed paths, composite paths, or text as the basis of a Tiled fill. The tile is repeated across the selected object.


PostScript (definition)
PostScript

A device-independent, page-description language developed by Adobe Systems, Inc. Page layout programs like FreeHand use PostScript to create complex pages, text, and graphics on screen. This language is then sent to the printer to produce high-quality printed text and graphics.


Resolution (definition)
resolution

Refers to the precision of dots available to represent graphic detail in a given area, usually expressed in dots per inch (dpi). On a computer screen, resolution refers to the number of pixels in a linear inch (ppi). On a printer it refers to the number of dots printed in a linear inch (dpi) or the screen ruling used to print the image (lpi). On a scanner it refers to the number of samples saved per linear inch of scanned art (spi).


Color Separations (definition)
color separations

Prepare multi-color artwork for printing by dividing it into individual overlays, or separations, one for each component color. For traditional process color, four separations are printed, one each for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. For Hexachrome, six separations are printed, one each for cyan, magenta, yellow, black, orange, and green. For spot colors, one separation is printed for each color used in the illustration.


Overprint (definition)
overprint

When printing separations, an option where overlapping colors are printed in their entirety instead of knocking out. Overprinting eliminates the possibility of color gaps between objects, but can result in unacceptable color shifts. Overprinting can be used to add the appearance of a third spot color to a document.


Knockout (definition)
knockout

An option for printing separations where portions of color underneath other colors are not printed where foreground objects overlap them. Knockouts preserve the integrity of the colors you specify, but can result in unacceptable gaps between colors.


Active Illustration (definition)
active document

Since you can have more than one document open at a time, the active document is the one in which you are currently working.


Document Format (definition)
document format

Saves the file as a document. Use this option when the file does not contain default settings, artwork, colors, or styles you want to use as starting points for other illustrations.


Template Format (definition)
template format

Saves the file as a template that you can use as a starting point for other illustrations. Opening a template opens an untitled copy of the template containing its settings and objects and saves the original template for future use.


PICT Image (definition)
PICT

A Macintosh graphics file format that can contain either bitmapped graphics, vector graphics, or both.


TIFF Image (definition)
TIFF

An acronym for Tagged Image File Format, a file format for bitmap or vector graphics. The TIFF format supports a variety of image types, including monochrome, grayscale, and RGB and CMYK color images. Vector graphics are usually stored in PICT or EPS format.


Pixel (definition)
pixel

Acronym for picture element, a pixel is one dot of a screen image—the smallest picture sample that can be sensed, manipulated, or produced. There are usually 72 (Macintosh) or 96 (Windows) pixels in an inch. Graphics are created by turning pixels on or off.


Greeked Type (definition)
greeked type

Text that is displayed as gray lines when the point size of the text at the current magnification is smaller than the point size you enter in the Greek type below option in the Text preferences.

Greeked type is displayed on-screen by gray lines in place of the text characters. Greeked type accelerates on-screen redraw time. Text characters will print normally.


RAM (definition)
RAM (Random Access Memory)

Internal memory used by your computer to run programs and do tasks. The information in RAM is erased when a computer is turned off.


Unit of measurement (definition)
unit of measurement

The measuring unit specified for a document—points, picas, inches, decimal inches, or millimeters.

The document unit of measurement affects working units on the ruler and grid, as well as values you enter to edit your illustration. Change the document unit of measurement in the [image] pop-up on the document window.


Vector PICT Image (definition)
vector PICT image

A PICT file containing only vector graphics.


Bitmap PICT Image (definition)
bitmap PICT image

A PICT file that contains only bitmap images.


ASCII Format (definition)
ASCII format

A text file format containing letters, digits, and symbols from the ASCII character set.


Binary Format (definition)
binary format

A file format that is machine-readable.


Flatness (definition)
flatness

The number of line segments the PostScript language uses to print a curved path. High flatness values result in visibly flattened curves depending on the output device resolution.


Rich Text Format (definition)
RTF (Rich Text Format)

A text file format used for transferring formatted text documents between programs, even those running on different platforms.


EPS (definition)
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)

A graphic file format that contains all of the PostScript code needed to print all objects in the file. An EPS may also contain a screen preview (for display purposes only.)


Filters (definition)
filters

Allow you to import and export a variety of file formats.


Ungroup (definition)
ungroup

To convert grouped objects into individual objects or a rectangle or ellipse into a freeform path.


Undo (definition)
undo

A command in the Edit menu that reverses your last action. Set the number of undos in the Preferences dialog box.


Clipboard (definition)
Clipboard

A temporary storage location that is part of your computer system and handles objects transferred when you Cut, Copy, or Paste. The Clipboard stores the most recent object you Cut or Copy, replacing any contents previously contained on the Clipboard.


Power Duplicate (definition)
power duplicate

Quickly creating copies of an object while progressively repeating a sequence of transformations. For example,  you can clone, scale, and rotate an object, and then simultaneously repeat those steps several times to create a progression of cloned, scaled, and rotated objects.

For instructions on power duplicating, click here.


Vector Graphic (definition)
vector graphic

A graphic consisting of mathematically described objects which usually appear as outlines with control points.


Tint (definition)
tint

A lighter shade of a spot or process color, usually expressed as a percentage. Also known as screen.


Bitmap Image (definition)
bitmap image

An image, such as a GIF, LRG, TIFF, or JPEG consisting of a pattern of monochrome or color pixels which create a picture.


Guides (definition)
guides

Non-printing objects used to align objects on a page.


Snap Distance (definition)
snap distance

The distance within which an object will be pulled or snapped into alignment with a point, guide, grid, or center point of a basic shape.


Books about PostScript (definition)

•	Learning PostScript: A Visual Approach by Ross Smith (Peachpit Press, Inc., 1990).

•	PostScript Language Tutorial and Cookbook by Adobe Systems Incorporated (Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., 1986).

•	PostScript Language Program Design by Adobe Systems Incorporated (Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., 1988).

•	PostScript Language Reference Manual by Adobe Systems Incorporated (Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., 1986).

•	Real World PostScript by Stephen F. Roth (Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., 1988).


Preview Mode (definition)
preview mode

A view option that displays your illustration as it will be printed, complete with line weights and fills. Certain PostScript strokes and fills cannot be previewed. Preview is the opposite of Keyline mode.


Keyline Mode (definition)
keyline mode

A view option displaying outlines of objects without their stroke or fill attributes, for simplified viewing and faster screen redraw. Keyline is the opposite of Preview mode.


Left-Justified Text (definition)
left-justified text

Type that is aligned with its left margin. Left-justified text is also called flush left.


Right-Justified Text (definition)
right-justified text

Type aligned with its right margin. Right-justified text is also known as flush right.


Center-Justified Text (definition)
center-justified text

A paragraph within which lines of text center between the left and right indents.


Fully Justified Text (definition)
justified text

Text that lines up at both the left and right margins of a text block or column. Justified text is also known as fully justified.


Text Effects (definition)
text effects

Custom effects that modify the appearance of text without converting the text to a graphic.


Dithering (definition)
dithering

Simulation of a color by grouping pixels of other colors. The human eye sees the grouped pixels as a mixed color. Dithering is useful when not enough colors are available on the monitor to exactly match a color in an illustration.


OPI (definition)
OPI (Open Prepress Interface)

A standard set of PostScript-language comments which communicate placement, size, and cropping information to high-end prepress systems, minimizing stripping and rework costs.


Portrait (definition)
portrait orientation

A document that is taller than wide.


Landscape (definition)
landscape orientation

A document that is wider than tall.


Windows Bitmap (definition)
BMP (Windows Bitmap)

A file format for Microsoft Windows that contains only bitmapped graphics (graphics that consist of a pattern of dots which create a picture).


Objects (definition)
object

Any path, text block, or imported graphic in a document.


Mask (definition)
mask

An opaque image used to block the view in one area, but with holes allowing the image to be viewed in other areas.

An object is masked when part of the object is hidden because it is pasted inside a path that is smaller than the object.


Zero Point (definition)
zero point

The reference point for ruler measurements.

Each page in your document has its own zero point.


Layer (definition)
layer

A transparent plane or overlay that helps organize objects and controls how they stack upon each other in an illustration. An illustration can contain any number of printing (foreground) and nonprinting (background) layers.


Calligraphy (definition)
calligraphy

A style of handwriting using a flat-tipped pen resulting in a stroke weight or width that varies with the direction of the line.


Subscriber (definition)
subscriber

An edition file as it appears in a document after being imported or subscribed to.

(Macintosh only)


Publish and Subscribe (definition)
publish and subscribe

A method by which multiple instances of an imported object are updated when you change the file that created the object. Publish and subscribe also supports opening an imported object in the program that created it, directly from a document into which it has been imported.

(Macintosh only)


Edition (definition)
edition

A file containing text or graphics published or exported by a program.

(Macintosh only)


Publisher (definition)
publisher

The text or graphics you export to an edition file. In FreeHand, a publisher is a page you export to an edition file.

(Macintosh only)


Curve Handle (definition)
point handle

A handle attached to a selected point. Use handles to change the shape of the path segment extending from a point.


Handle (definition)
handle

A set of small black squares appearing around a rectangle, ellipse, group, composite path, imported object, or text block.


Curve Point (definition)
curve point

A kind of point that ensures that the path segments extending from it form a curve. When selected in FreeHand, it appears as a circle.


Corner Point (definition)
corner point

A kind of point at which the path segments extending from it form a corner. When selected in FreeHand, it appears as a square.


Connector Point (definition)
connector point

A kind of point that ensures a smooth transition from a curved path segment to a straight line segment. When selected in FreeHand, it appears as a triangle.


Automatic Curvature (definition)
automatic curvature

The default position of curve handles for a point, based on the kind of point and the position of the preceding and following points.


Fixed Point (definition)
fixed point

The location used as a reference for transforming an object. The fixed point acts as the center point of a transformation.

•	To set a fixed point as you open the Transform panel, choose a transform tool from the tool panel and click on the desired location of the fixed point while pressing Alt.

•	Set a fixed point while the Transform panel is open by entering coordinates in the Center entry field, or by clicking on the desired spot with any of the transformation tools.


Reflection Axis (definition)
reflection axis

The line across which you reflect or flip an object.


Acute, Obtuse (definition)
acute

An angle less than 90 degrees.

obtuse

An angle greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees.


Tab Ruler (definition)
tab ruler

A ruler containing tab and indent controls.


First Line Indent (definition)
first line indent

A type of paragraph formatting in which the first line of a paragraph is indented from the left margin, but the rest of the lines are not indented.


Hanging Indent (definition)
hanging indent

A type of paragraph formatting in which the first line of a paragraph is not indented from the left margin, but the rest of the lines are indented, for example, to simulate setting a subhead in the left margin.


File Format (definition)
file format

The specific format in which a file is saved.

Use other file types when you work with a program that does not export or import a FreeHand file.


Split (definition)
split

To break apart paths created with the Join command.


Extensis Portfolio (definition)
Extensis Portfolio

A program that can catalog thousands of art, photographic, movie, and sound items in a database and provides instant visual access to the cataloged items.


OLE (definition)
OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

A standard for exchanging data between programs. OLE includes the ability to edit an object in the program that created it directly from the importing program, and automatically update imported objects when the original object is modified.


OLE Client (definition)
OLE client

A program capable of importing and updating an OLE object from an OLE server program.


OLE Server (definition)
OLE server

A program capable of creating and updating an OLE object to import into an OLE client program.


OLE Linking (definition)
OLE linking

A method of importing and updating an object. OLE linking creates an active link between an imported object and the original file from which it was imported. This linking allows one or more imported objects to be updated automatically when the original file is modified.


OLE Embedding (definition)
OLE embedding

A method of creating and updating an object. OLE embedding creates an active link between an imported object and the original program from which it was imported. It also lets you edit and update an imported object by opening it directly in the program that created it.


Wrapping Tab (definition)
wrapping tab

A tab flowing multiple lines of text between two tab markers. Set two wrapping tabs to create a gutter between two columns of wrapped text.


Bezier Curve (definition)
Bezier curve

A method of creating shapes based on the mathematical methods for defining curves pioneered by Pierre Bezier, noted French engineer, scientist, and academic teacher. The Bezier curve is defined by four points: two end points and two curve handles. Control the shape of the curve by manipulating the curve handles.


Halftone (definition)
halftone

A technique of representing continuous-tone art with a pattern of dots varying in size and angle of placement. The pattern is called a halftone screen.

In photographic halftoning, each dot in the halftone screen is called a halftone dot. In digital halftoning, dots in the halftone screen are combined into halftone cells.

Black-and-white art is printed using black halftone dots, but color can also be reproduced. Spot color is created by applying a colored ink to a halftone screen. Process color is created by overlaying four halftone screens (one each for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks) at different halftone screen angles.


Skew (definition)
skew

To distort an object by slanting it horizontally, vertically, or both.


CMYK Color (definition)
CMYK color

The four colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) used in traditional process printing.


Clipping Path (definition)
clipping path

A closed path used to partially mask objects it contains.

In FreeHand, this is done by using a paste inside.


Rasterization (definition)
rasterize

To convert vector graphics to bitmap images. In FreeHand, vector graphics are rasterized when exported as one of the MIX file formats: LRG, TIFF, GIF, BMP, PNG, TGA, and JPEG.


Path Guide (definition)
path guide

A custom-shaped guide created by drawing a shape and moving it to the Guides layer.


Ragged Width (definition)
ragged width

Specifies the minimum distance non-justified text spreads over a column as a percentage of column width.

Setting a ragged width value

Ragged width value is entered in the Text Inspector and its value is a percentage of the column width. For example, entering a value of 80 means that a line of non-justified text must fill at least 80% of the column’s width, otherwise FreeHand will adjust word and letter spacing to stretch a line to fill 80%.


crop mark

Indicates where to trim pages of a printed publication. Will appear when printing and only if your paper size is larger than the page size of the document.


Flush Zone (definition)
flush zone

Specifies the justification of the last line of a paragraph as a percentage of a column’s width.

Setting a flush zone

If a paragraph of text is justified and the flush zone percent is 75 then the last line of that paragraph will only justify if its length meets or exceeds 75% of the column’s width. To force the last line of a paragraph to justify no matter how short it is, set the flush zone percent to 0 (zero).


Leading (definition)
leading

Pronounced “ledding,” this is the space measured in points between rows of text from baseline to baseline. For example, 12 on 12 means there is no additional leading, and 12 on 13 is 12 point type with one additional point of leading. The term leading is taken from the days when thin strips of lead were placed between lines of type to space them apart.


Anti-aliasing (definition)
anti-aliasing

Removes the jagged edge effect that occurs when object edges are rendered as pixels by blending the object’s color with what is behind it. Anti-aliasing also refers to altering texture maps to prevent moirŽ patterns.


Auto-expanding (definition)
auto-expanding

A text block that expands either horizontally, vertically, or both, as you enter text.

See Working with Text blocks for more information.


Aspect ratio (definition)
aspect ratio

The ratio of height to width of an image.


Baseline (definition)
baseline

The imaginary horizontal line on which all letters in a font rest. In FreeHand, leading is measured from baseline to baseline.


Bleed (definition)
bleed

Defines how much of an object extending off the document page will print. Bleeds ensure that ink coverage extends to the edge of the paper when the printed paper is trimmed during the finishing process.


Bounding box (definition)
bounding box

The invisible, non-printing, rectangular border around a selected object.


Cap (definition)
cap

Controls the shape of the end of a stroke. A Butt cap is flush with the end of the path. Round and Square caps extend beyond the end of the path by one-half the stroke width.


Contents (definition)
contents

Objects pasted inside a clipping path.


Corner Radius (definition)
corner radius

Determines the curve at the corners of a rectangle.


Counter (definition)
counter

The enclosed space within such letters as “c,” “e,” “g,” “s,” and “H.”


Crop (definition)
crop

Removes portions of selected, closed paths outside the area of the topmost, closed path. Stroke and fill attributes remain unchanged.


dpi (definition)
dpi (dots per inch)

The measure of resolution for a video monitor or printer. High-resolution printers are usually at least 1000 dpi. Laser printers typically have a resolution of 300+ dpi. Monitor resolution is usually 72 dpi (Macintosh) or 96 dpi (Windows).


Drop cap (definition)
drop cap

An oversized capital letter used at the start of a paragraph. Drop caps occupy two or more lines of body copy.


Em (definition)
em

A unit of measurement which is the square of a typeface’s point size. Traditionally, an em is the width of a face’s widest letter, the capital letter M. For instance, if the M is 10 points wide, an em is equal to 10 points.


Em dash (definition)
em dash

A dash that is one em wide. An em dash usually indicates missing material or a break in thought.


em space (definition)
em space

A space equal to the width of a typeface’s point size. Often used for paragraph indentions. Traditionally, the em space was created in typesetting by non-printing blocks of metal used to add space between words.


En (definition)
en

A unit of measurement equal to half of a typeface’s point size. Traditionally, an en was half the width of an em.


En dash (definition)
en dash

A dash that is one en wide. Usually indicates duration, to, or through such as, refer to pages 4–9. It may also be used in compound adjectives as in Post–World War II.


En space (definition)
en space

A space equal to half an em space.


Even / odd fill (definition)
even / odd fill

A method of filling where segments of a joined object, or a closed path that crosses over itself, are alternately filled and left empty so you can see objects behind the unfilled areas. A lattice is an example of a use for even/odd fill.


Hexachrome (definition)
Hexachrome

An extension of the traditional four-color process, Hexachrome is PANTONE’s version of high-fidelity color. Hexachrome adds orange and green process colors to traditional CMYK, producing CMYKOG.


High fidelity color (definition)
high-fidelity color

A color model designed to reproduce the visible color spectrum more accurately than traditional CMYK. See Hexachrome.


Initial cap (definition)
initial cap

Large, capital letters which are found at the beginning of paragraphs or chapters. Often ornamental, initial caps date back to the early days of European manuscripts where they were—and still are—considered works of art. Before printing presses replaced hand-lettering, a few talented scribes drew the characters into spaces left in the manuscripts for that purpose.


Intersect (definition)
intersect

Creates a path enclosing the area common to all selected, closed paths. Stroke and fill attributes of the object farthest back are applied to the resulting path.


Join (definition)
join

The shape of the point when two path segments meet at a corner or connector point.


Kerning (definition)
kerning

The process of improving the appearance and legibility of text by adjusting the white space between certain paired characters, such as “Ty,” “To,” or “Wh,” which are known as kerning pairs.


Miter limit (definition)
miter limit

The ratio between the length of the miter join and the stroke width. This measurement sets the maximum length of a miter join before it automatically converts to a beveled join.


Misregistration (definition)
misregistration

Slight gaps between overlapping colors and moirŽ patterns in process colors. Trapping and overprinting are two techniques that help compensate for misregistration.

Misregistration occurs when paper stretches and shifts as it absorbs moisture and is pulled through a press. The colored plates on a multi-color job misalign, resulting in two problems as ink gets laid onto the paper.


Opacity (definition)
opacity

Determines how much of an object’s surface occludes those objects behind it.


MoirŽ pattern (definition)
moire pattern

The effect when a pattern of halftone dots or screen angles results in uneven color. Moire patterns do not appear on screen, but are the result of misaligned halftone screen angles or misregistration on press.


Path direction (definition)
path direction

The direction of a closed path is defined as either clockwise or counterclockwise. Path direction is determined when the second point is placed. Text attaches upside down to a counterclockwise path.


Pica (definition)
pica

A computer pica is equal to 12 points, one-sixth of an inch. 12 points = 1 pica, 6 picas = 1 inch, and 72 points = 1 inch.


Printer font (definition)
printer font

A font that can be downloaded to the printer, onto a hard disk, or in ROM that resides in the printer.


RGB (definition)
RGB

An acronym for red, green, and blue. It is the combination of red, green, and blue color values that create a given color. Each pixel has its own RGB value. When 32-bit color depth is selected, each pixel also has alpha channel, or opacity, information.


Rendering (definition)
rendering

The actual placement of rasterized pixels on the monitor’s display. Rendering, also called rasterization, refers both to graphic objects and type.


Rule (definition)
rule

A line used as a guide or the border around an object.


Screen font (definition)
screen font

Bitmap fonts used for computer screen display.


Screen ruling (definition)
screen ruling

The number of lines or rows of halftone dots printed per inch on the page, measured in lines per inch (lpi).


Spacing (definition)
spacing

The amount of unused space existing between words, letters, and lines in text. Spacing provides a means to avoid overlapping letters and text in order to improve readability.


Stochastic screening (definition)
stochastic screening

A method of printing using significantly smaller, more randomly placed dots than traditional halftone screening. Variations in color are achieved by varying the number, not the size of the dots. Also referred to as Frequency Modulated (FM) screening, stochastic screening creates the visual illusion of a higher resolution.


Thin space (definition)
thin space

A space equal to one-fifth of an en space.


Width (definition)
width

Specifies the thickness of a stroke. A value greater than zero applies a stroke straddling a path. A width of zero prints as the finest line an output device can print.


Winding fill (definition)
winding fill

Fills a path according to path direction. Where objects intersect, paths with the same direction will fill, but paths with opposite directions will cancel each other out—resulting in no fill.


Word spacing (definition)
word spacing

The amount of space between each word in a line of text. Vary it to adjust line length without affecting readability.


Print Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Printing

Troubleshooting Print Setup

1	Make sure all cables and connections are hooked up correctly.

See your printer manufacturer’s instructions.

2	Determine if your printer is PostScript-compatible. If your printer is PostScript-compatible, use the correct driver for your printer.

3	In Windows 95, go to START > Settings > Printers. If your printer has not been added then add your printer to the list of available printers.

Right-click the icon of your printer and choose properties. Set all the parameters according to your needs or your printer manufacturer’s specifications.

4	Choose File > Print in FreeHand and check all entry fields for your desired parameters.

5	Check all fields in the Print dialog box. Click Print when done.

If using a non-PostScript device, the contents of the Print dialog box change accordingly. PPD selection will not be available.

General Print Troubleshooting

1	Use a PPD (PostScript Printer Description).

PPDs are for PostScript printers only.

2	If your document outputs in the wrong direction or if only part of the page prints, check the page orientation in the Document Inspector and in the Print dialog box.

3	Fix corrupted files.

One source of for printing problems is a corrupted file. Try copying everything in your document into a new document. This creates a clean document structure. Then, try printing again.

4	Try another machine.

Test the same file on another machine to see if you get the same results.


Troubleshooting PostScript errors

You will encounter PostScript errors when the PostScript code sent to your printer contains errors or exceeds internal limits in the PostScript interpreter.

The most common PostScript errors fall into three general categories:

•	Complexity related errors

•	Communication related errors

•	Errors caused by bad PostScript code

Of the three, complexity related errors are the most common. The best way to prevent complexity related PostScript errors is to create documents that use complex elements sparingly.


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
To troubleshoot PostScript errors related to document complexity

How fonts affect printing


To troubleshoot PostScript errors related to document complexity:

•	When printing to an imagesetter, verify that the document prints correctly to a desktop printer. A document that fails to print at a low resolution often will not print to an imagesetter.

•	Print to a PostScript Level 2 output device. Many kinds of documents that are too complex for a Level 1 device will print on a Level 2 device.

•	Print at a lower resolution. Printing at a lower resolution requires less memory.

•	Enter a flatness value in the Output Options dialog box. Start with 3 and increase the number in small increments up to 10 or 12. The flatness value controls how smoothly curves print. Values greater than 10 may result in visibly flattened curves.

•	Print to a device with more memory.

•	If your document contains filled paths with many points or curves, check Split complex paths in the Output Options dialog box or the Imaging panel in the Print Setup dialog box. Split complex paths divides complex filled paths into smaller, more easily processed pieces as you print or export the document. It does not alter the saved document.

•	Do not use Split complex paths when printing to a Level 2 printer if you have pasted inside a complex path. The object will regenerate for each segment of the path, which could take a long time to print. For Level 1 printing, use Split complex paths.


How fonts affect printing

Choosing the type of font is the first step in making sure the type on your pages displays and prints correctly. For production work, it is critical to use either PostScript or TrueType fonts exclusively. If you are working with a prepress service provider or service bureau, ask for a recommendation on font formats before beginning.

Use a type manager to improve on-screen text display and font management. Adobe Type Manager (ATM) is the only type-management utility that supports all of the text effects available in FreeHand. ATM requires PostScript (Type 1) fonts, but does not require output to a PostScript printer.

Working with PostScript Fonts

Working with TrueType Fonts


Working with PostScript fonts

PostScript fonts are the best choice if your final output device is a PostScript printer or imagesetter, or if you want to export your document as an EPS file. All text effects and transformations are available for PostScript fonts.

PostScript fonts have three components:

•	The screen or bitmap font for a specific point size

•	The printer or outline font

•	The information used to compose the font. Also called font metrics, this information includes kerning and spacing data for the specific font.

On the Macintosh, a PostScript font is available when the screen font is properly installed in the system. The Macintosh does not require a separate font metrics file because font metric information is stored in the screen font.

Store PostScript screen and printer fonts in the Fonts folder within the System folder. If you are using System 7.1 or later, drag a font file to the System folder to store the file in the appropriate location within the system folder automatically. You can also use a font management utility such as Symantec Suitcase or Alsoft Master Juggler.

In Windows, a PostScript font is available if it is listed in the printer driver for the selected target printer, if the font metrics file name appears in the target printer’s section in the Win.ini file, or if the font is installed through a font management utility such as ATM.


Working with TrueType fonts

TrueType fonts are best used if your final output device is a low-resolution printer, especially a non-PostScript printer. TrueType fonts retain quality when scaled, but text effects and transformations may not display or print to a PostScript printer as well as a PostScript font would with ATM.

Bitmap fonts such as PCL (Windows) are often included with non-PostScript printers. PCL fonts generally provide a limited, non-scaleable set of sizes, cannot be transformed, and do not support special text effects.

An icon next to the font name indicates whether the font is a TrueType or a PostScript font. Absence of an icon indicates a system font or an unidentifiable font.

Avoid using TrueType fonts when you plan to print to a PostScript printer. If there are duplicate fonts in both TrueType and Type 1 format, conflicts are likely, and you may get different than expected results. Because identically named PostScript and TrueType fonts usually contain subtle design differences, a font name conflict can result in unexpected output, such as a different line length.

Unlike PostScript fonts, all the information needed to print or display any point size is included in a single TrueType font file.

TrueType fonts are installed through the program in the Fonts Control Panel and normally reside in the Windows System folder.


Printing faster

The best way to minimize the amount of time needed to print a document is to use efficient drawing techniques. Techniques that reduce print times can also contribute to smaller files, faster screen redraw, easier editing, and fewer PostScript errors. Efficient drawing techniques can be critical for complex illustrations, but will benefit even simple designs.

Drawing for faster printing

Each effect you add to your document requires time and memory to print. Printing time and memory requirements decrease when you:

•	Keep the file size as small as possible by avoiding unnecessary complexity.

•	Apply special effects conservatively—for example, do not use a multi-color radial fill 40 times.

•	Modify and crop imported graphics in their original application. For example, if you want to put an imported picture inside of a picture frame, crop the picture to the desired size in xRes or another image editing application before importing it.


Type Caption for New Topic Right Here
Guidelines for text

Guidelines for drawing

Guidelines for paper size

Guidelines for imported graphics


Printing faster: Guidelines for text

Text prints faster when you:

•	Use text on a path sparingly.

•	Limit the number of typefaces used in the document.

•	Use the Zoom effect sparingly—it prints slower than the other effects.

To reduce memory overhead and speed printing, FreeHand downloads to a PostScript printer only the fonts necessary to print the specified page range. FreeHand does not download fonts appearing only on the pasteboard.


Printing faster: Guidelines for drawing

In general, the fewer objects you draw, the faster your illustration prints.

To print paths faster:

•	Use the fewest points possible. Shape curves using point handles instead of adding more points.

•	Delete any object you cannot see in Preview mode. All objects drawn on printing foreground layers process when you print, even if they are hidden behind other objects.

•	Use straight paths instead of curved paths when possible. Curves require slightly more printer time and memory.

•	Use a basic fill when possible.

•	Use options from the Halftones panel sparingly.

•	Reduce the number of subpaths in a composite path.

•	Use a higher flatness value.

•	After you finish editing a path created using the Trace tool or the Freehand tool, choose Modify > Alter Path > Simplify, or choose Xtras > Cleanup. Simplify both clipping paths and contents.


Printing faster: Guidelines for paper size

When you print, the output device reserves memory to print on the entire paper size you specified, regardless of how much area your illustration actually covers. When you use a larger paper size than you need, you reduce the memory available for processing objects.


Printing faster: Guidelines for imported graphics

To minimize the printing time for imported graphics, keep the following in mind:

•	Bitmap images—Scale and crop EPSs, TIFFs, LRGs, and other bitmap images in xRes or another application before you place them. Your document will print much faster than if you scale and crop imported bitmap images within FreeHand.

•	Vector graphics—Select imported PICT or CGM graphics and choose Modify > Alter Path > Simplify, or choose Xtras > Cleanup.

Note	Windows networks do not support binary image data.


 Troubleshooting printing

Most printing problems affect a single file in a single program, although some problems can affect all files from all programs. When diagnosing a printing problem, first ask questions to isolate the nature of the problem and determine how much of your system is affected. You will save time if you troubleshoot only the parts of your system that are likely to cause the specific printing problem identified.

Determining how much of your system is affected by a printing problem

•	Does the document print at all?

°	If the document prints incorrectly, see “Troubleshooting output quality problems”.

•	Do other documents print correctly?

°	If other documents print, the problem is probably file-specific. See “Solving file-specific problems”.

°	If other documents also fail to print, the problem could be system-wide or unique to FreeHand.

•	Can you print from other programs?

°	If you can, the problem is probably unique to FreeHand. See “Solving file-specific problems”.

°	If you cannot print at all, see the next section, “General troubleshooting tips.”

In Windows, try printing from Notepad or Wordpad. If that fails, the printing problem is probably system-related.


General Print Troubleshooting tips

•	Is your printer plugged in and turned on?

•	Is your computer attached to your printer?

If you are on a network, verify that the printer is available among the installed printers. If necessary, confirm this by sending a document to the printer from another computer. Make sure all cables are secure.

•	Do you have the proper type of printer selected?

Confirm in the Printer Setup dialog box that print-specific files such as printer drivers or PPD files are installed in the correct location. Windows users should verify that the printer is set up correctly in Printers icon in the Control Panel.

•	Are you printing through a spooler?

If you are, try turning off the spooler and printing again.

To turn off the spooler in Windows NT 4 and Windows 95, click the Start button and choose Settings > Printers. Highlight the selected output device, choose File > Properties, and click Spool Settings on the Details panel. Click the Print directly to the printer option and click OK.

•	Can you print to a different printer?

If you have access to other printers, try printing to a different device. If the document prints, you may be encountering a hardware problem or exceeding the first printer’s capabilities. Restart the first printer and try again.


Solving file-specific printing problems

•	Turn the printer off for a few seconds, turn it back on, and then print again.

Sometimes a document will exhaust a printer’s memory. Restarting clears the printer’s memory and is often all it takes to get a document to print.

•	Copy all objects into a new document file and print the new file.

Sometimes there is nothing wrong with the objects in a document, but there is a problem with the document file containing the objects.

•	Move complex elements to a non-printing layer to isolate them.

If the document prints, it is likely that an object on a non-printing layer was causing the problem. Isolate and simplify the problematic object.

•	Print selected objects only to isolate them.

Repeat this process until you determine which object causes the printing problem.

•	Print the file to disk as a PostScript or PCL file.

Manually download the file to the printer using the Copy command to copy the file to a printer port.


Troubleshooting output quality problems

Problem	Troubleshooting techniques
An imported TIFF or other bitmap image prints incorrectly	The image may not have been correctly linked, for black-and-white images, an incorrect printer resolution setting may have caused a moirŽ pattern, or an incorrect halftone screen setting in the Halftones panel or in the Separations panel in the Print Setup dialog box may be preventing you from printing enough levels of gray to create a visually convincing halftone.
A font is substituted for a downloadable PostScript font	Confirm that the printer or outline font is in the correct location, test to see if the font in question downloads correctly either from a simple illustration or from another application, or verify that you are using the recommended version of the printer driver for your printer.
A font is substituted for a downloadable PostScript font	In Windows 95, FreeHand requires Adobe Type Manager to display and print Type 1 PostScript fonts.  Check ATM to verify that the font is set up to be temporarily downloaded. Windows NT has an internal font manager that manages Type 1 PostScript fonts and does not require ATM.
TrueType fonts print incorrectly	A PostScript font with the same name may be installed at the printer. When you print a document containing a TrueType font to a printer containing a PostScript font with the exact same name, the printer uses the PostScript version.  To avoid this problem, use the same version of the font on your computer that is installed at the printer. Another type manager may be substituting a font. Disable all other type managers. In Windows NT 3.51, uncheck Use Substitution Table and check Use Printer Fonts for all True Type fonts in the Advanced Options dialog box. To display the Advanced Options dialog box, select the target PostScript printer in the Printers Control Panel, click Setup, click options, and click Advanced. In Windows NT 4 and Windows 95, click the Start button and choose Settings > Printers. Highlight the selected output device, choose File > Properties, and click the Font tab to make choices for how to override Windows’ font substitution table.


Setting up smoother PostScript color transitions

A color transition created using a gradient fill or a blend will usually print smoothly on a high-resolution PostScript output device. However, some color transitions will print with visible color steps or bands (called banding). To achieve smooth color transitions, learn the variables that affect banding and specify print settings for your document that produce the smoothest transitions.

How Specifications affect printing

Designing to reduce banding

Other factors affecting banding

The smoothness formulas


How specifications affect banding

The information in this topic applies specifically to Adobe PostScript Level 1 halftones and may not address banding with non-Adobe halftone implementations.

A PostScript Level 1 device can produce 256 tints, depending upon its resolution. Banding is less likely to occur when printing to a PostScript Level 2 device because these devices can produce more than 256 tints.

The way a PostScript Level 1 output device builds digital halftone screens affects the smoothness of your color transitions.


Designing to reduce banding

When printing graphics with color transitions to a Level 1 output device, balance your design goals with the following factors:

•	Printer resolution—A higher printer resolution produces more tints than a low resolution.

•	Screen ruling—A low screen ruling produces more tints than a high screen ruling.

•	Difference between colors—A large difference between the tint values of the two colors in a transition makes a smoother color transition. Because a wider range of available tints is used, each tint band is narrower.

•	Distance between colors—A short distance between two colors in a transition makes a smoother color transition by making each tint band narrower.


Other factors affecting banding

When printing	Keep in mind
Imported bitmap images	Shift-Alt-drag the corner handle of an imported bitmap image to automatically resize it in increments based upon your selected printer resolution.
To a PostScript Level 2 output device	Draw the transition as a blend and specify the appropriate number of steps indicated by the N=(P/R)2 smoothness formula.
A gradient fill	If you switch to a different device, the number of tints produced adjusts automatically.
A blend	If you switch to a different output device or change the printer resolution value, the number of tints in the blend will not change automatically. Before creating a blend, specify the resolution of your final output device, or specify blend steps in the Object Inspector. Use Find & Replace Graphics to automatically recalculate blends for different printer resolutions.
Spot-to-spot blends and spot-to-spot gradient fills	To print correctly using conventional halftone separation printing, appropriate halftone angles must be set for each spot color in the blend or gradient fill in the Separations panel in the Print Setup dialog box. If you overprint one spot color on top of another and have set the halftone angles incorrectly, undesirable moirŽ patterns will result.


Banding: The smoothness formula
The smoothness formulas

Use these formulas to determine the optimum values to minimize banding when printing color transitions.

Formula	Determines
N=(P/R)2	The number of tints the output device can produce.
T=NxZ	The actual number of tints available for your printing specifications.
S=D/T	The size of each tint band in a color transition.
Legend

N	Printer’s number of tints available
P	Printer resolution
R	Screen ruling
T	Actual number of tints available
Z	Percentage difference between colors expressed as a decimal value (for example, 5% = 0.05)
S	Size of each tint band
D	Distance covered between colors

For process colors, up to four inks describe the color at each end of a transition, and each ink has its own degree of banding. Calculate tint band size for the ink most visible—usually black or magenta. Narrower bands create smoother transitions. A size of 0.05 or less is required for high quality output. For less exacting output, tint bands of one to two points may be acceptable.

To smooth a color transition, increase the printer resolution and decrease screen ruling.


Contacting Technical Support

Before contacting technical support by phone, by fax, or online:

1	Please read everything relevant to the problem in the manual and in FreeHand Help. Check the indexes for references to related topics, where the information you need may be covered.

2	If something worked before but does not work now, think about what may have changed. Perhaps you installed new software, changed settings, or changed application preferences.

3	Try creating a new file and reproducing the problem there. If the problem does not occur in the new file, compare the new file with your old file to find and eliminate the differences.

4	If the problem causes a system error or page fault, use the system troubleshooting tips found in the users guide. For Macintosh, these tips are also found in TechNote #3500 (on Macromedia’s web site). In Windows, restart in Safe mode by pressing F8 when the Stating Windows line is displayed.

Note	You can solve many problems you encounter by following the five steps listed above.

5	Review the ReadMe documents that ship with your software. These documents communicate late-breaking information about FreeHand. You can find them in the application folder and on the installation CD-ROM.

If you have Internet access and still need help, try these resources to find solutions.

Searchable TechNotes

Each Macromedia product has a searchable TechNotes section on Macromedia’s web site. Details for conducting searches are included on this site. To search Macromedia TechNotes, aim your browser to:

www.macromedia.com/support/search/

Macromedia Designers and Developers Centers

Macromedia has product-specific Design and Developers Centers on its web site, where you can find the latest instructional material and technical information.

www.macromedia.com/support/freehand/

Web-based newsgroups

Macromedia newsgroups are open forums where Macromedia users can discuss technical issues and share helpful techniques. Veteran users of Macromedia products share their experience here. Also, Macromedia technical support personnel frequently join forum discussions to share their knowledge and monitor topics that are important to Macromedia users. To participate in Macromedia newsgroups, aim your browser to:

forums.macromedia.com

Before you post questions or information in these newsgroups, search Macromedia’s web site to see whether the information is already available. Looking in manuals and searching the web site typically yields answers to questions more quickly than posting questions in newsgroups. If you are unfamiliar with newsgroups, please read TechNote #3534. You can search for a Macromedia TechNote number by entering the numerals in the web site Search field.

List Servers

List servers are another online resource for answers to technical questions. FreeHand-L is a list server that is an Internet mailing list. As a subscriber, you can send and receive e-mails-or posts-to and from other subscribers. FreeHand-L is a third-party list server with which Macromedia is not affiliated.

To subscribe to this list server, send an e-mail to listserv@galileo.uafadm.alaska.edu. In the body of the e-mail type SUBSCRIBE FREEHAND-L.

If you still need help:

If you prepare in advance of making a call to a Macromedia support representative, he or she can help you more quickly, which saves you time and money. Use this checklist to prepare for a call to Macromedia technical support:

•	Define the problem before you call. Be able to repeat the steps that led to the problem and identify when and how the problem occurred. The support representative needs your help to understand the problem and help you solve it.

•	Turn on your computer and launch the application, if possible.

•	Do not call from a cellular phone while driving a car.

•	Do not use a throw-away calling card that is likely to expire before completing the call.

•	Get a pen or pencil and paper to write down instructions from technical support.

•	Gather this information before calling technical support:

°	Product name, version number, and serial number (or incident number or customer number)

°	Type of computer: such as Pentium, Cyrix, or PowerPC

°	For printing problems, the printer brand, model, and driver; the PPD in use; and any printer-generated error messages

°	Amount of installed memory (for Macintosh, amount of memory allocated to FreeHand)

°	Amount of free hard-disk space

°	Screen resolution (screen size in pixels, such as 1024 by 768)

°	Screen color depth (number of colors or bits, such as 256 colors or 8-bit color)

°	Graphics card manufacturer, model name, and driver version number.

°	List of external devices connected to your computer

°	Brief description of the problem or error and the specific text of any error messages

These steps will help the support representative pinpoint and solve your problem quickly.

Guide to the technical support phone system

To quickly reach the technical support representative best qualified to answer your questions, please refer to these tips for navigating the technical support phone system.

•	For the fastest response, enter a valid customer number, incident number, or numeric digits of the product serial number. Press the # key after entering either of these numbers. If entering a FreeHand 8 serial number, omit the first 4 letters, begin with 800, and omit all dashes. When you press #, your call is placed in line for the first available technical support representative.

If you are a registered user, your record automatically appears on the technical support representative’s computer screen when he or she answers your call.

If you entered your customer number and you have registered two or more Macromedia products, your call is forwarded to the Macromedia Product Menu.

•	If you do not have a valid customer number, incident number, or serial number, press 1 and then press the # key, or simply stay on the line for access to the Macromedia Product Menu.

Choose the product with which you need assistance:

#	Showcase CD	5	Extreme 3D
0	Flash, SmartSketch	6	SoundEdit 16, Deck II
1	Backstage	7	Fontographer
2	FreeHand	8	xRes, Matisse
3	Director, Shockwave	9	Action
4	Authorware, Pathware
When you select a product, you r call is placed in line for the first available technical support representative.

Debugging, designing, creating

Macromedia Technical Support can answer questions relating to specific product features. For help in debugging, designing, or creating your application, contact Macromedia Professional Consulting Services at 415-252-2245.

Technical support:

Inside the U.S. and Canada

Outside the U.S. and Canada

Contacting Macromedia


Contacting Macromedia

Technical Support

Sales

Call 800-288-4797.

Source & Center

Call 800-396-0129 or 415-252-7999.

Contact Source & Center for training, consulting services, purchasing Priority Access technical support, referrals for multimedia development, referrals to Macromedia Authorized Graphics / Imaging Centers (MAGIC) and to User Groups, and authorization programs for trainers, developers, and service bureaus.

Macromedia International User Conference

Call 415-252-7999.

Success Stories

pr@macromedia.com

fax 415-626-1502

World Wide Web

http://www.macromedia.com/


Technical Support in the U.S. and Canada
Technical support inside the United States and Canada

Debugging, designing, creating

Please note that technical support can answer installation, configuration, and general usage questions about the product. For help in debugging, designing, or creating your application, contact Macromedia Professional Consulting Services at 415-252-2000.

Online services

Information about Director is available in Macromedia's forums on CompuServe, America Online, Microsoft Network, and also at various sites on the Internet. For an up-to-date list of all of the resources available online, call MacroFacts, Macromedia's 24-hour fax information line and request document 3503. In the United States and Canada, call 800-449-3329. From elsewhere, call 415-863-4409.

•	CompuServe: To reach the Macromedia forum on CompuServe, use the command Go Macromedia. On CompuServe, we provide message areas for discussion of multimedia development and support of our products, as well as libraries that contain useful utilities and examples—including drivers, models, DLLs, and XCMDs.

•	America Online: In the United States, to reach the Macromedia forum on America Online, use the keyword Macromedia. On America Online, we provide message areas for discussion of multimedia development and support of our products, as well as libraries that contain useful utilities and examples—including drivers, models, DLLs, and XCMDs.

•	Microsoft Network: To reach the Macromedia forum on Microsoft Network, use the command Goto Macromedia. On Microsoft Network, we provide message areas for discussion of multimedia development and support of our products, as well as libraries that contain useful utilities and examples—including drivers, models, DLLs, and XCMDs.

MacroFacts

Macromedia's 24-hour fax information line, providing instant access to Macromedia's products and services. In the United States and Canada, call 800-449-3329. From elsewhere, call 415-863-4409.

Contacting Technical Support

Technical Support fax: 415-703-0924

Technical Support phone: 415-252-9080

Macromedia, Inc.

600 Townsend Street

San Francisco, CA  94103


Technical Support outside the U.S. and Canada
Technical support outside the United States and Canada

Online services

Information about Director is available in Macromedia's forums on CompuServe, Microsoft Network, and also at various sites on the Internet. For an up-to-date list of all of the resources available online, call MacroFacts, Macromedia's 24-hour fax information line and request document 3503. You can reach MacroFacts by calling 415-863-4409.

•	CompuServe: To reach the Macromedia forum on CompuServe, use the command Go Macromedia. On CompuServe, we provide message areas for discussion of multimedia development and support of our products, as well as libraries that contain useful utilities and examples—including drivers, models, DLLs, and XCMDs.

•	Microsoft Network: To reach the Macromedia forum on Microsoft Network, use the command Goto Macromedia. On Microsoft Network, we provide message areas for discussion of multimedia development and support of our products, as well as libraries that contain useful utilities and examples—including drivers, models, DLLs, and XCMDs.

MacroFacts

Macromedia's 24-hour fax information line, providing instant access to Macromedia's products and services. You can reach MacroFacts by calling 415-863-4409.

If you're looking for assistance by fax or phone internationally, please contact the vendor or the distributor from which you acquired Director.

For additional help, contact the Macromedia office in your area:

•	Macromedia Europe (including Europe, the Middle East, and Africa)

Pyramid House
East Hampstead Road
Bracknell
Berkshire
England
United Kingdom RG12 1NS
44.1.344.458.600
44.1.344.458.666(fax)

•	Macromedia Japan

2F Deer Plaza Akasaka
4-3-28 Akasaka
Minato-ku
Tokyo 107
Japan
81.3.4463-1980
81.3.4463-1990 (fax)

•	Macromedia Asia Pacific

9 Minto St
East Kew, Victoria
Australia 3102
61 3 9859 8325
61 3 9859 4162 (fax)

•	For Pacific and Latin America

Macromedia
600 Townsend Street
San Francisco, CA 94103
U.S.A
415-252-2267
415-626-0554 (fax)


Overview
Overview of FreeHand 8 Help

•	 New Features

•	 Using Help


How To
How To:

The How To help provides procedural information for accomplishing certain tasks in FreeHand.

•	 Text

•	 Drawing

•	 Colors

•	 Importing and Exporting

•	 Organizing

•	 Printing


Panels

Object Inspector	Toolbox
Stroke Inspector	Main toolbar
Fill Inspector	Text toolbar
Text Inspector
Document Inspector	Operations panel
	Xtra Tools panel
Color List
Color Mixer	Align panel
Tint panel	Transform panel
Halftones panel	Layers panel
Info bar	Styles panel


File   Edit   View   Modify   Text   Xtras   Window   Help

Alphabetical list of menu commands


Reference Menu
Reference

Menus

File   Edit   View   Modify   Text   Xtras   Window   Help

Or browse the alphabetical list of menu commands

Panels

Object Inspector	Toolbox
Stroke Inspector	Main toolbar
Fill Inspector	Text toolbar
Text Inspector
Document Inspector	Operations panel
	Xtra Tools panel
Color List
Color Mixer	Align panel
Tints panel	Transform panel
Halftones panel	Layers panel
Info bar	Styles panel
Tools

3D Rotation tool	Freehand tool	Rotate tool
Arc tool	Freeform tool	Roughen tool
Bend tool	Graphic Hose tool	Scale tool
Bezier Pen tool	Knife tool	Shadow tool
Bezigon tool	Line tool	Skew tool
Calligraphic Pen tool	Magnification tool	Smudge tool
Chart tool	Mirror tool	Spiral tool
Ellipse tool	Pointer tool	Text tool
Emboss tool	Polygon tool	Trace tool
Eyedropper tool	Reflect tool	Variable Stroke tool
Fisheye Lens tool	Rectangle tool
Focus

•	 Text

•	 Drawing

•	 Layout

•	 Printing

•	 Web Graphics

File formats

•	 AutoCAD DXF

•	Adobe Illlustrator (AI)

•	 Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

•	 BMP

•	 CorelDRAW (CDR)

•	 CGM

•	 DCS2 EPS

•	 Extended Metafile (EMF)

•	 EPS

•	 GIF

•	 HPGL graphics

•	 JPEG

•	 Macromedia Flash (SWF)

•	 Micrografx DRW

•	 PICT, PICT2

•	PDF

•	 PNG

•	 Targa (TGA)

•	 TIFF

•	 xRes LRG

Shortcuts

•	 Menus

•	 General

•	 Panels and tools

•	 Drawing

•	 Text

•	 Constraining


Scripting Menu
Macromedia Scripting

Use Macromedia Scripting to automate complex tasks. Scripts for FreeHand are created and compiled in the MCS script editor, and then placed in the FreeHand 8 > English > Xtras folder.

Use Macromedia Scripting in FreeHand to automate batch file conversion, batch printing, and batch selection.

To use a script

1	Make sure that the Macromedia Scripting Engine was installed when you installed FreeHand.

If you chose Typical when you installed FreeHand, the Scripting Engine is installed. If you chose another installation option, uninstall FreeHand, then reinstall with Macromedia scripting included.

2	Check the General > “Enable Java™ Scripts (relaunch to apply)” preference and quit and relaunch FreeHand.

3	Place scripts created with the Macromedia Script Editor in the FreeHand 8 > Xtras .

Macromedia scripts will appear as menu items in the Xtras menu.

The Macromedia Script Editor and useful scripts for FreeHand are located under the FreeHand section of Macromedia’s web site (http://www.macromedia.com).


Troubleshooting Menu
Troubleshooting

•	 Printing

•	 Tech Support

•	 Contacting Macromedia


File Menu

New

Open

Close

Save

Save As

Revert

Import

Export

Export Again

Report

Collect for Output

Printer Setup

Print

Preferences

Customize

Output Options

Send


Shortcuts

Toolbars


Edit Menu

Undo

Redo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Paste in Front

Paste Behind

Clear

Cut Contents

Paste Inside

Copy Attributes

Paste Attributes

Duplicate

Clone

Select

Find and Replace

External Editor

Links


Text

Graphics


View Menu

Fit Selection

Fit to Page

Fit All

Magnification

Custom

Preview

Fast Mode

Hide Selection

Show All

Preview

Toolbars

Panels

Page Rulers

Text Ruler

Grid

Guides

Snap to Point

Snap to Guides

Snap to Grid


Modify Menu

Object

Stroke

Fill

Text

Document

Transform

Arrange

Align

Align Again

Join

Split

Combine

Alter Path

Rasterize

Lock

Unlock

Group

Ungroup

Constrain


Text Menu

Font

Size

Style

Effect

Align

Leading

Convert Case

Special Characters

Editor

Spelling

Run Around Selection

Flow Inside Path

Attach to Path

Detach from Path

Remove Transforms

Convert to Paths


Xtras Menu

Repeat

Xtras Manager

Animate

Chart

Cleanup

Colors

Create

Delete

Distort

Other

Path Operations


Window Menu

New Window

Toolbars

Inspectors

Panels

Xtras


Main

Text

Toolbox

Status

Info

Customize


Layers

Styles

Color List

Color Mixer

Tints

Halftones

Align

Transform


Object Inspector

Stroke Inspector

Fill Inspector

Text Inspector

Document Inspector


Operations

Set Note

URL Editor

Xtra tools


Alphabetical list of menu commands

Align	Magnification
Align (Text)	New
Align Again	Object
Alter Path	Open
Arrange	Output Options
Attach to Path	Page Rulers
Clear	Page Setup
Clone	Paste Attributes
Close	Paste Behind
Combine	Paste Inside
Constrain	Paste
Convert to Paths	Preferences
Copy Attributes	Preview
Copy	Print
Cut	Redo
Cut Contents	Remove Transforms
Detach from Path	Report
Document	Revert
Duplicate	Run Around Selection
Editor	Save As
Effect	Save
Export	Select
Fill	Size
	Snap to Grid
Fit All	Snap to Guides
Fit Selection	Snap to Point
Fit to Page	Special Characters
Flow Inside Path	Spelling
Font	Split
Grid	Stroke
Group	Style
Guides	Text Ruler
Import	Text
Info Bar	Toolbars
Join	Transform
Leading	Undo
Links	Ungroup
Lock	Unlock


How To: Text

Click on a line below for information on specific tasks.

How do I:

 Enter text?

 Change the size of a text block?

 Use tabs?

 Change paragraph spacing and formatting?

 Create multiple columns or rows in a text block?

 Use paragraph styles?

 Find and replace words or strings of text?

 Check spelling of a document?

 Edit text that is hard to read on screen?

 Import text?

 Export text?

 Attach text to a path?

 Change text into an editable graphic?

 Wrap text around graphics?


How To: Drawing

Click on a line below for information on specific tasks.

How do I:

 Change the characteristics of a point?

 Draw a single, straight line?

 Draw a square or rectangle?

 Draw a polygon?

 Draw a circle or ellipse?

 Draw a freehand path?

 Draw a precise path based on points?

 Draw a path based straight line segments?

 Change the direction of a path?

 Cut a path in two?

 Connect endpoints of a path?

 Draw an arc?

 Trim an object in the shape of another object?

 Create an object based on the overlapping areas of two or more other objects?

 Draw a spiral?

 Combine multiple objects into a single object?

 Create a shadow effect on an object?

 Rotate an object in three dimensions?

 Rotate an object?

 Resize an object?

 Create a mirror image of an object?

 Create a clipping path for an object?

 Distort an object in a bubble shape?


How To: Colors

Click on a line below for information on specific tasks.

How do I:

 Add and store colors for use with a document?

 Create a new color?

 Apply color to a path?

 Fill an object with a color?

 Create a smooth transition between multiple colors?

 Adjust the colors of the screen to look more like the printed document?

 Add colors from a bitmap image to the Color List?

 Modify specific color values of all the colors in the document at once?

 Darken all the colors in the document at once?

 Lighten all the colors in the document at once?


How To: Importing and Exporting

Click on a line below for information on specific tasks.

How do I:

 Import a file created by another application?

 Manage a linked graphic?

 Import or export PDF documents?

 Trace a bitmap image?

 Convert FreeHand graphics to a bitmap format?

 Create a mask in exported bitmap images?


How To: Organizing

Click on a line below for information on specific tasks.

How do I:

 Group objects?

 Turn on a grid to help align objects?

 Create non-printing guides?

 Precisely align objects?

 Use layers in a document?

 Use styles to simplify editing?

 Name or attach notes to objects?


Click on a category of new features:

•	 New Interface Features

•	 New Editing Features

•	 New Color Features

•	 New Printing Features

•	 New Import / Export Features


How To
Select a category:

•	 Text

•	 Drawing

•	 Colors

•	 Importing and Exporting

•	 Organizing


File formats

AutoCAD DXF

Adobe Illlustrator (AI)

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

BMP

CorelDRAW (CDR)

CGM

DCS2 EPS

Extended Metafile (EMF)

EPS

GIF

HPGL graphics

JPEG

Macromedia Flash (SWF)

Micrografx DRW

PICT, PICT2

PDF

PNG

Targa (TGA)

TIFF

xRes LRG


Troubleshooting

Contacting Tech Support

Printing


Tools

Click on a tool below for more information:

3D Rotation tool	Freehand tool	Rotate tool
Arc tool	Freeform tool	Roughen tool
Bend tool	Graphic Hose tool	Scale tool
Bezier Pen tool	Knife tool	Shadow tool
Bezigon tool	Line tool	Skew tool
Calligraphic Pen tool	Magnification tool	Smudge tool
Chart tool	Mirror tool	Spiral tool
Ellipse tool	Pointer tool	Text tool
Emboss tool	Polygon tool	Trace tool
Eyedropper tool	Reflect tool	Variable Stroke tool
Fisheye Lens tool	Rectangle tool


Web links

Visit Macromedia’s home page on the web for product updates, tips, and the latest information about Macromedia products.

Macromedia home page

http://www.macromedia.com


shortcutspop
Shortcuts

•	 Menus

•	 General

•	 Panels and tools

•	 Drawing

•	 Text

•	 Constraining


Shortcuts

•	 Menus

•	 General

•	 Panels and tools

•	 Drawing

•	 Text

•	 Constraining


FreeHand Help:

Text: Rocky Angelucci, Lori Grass, Stuart Manning, Randy Varnell

Graphics: Randy Varnell, Julie West

Editing: Stuart Manning, Randy Varnell, Monte Williams

Help Engineering: Randy Varnell

FreeHand Application Engineering: Keith Bottner, Scott Thompson

Entertainment: Sydney the puppy

Special thanks to: Samantha Seals-Mason, Kent Dowden, Anna Sturdivant, Robbie San Juan

© 1998 Macromedia, Inc.


Using Help
Using FreeHand Help

FreeHand Help is designed to provide quick and thorough reference while working in FreeHand.

Map button

When you launch FreeHand Help, a graphical image map appears in the help window. This graphic helps you find reference information more easily in the help system. Click an area of the graphic to jump directly to a topic or display a pop-up of sub-topics.

Contents button

Click the Contents button in the help window at any time to open a table of contents for the help system. Here, you may browse and open help topics sorted by category similar to the Using FreeHand manual.

Reference button

Click the Reference button to open a quick-access guide to specific help topics about FreeHand's menu items and elements of FreeHand's user interface.

Searching for information

If you cannot find what you are looking for by navigating through the Help Contents, FreeHand’s help provides two other methods for finding information:

Index

Click the Index button to open the help Index. Enter a word or phrase in the top entry field to search the index for related topics. Click on an entry in the bottom box to open a topic.

Find

Click the Index or Contents button, then choose the Find tab to open the help Find dialog box. Use the Find dialog box to search the entire help for any word or phrase.

Jumps and pop-ups

Click green, underlined text in the online help to jump to another topic.

Click green, dotted-underlined text to display a pop-up over the help window which provides a short definition of the underlined term.

Hypergraphics

Many of the graphic elements of the help have areas that you can click for more information. To find these areas, move the cursor over the graphic until the arrow becomes a pointing hand, then click to display the information.

Movie clips

Several help topics have mini-movies that show examples of a feature in use. Click the button on the lower-left corner of the movie window to play the movie.

Back button

Click the Back button on the top of the help window to go to the topic viewed immediately before the current topic.


Glossary

Click a glossary term to see a definition:

Active Illustration	Modifying an Object
Acute Obtuse	Moire Pattern
Additive Method	Nested Objects
Extensis Portfolio	Objects
Anti-aliasing	OLE Client
ASCII Format	OLE Embedding
Aspect Ratio	OLE Linking
Auto-expanding	OLE Server
Automatic Curvature	OLE
Baseline	Opacity
Bezier Curve	Open Path
Binary Format	OPI
Bitmap Image	Overflowed Text Block
Bitmap PICT Image	Overprint
Bleed	Path Direction
Bounding box	Path Guide
Calligraphy	Path
Cap	Percentage of Lightness
Center Justified Text	Percentage of Saturation
Clipboard	Pica
Clipping Path	PICT Image
Closed Path	Pixel
CMYK Color	Point Size
Color Models	Point (path)
Color Separations	Point (unit)
Composite Path	Portrait
Connector Point	Position of Color
Contents	PostScript
Corner Point	Power Duplicate
Corner Radius	Preview Mode
Counter	Printer font
Crop Mark	Process Color
Crop	Publish and Subscribe
Curve Handle	Publisher
Curve Point	Ragged Width
Dithering	RAM
Document Format	Rasterization
DPI	Reflection Axis
Drop cap	Registration Marks
Edition	Rendering
Em Dash	Resolution
Em Space	RGB
Em	Rich Text Format
En Dash	Right-Justified Text
En Space	Rule
En	Screen font
EPS	Screen Ruling
Even / Odd Fill	Skew
File Format	Snap Distance
Fill	Spacing
Filters	Split
First Line Indent	Spot Color
Fixed Point	Stacking Order
Flatness	Stochastic Screening
Flush Zone	Stroke
Font	Style
Fully Justified Text	Subpath
Greeked Type	Subscriber
Group	Subtractive Method
Guides	Tab Ruler
Halftone	Template Format
Handle	Text Block
Hanging Indent	Text Effects
Hexachrome	Thin Space
High Fidelity Color	TIFF Image
Initial Cap	Tile
Insertion Point	Tint
Intersect	Transform
Join	Undo
Kerning	Ungroup
Keyline Mode	Unit of Measurement
Knockout	Vector Graphic
Landscape	Vector PICT Image
Layer	Width
Leading	Winding Fill
Left Justified Text	Windows Bitmap
Mask	Word spacing
Misregistration	Wrapping Tab
Miter Limit	Zero Point


"Sydney" Revision History
“Sydney” Revision History

Version 2.1

Speak: Invokes the Random Bark Generator.

Sit up: Constrains Sit command to hind legs only.

Where’s Your Ball?: Causes unit to perform search for Xtras.

Version 2.0

Sit: Interrupts active processes, and preps unit for another command.

Lay Down: Pauses unit. Unit remains idle until a new command is entered.

Gimme’ Five: Causes unit to give instantaneous feedback to operator in the form of an extended appendage.

Roll Over: Unbalances unit, causing it to perform a single counter-clockwise rotation.

Version 1.0.1

NO!, Uh oh, and Bad Dog: Improved error catching.

Are you ready to go inside?: Gives user more control when unit is caught in a marking loop.

Outside?: Gives user more feedback before unit encounters potential trouble spots (usually on carpet.)

Special thanks to Brian Schmidt for assistance with Sydney QA.


Help Menu

Wizards


Show Me Movies

Understanding color models and FreeHand’s layers is essential to successful graphic design in FreeHand.

The FreeHand 8 CD-ROM contains two Show Me movies that explore these concepts and demonstrate activities that you will perform many times as you use FreeHand.

Using Color Main Menu:

•	Color Overview

•	Color Mixer

•	Color List

•	Working with Color

°	Mixing Colors

°	Adding Colors

°	Applying Colors

°	Tools and Xtras

Using Layers Main Menu:

•	What are Layers?

•	Modifying Layers

•	Viewing Layers

°	Layer Options

To watch a Show Me movie:

1	Insert the CD-ROM and open the CD-ROM folder.

2	Double-click the filename or icon to launch the movie.

°	Using Color.exe

°	Using Layers.exe

3	Click Menu to display the menu, where you can choose any of several topics.

4	Click Menu, Next, and Back to navigate. A small blinking dot leads you forward through the movie.

To close a Show Me movie:

Press Alt-F4.


Working with text blocks

Text blocks contain text, unless the text has been converted to paths.
Click and drag with the Pointer tool to move a text block.

To	Do this
Adjust word spacing (without changing kerning)	Alt-drag a side handle
Scale the text block and the text inside	Alt-drag a corner handle
Proportionally resize a text block	Shift-drag a corner handle
Tip	Work in Keyline mode to view deselected or empty text blocks.

Tip	To quickly remove all empty text blocks, choose Xtras > Delete > Empty Text Blocks.

For more precise control of text in a text block, use the Text Inspector.

Use the text ruler to set and align tabs.

Use styles to speed text editing and to easily edit or replace styles in multiple paragraphs.


Flowing text in between multiple text blocks or objects

Link text blocks to flow text from one text block to another or from a text block to an object, such as a path.
A linked object acquires text block attributes and retains these attributes even after deleting text from the object. Use the Object Inspector as well as the Text Inspector to format text linked to a path.

{bml linkedtext.bmp]

Tip	Use objects as text containers by either flowing text inside the object, or by linking a text block with overflow directly to the object, thus automatically flowing text into it.

Changes to selected text in a linked text block may affect text in other linked blocks. For example, if you enlarge the font size in one text block, text will reflow into the next block. Link any number of text blocks on a single page or across multiple pages.

Cutting or deleting a text block other than the first text block in a linked series does not delete the text itself. When pasting the cut text block, the text is a copy of the original text. After deleting a text block, the existing text reflows across the remaining text blocks.


To create a link between text containers

To break a link between text containers

To break a link between text containers and retain text placement

To delete empty text blocks


To create a link between text containers:

1	Create an empty text block or an object.

2	Select the Link box of a text block that has text overflow and drag the Link line to the inside of the empty text block or onto the object.

A black dot in the Link box indicates text overflow. Once objects are linked, text flows to the empty text block or onto the object.


To break a link between text containers:

1	Select the Link box of a text block.

2	Drag the link to an empty area of the document.

Text flows back into the last linked text block. Breaking links in the middle of a chain of text blocks leaves empty text blocks after the last linked block.


To break a link between text containers:
To break a link between text containers and retain text placement:

1	With the Text tool, select the text in the second text block and choose Edit > Cut.

2	Drag a Link line from the Link box of the first text block to an empty area in the document.

3	Place an insertion point in the second text block with the Text tool and choose Edit > Paste.

Text remains intact but is no longer linked. The first text block has an empty Link box indicating no text overflow and no link.


To delete empty text blocks:

1	Select the text block.

2	Press Delete, choose Edit > Clear, or double-click the Link box.

Since deselected text blocks are invisible in Preview mode, choose View > Preview or use Control - K to toggle to Keyline mode.

Or

To delete all the empty text blocks:

Choose Xtras > Delete > Empty Text Blocks.


Coloring text and text blocks

Apply color to text blocks as with other objects. There are two parts in any text block—the text and the container. Apply strokes and fills to each part independently.

Applying color to text

Applying color to text blocks

The Colors > “Color List shows” preference determines how the Color List Selectors behave with selected text blocks. When the preference setting is “Container color,” the Selectors display the stroke and fill attributes of selected text blocks. Dragging and dropping a color chip onto one of the Selectors changes the color of the text block, not the text. When the preference setting is “Text color,” the Selectors display the stroke and fill attributes of selected text.

Note	With text blocks selected and the Both Selector active, selecting colors in the Color List only affects the text fill color. The Both Selector is in the indeterminate state.


To apply a stroke to text characters

To apply a fill to text characters

To remove a color stroke or fill from text characters


To apply a stroke to text characters

1	Select text with the Text tool.

2	Drop a color chip onto the color well in the Basic Stroke Inspector or onto the Stroke Selector in the Color List.


To apply a fill to text characters

1	Select text with the Text tool.

2	Drop a color chip onto the selected text, the color well in the Fill Inspector, or the fill Selector in the Color List.

or

2	Drop a color chip onto the text to apply the color to all characters in the text block.


To remove a color stroke or fill from text characters

1	Select text with the Text tool.

2	Select None in the Stroke or Fill Inspector

or

2	Drop the None color chip onto the Stroke Selector or Fill Selector in the Color List.


To apply a stroke to a text block

To apply a fill to a text block

To remove a color from a text block


To apply a stroke to a text block

1	Select a text block.

2	Drop a color chip onto the color well in the Stroke Inspector.

With text selected, check the Display border option in the Object Inspector to view the stroked outline.


To apply a fill to a text block

1	Select a text block.

2	Drop a color chip onto an empty area in the text block or onto the color well in the Fill Inspector.


To remove a color from a text block

1	Select a text block.

2	Choose None from the Stroke or Fill Inspector.

or

2	Drop the None color chip onto the Stroke or Fill Selector on the Color List.


Working with tabs

Set and edit tabs using the text ruler and the Edit Tab dialog box.

Text Ruler

Use the text ruler to set or remove tabs.

•	Drag tab icons onto the ruler to set a tab.

•	Drag tab icons off of the text ruler to remove tabs.

Types of tabs

Left-aligned		Moves text horizontally to the tab and aligns it to the right of the tab mark
Right-aligned		Moves text horizontally to the tab and aligns it to the right of the tab mark
Center-aligned		Centers the line of text at the center tab
Decimal-aligned		Aligns numbers at decimal points
Wrapping		Creates a column inside a column of the text block Text aligns to the right of the first wrapping tab and flows between that wrapping tab and another wrapping tab or the right margin until you press Return.
Edit Tab dialog box

Double-click a tab to display the Edit Tab dialog box. Change tab alignment or position, and set a custom leader.

•	Alignment: Choose the type of tab.

•	Position: Enter the exact distance of the tab from the left margin.

•	Leader: Fill the space occupied by a tab with characters. Add leaders to any type of tab except wrapping tabs.

Setting indents

Drag markers to place left, right, and first line indents.


Handling Font Replacement

Replacing missing fonts

The Missing Fonts dialog box appears when FreeHand attempts to open or import a graphic containing fonts that are not installed on your system. From this dialog box, replace a missing font with a font installed on your system.

Choose	To
Replace	Replace missing fonts in the document that are not installed on your system. Select a replacement font and style from the Replace Font dialog box.
Select All	Select all of the missing fonts in the Missing Fonts dialog box.
Cancel	Cancel the opening of the document.
OK	Open the document without replacing fonts. The replacement font is Arial.
Note	When FreeHand replaces fonts, the text of the replaced font loses all its manual kerning data.

Cross-platform problems

Fonts may need to be respecified each time you transfer a document from platform to another, especially if the original fonts are not available on the other platform, or if the fonts have different names. Macromedia Fontographer can create compatible versions of fonts for Macintosh and Windows.

Automatic font substitution

The Missing Font dialog box does not appear if you use Adobe Type Manager’s (ATM) font substitution feature. Instead, a temporary substitution occurs when the document is opened. ATM automatically applies the missing font’s metrics and weight to a multiple master font, and it marks the font name with a diamond in the font menu. Line breaks and word spacing are preserved, but the subtleties of the letterforms are lost. If you are concerned about typography, open the ATM control panel and deselect Substitute for missing fonts when you open the file.

  Related Topics


Setting paragraph spacing and adding rules

To enhance page layout, use space or page ornaments to create visual breaks between paragraphs.

Insert paragraph spacing to add space above or below paragraphs
Apply indents to create paragraph margins between text and the left or right edges of a column or a text block
Apply paragraph rules or lines below paragraphs for a stronger visual break


To add spacing above and below a paragraph

1	Place an insertion point and display the Text Paragraph Inspector.

2	Enter values in the Above and Below entry fields.

The larger the value entered, the greater the amount of space between the paragraph and the one above or below it.


To create paragraph margins

1	Place an insertion point.

2	Enter values in the Left and Right entry fields in the Text Paragraph Inspector.

Positive numbers place text inside the column or text block, and negative numbers place text outside the column or text block.

3	Enter a value in the First entry field to set the distance between the first line of text and the left margin of the paragraph.

Note	The values in the Indents entry fields reflect the unit of measurement for the document.


To apply and edit paragraph rules

1	Place an insertion point.

2	Choose a style from the Rules pop-up in the Text Paragraph Inspector.

°	Choosing Centered places a rule that is centered in the column or text block.

°	Choosing Paragraph applies a rule of the same alignment as the paragraph above it.

3	Choose Edit from the Rules pop-up to display the Paragraph Rule Width dialog box.

4	Enter a percentage value and choose an option from the pop-up.

°	Choosing Last line sizes the rule to fit a percentage of the last line in a paragraph.

°	Choosing Column sizes the rule to fit a percentage of the width of the column.

5	Select the text block.

6	Apply a stroke using the Stroke Inspector to display the paragraph rules and uncheck Display border in the Object Inspector.

A paragraph rule flows with its paragraph, and it is centered vertically in the space below the paragraph.


Setting paragraph alignment
Setting advanced paragraph alignment

To precisely control how paragraphs align and to fine-tune the length of lines of justified text, use the following: hanging punctuation, ragged width, and flush zone.

Check Hang punctuation to vertically align text to text rather than text to punctuation marks.
Ragged width specifies the minimum distance non-justified text spreads over a column and is expressed as a percentage of the column’s width.
Flush zone is a special type of ragged width—it specifies the justification of the last line of a paragraph. As with ragged width, the flush zone value is a percentage of the column’s width.


To add hanging punctuation to selected paragraphs
To apply hanging punctuation to selected paragraphs

1	Select text or text blocks.

2	Check Hang punctuation in the Text Paragraph Inspector to position punctuation marks outside the text block margins.

Text now aligns independently of the following punctuation marks: ‘ ’ “ “ . , ; : ‘ «


To adjust ragged width for selected paragraphs
To adjust ragged width in selected paragraphs

1	Select text or text blocks.

2	Click the Edit button in the Text Character Inspector to display the Edit Alignment dialog box.

The Edit button is the one to the right of the alignment buttons.

3	Enter a percentage value in the Ragged width entry field and click OK.

Entering a value of 95 forces a line of non-justified text to fill 95% of the column’s width when the line’s original width is less than 95%. The last line of a paragraph and lines that already meet or exceed 95% of the column’s width remain unchanged.

Entering a value of 100 creates text that aligns at both the left and right margins of the column or text block.


To adjust flush zone for justified text

1	Select text or text blocks.

2	Click the Edit button in the Text Character Inspector to display the Edit Alignment dialog box.

3	Enter a percentage value in the Flush zone entry field and click OK.

For example, if justified text has a flush zone value of 50, then the last line of that paragraph justifies to the ragged width distance only if the last line’s length meets or exceeds 50% of the column’s width.

To force the last line of a paragraph to justify or match the ragged width setting no matter how short it is, set the flush zone value to 0 (zero).


Paragraph Columns and Rows
Columns and Rows

Use the Columns and Rows panel of the Text Inspector to set and adjust the appearance of columns and rows of text.

•	To create a column

•	To create rows

•	To add rules between columns and rows


To create columns
To create columns:

1	Place an insertion point or select a text block.

2	Enter the number of columns in the Columns entry field in the Columns and Rows panel of the Text Inspector.

3	Enter precise values in the Height and Spacing entry fields.

4	Press Return to apply column settings.

Note	When entering text, choose Text > Special Characters > End of Column to insert a character that automatically moves text to the top of the next column.


To create rows
To create rows:

1	Place an insertion point or select a text block.

2	Display the Columns and Rows panel of the Text Inspector and enter the number of rows in the Rows entry field.

3	Enter precise values in the Width and Spacing entry fields.

4	Press Return to apply row settings.


To add rules between columns and rows
To add rules between columns and rows:

1	Place an insertion point or select a text block.

2	Choose a rule style from the Rules pop-up in the Text Columns and Rows Inspector.

When choosing Inset, the rules end at the edge of the space set between columns and rows. When specifying a text block inset in the Object Inspector, rules end when they reach those margins.

3	Display the Stroke Inspector and apply a stroke to the text block.

Uncheck Display border in the Object Inspector to hide the border of the text block.

4	Press Return to apply rules settings.

Click a Flow button in the Text Columns and Rows Inspector to specify whether text flows from top to bottom or from left to right.


Copyfitting text

Use the Text > Adjust Columns Inspector to copyfit text to fill columns.

Balance text evenly among columns
Modify leading to fill columns with text
Alter text size and leading proportionally to fit the selected text block


To balance lines of text evenly among columns

1	Place an insertion point or select a text block.

2	Check Balance in the Text Adjust Columns Inspector to distribute lines of text among columns.

An odd number of lines results in one less line in the last column.


To modify leading so text fills the column from top to bottom

1	Place an insertion point or select a text block.

2	Check Modify leading in the Text Adjust Columns Inspector.

3	Enter a value in the Threshold % entry field to ignore column heights less than a certain percentage.

For example, entering a leading of 50 does not change in columns less than 50% full. This prevents a large amount of leading applied to only a few lines.


To alter text size and leading with Copyfit %

1	Place an insertion point or select a text block.

2	Enter minimum and maximum limits for text sizing in the Copyfit % category in the Text Adjust Columns Inspector.

Text and leading reduce or enlarge as much as— but no more than—the values set. A value of 100 does not change text.


Creating tables and forms

To create a table, choose a method based on the size of the cells in the table.

•	Columns and rows—Use when all cells in the table are of a uniform height and width.

•	Tabs and paragraph rules—Use when table cells have different heights and widths.


To create a table using columns and rows

To create a table using tabs and paragraph rules


To create tables from columns and rows

1	Create a text block.

2	Specify coordinates for the text block’s width and height in the Dimensions entry fields in the Object Inspector, check Display border, and press Return.

3	With the text block selected, specify the number of columns and rows and the space between them in the Text Columns and Rows Inspector, and press Return.

Entering values in the entry fields for column height and row width may scale the text block.

4	Choose Full width column and row rules from the Rules pop-ups.

5	To make the rules and the text block border appear, use the Stroke Inspector to apply a stroke to the text block.

Uncheck Display border in the Object Inspector to hide the border of the text block.

6	With the Text tool, place an insertion point in the first cell in the table and enter text.

Move to the next cell or choose Text > Special Characters > End of Column.

To direct text flow, click a Flow button in the Text Adjust Columns Inspector.


To create tables using tabs and paragraph rules

1	Drag with the Text tool to create a text block the size of the table.

2	Drag and drop tabs to set the beginning and end of columns and enter text.

Drag and drop left-aligned tabs to define the left edge of each column. Place an insertion point at the column’s beginning and press Tab. Apply wrapping tabs at the left and right edges of columns that contain more than one line of text.

3	To change the distance between rows, select text and enter values for Paragraph spacing in the Above and Below entry fields in the Text Paragraph Inspector.

4	Choose from the Rules pop-ups in the Text Columns and Rows Inspector to add lines below rows or columns.

5	To make the rules and the text block border appear, apply a stroke to the text block with the Stroke Inspector, and check Display border in the Object Inspector.

6	To begin a new column, insert a tab on the text ruler to define the edge of the column. To begin a new row, press Return.

Tip	To create a form, follow the procedures for creating a table, but leave spaces blank.


 Working with inline graphics

An inline graphic is any object pasted into a text block. The inline graphic becomes a text character, responding to text flow and modification like standard text. It has a point size equal to its original height. FreeHand frames the inline graphic with a bounding box, which acts as the border between the graphic and the text.

To place an inline graphic

1	Cut or copy an object.

2	Place an insertion point in an existing text block and paste the object.

To remove an inline graphic

1	Highlight the inline graphic with the Text tool, and cut or delete it.

Inline graphics retain their original graphic attributes when placed in a text block. Operations altering strokes and fills do not affect inline graphics. For example, when applying a color to text, the text displays the new color but the inline graphic remains unchanged.

To use text blocks or text attached to paths as inline graphics, group them before pasting them in the destination text block. Otherwise, the text appears as individual characters when pasted.

Transforming inline graphics

Applying a Transform function—Move, Rotate, Scale, Skew, or Reflect—to an inline graphic affects the entire text block. Transform the inline graphic before pasting it in the text block for the graphic to retain its assigned attributes. An inline graphic pasted into a transformed text block assumes the text’s transformation.


Positioning inline graphics

Editing text and text attributes of inline graphics

To edit a paragraph style without altering inline graphics


To place an inline graphic
 Positioning inline graphics

After selecting an inline graphic and the surrounding text, use the Text menu, Text Inspectors, or Text toolbar to adjust the leading, horizontal scale, range kerning, and baseline shift.

•	Leading—By default, FreeHand places the bottom of an inline graphic even with the baseline of text and adjusts the leading at the insertion point to accommodate the graphic’s height.

•	Kerning—An inline graphic joins the text character immediately following it. Applying a negative kerning value moves text closer to the graphic. Applying a positive value moves text farther away from the graphic.

•	Baseline shift—Initial caps are even with the baseline of the first line of text. Applying a negative baseline shift moves the inline graphic below the baseline of the surrounding text; applying a positive baseline shift moves it above the baseline of the surrounding text.

°	To create an initial cap, paste an object inside a text block at the beginning of a paragraph.

°	To create a drop cap or a graphic bullet, paste an object inside a text block and enter a negative baseline shift to align the top of the graphic with the baseline of text.

•	Text wrap—Text wraps flush with the graphic’s left edge, leaving a slight space at the right edge, with respect to the inline graphic’s bounding box.

To modify text wrap, apply Standoff values to the inline graphic. To apply Standoff values with the graphic in the text block, select the inline graphic and choose Edit from the Effects pop-up in the Text Character Inspector to display the Run Around Selection dialog box. Enter values.

•	Graphic along a path—To flow a graphic along a path, paste an object at the insertion point of text on a path.


 Editing text and text attributes of inline graphics

An inline graphic appears in the Text Editor as a black dot. The black dot acts only as a placeholder when editing text.

The following are editable attributes of an inline graphic:

•	point size

•	paragraph spacing

•	word and letter spacing

•	baseline shift

•	alignment

•	leading

•	horizontal scale.

Changing the font or type style or applying a text effect does not affect the inline graphic.

When adding an inline graphic to a paragraph, a plus sign (+) appears next to the name of the assigned paragraph style in the Styles panel to indicate an override. Removing this override reduces or enlarges the inline graphic proportionally to match the font size specified in the style. After applying the style, changing the font size of the graphic only approximates its original size.


To place an inline graphic
 To edit a paragraph style without altering inline graphics

1	Deselect all objects.

2	Select a style name on the Styles panel.

3	Choose Edit from the Options pop-up in the Styles panel to display the Edit Style dialog box, change the settings, and click OK.

The new settings apply to the text in the text block, but not to the inline graphic.


Importing and exporting text files

RTF text files retain text formatting of the original document while ASCII text files do not. Choose File > Import to import ASCII text files (TXT in Windows) or RTF files. Choose File > Export to export documents as RTF or ASCII text files.

To import text files:

1	Choose File > Import to display the Import Document dialog box.

2	Choose the file to import and click Open.

In Windows, choose ASCII Text (.txt) or RTF Text (.rtf) from the Files of type pop-up.

3	Click or click and drag in the document to place the imported text.

Click to place the text file at its original size. Click and drag to scale. Once imported, edit as any other text.

Replacing missing fonts upon import

When importing an RTF file containing fonts not installed on your computer, the Missing Fonts dialog box box appears, prompting the selection of installed fonts and text styles to replace the missing ones.

To export text-only files:

1	Choose File > Export to display the Export dialog box. Name and choose a location for the text file.

2	Choose ASCII text or RTF text from the Save as type pop-up, and click Export.

All the text from the document exports. Text blocks appear in the text file according to their stacking order—from back to front. Text in linked text blocks exports in order.

Note	In addition, use Drag and Drop to import and export text to and from FreeHand. The destination application must support Drag and Drop. To import small amounts of text, use the Clipboard.

Exporting text with inline graphics

Adhere to the following guidelines to successfully export text containing inline graphics from FreeHand for use with other applications:

•	FreeHand supports exporting text with inline graphics only when saving the file in FreeHand’s anti-aliased PICT image format (Macintosh), in any EPS export format (except Photoshop EPS format), or in any of the bitmap formats (BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TARGA, LRG, and TIFF).

When exporting a file containing text with inline graphics to a file format that does not support them, black dots replace the inline graphics in the exported file.

•	To save a file in the available Adobe Illustrator¨, Photoshop EPS, or FreeHand 3.x, 4.x, or 5.0 export formats, convert the text with inline graphics to paths prior to export. Otherwise, when exporting text blocks to one of these previous versions of FreeHand, inline graphics appear as black dots.


Adjusting leading

Leading in FreeHand is calculated from the baseline of one line of text to the baseline of the next. When assigning leading from the Text menu, choose Solid to set leading equal to the type size of the text and choose Auto to set the leading to 120% of the type size of the text. Choose Text > Leading > Other to display the Leading dialog box. Three options appear in this dialog box as well as in the Leading pop-up in the Text Character Inspector and the Text Toolbar:

•	Extra—This option increases the standard leading, measured in points. The total leading equals the point size of the type plus the extra leading specified. Choose  from the Leading pop-up in the Text Character Inspector or the Text Toolbar.

•	Fixed—This option sets the leading to the exact point size specified. Choose = from the Leading pop-up in the Text Character Inspector or the Text Toolbar.

•	Percentage—This option measures a percentage of the point size of the type. Standard leading is 120%. For example, using 10-point type and entering 120 as the percentage yields a leading of 12 points. Choose % from the Leading pop-up in the Text Character Inspector or the Text Toolbar.


Adjusting kerning and range kerning

Kerning refers to the space between two letters. Range kerning refers to the letter spacing across a range of characters. To kern precisely, select text and enter values in the entry fields in the Text Character Inspector. Each kind of kerning value is a percentage of an em space, which is the space equal to the width of a typeface’s point size. Positive values increase spacing; negative values decrease spacing.

To adjust space between two characters:

1	Click between two characters with the Text tool.

2	Enter a percentage value in the Kerning entry field in the Text Character Inspector and press Return.

To adjust space between a range of characters (range kerning):

1	Select a range of characters with the Text tool.

2	Do one of the following to range kern:

°	Enter a percentage value in the Range kerning entry field in the Text Character Inspector and press Return.

°	Hold down Control-Alt and press the right or left cursor keys. The right key increases kerning and the left key decreases kerning, each by one percent of an em.


Shifting the text baseline

Use the Baseline shift entry field in the Text Character Inspector to shift text upward (superscript) or downward (subscript) in relation to the baseline of the text. Special characters like ¨ and © usually appear shifted above the rest of the text.

To shift the baseline:

1	Select text with the Text tool.

2	Enter a value in the Baseline shift entry field in the Text Character Inspector and press Return.

Enter a positive number to shift the baseline of the text upward or enter a negative number to shift it downward.

Alternatively, use Control-Alt and press the up or down cursor keys to apply a baseline shift.

Tip	To create footnotes and superscript special characters like © and ª, select the text and reduce the type size.


Hyphenation

Click the Hyphenate Edit button in the Text Paragraph Inspector to display a dialog box of variables used when hyphenating paragraphs. Choose the current dictionary from a pop-up list of installed language dictionaries. With Hyphenate checked, FreeHand applies hyphenation according to the selected dictionary.

To set the limit for consecutive hyphens within a paragraph, enter a number in the Consecutive hyphens entry field. Check Skip capitalized words to prevent hyphenation of capitalized words. To override hyphenation in selected text, check Inhibit hyphens in selection. To prohibit hyphenation altogether, uncheck Hyphenate.

To set hyphenation points manually, choose Text > Special Characters > Discretionary Hyphen, or use Control-Shift-[hyphen]. With selected paragraphs, check Hyphenate to turn on hyphenation on a per-paragraph basis.


Main Toolbar

The Main Toolbar provides quick access to the most commonly used features in FreeHand.

Choose Window > Toolbars > Main to show or hide the Main Toolbar.

The Main Toolbar contains the following buttons:

 	New

Open

 	Save

 	Import

 	Print

Undo

 	Redo

 	Cut

 	Copy

 	Paste

 	Find Graphics

 	Align

 	Group

 	Ungroup

 	Join

 	Split

 	Lock

 	Unlock

Object Inspector

 	Transform panel

 	Color List

 	Color Mixer

 	Layers panel

 	Help


Text Toolbar

The Text Toolbar provides quick access to the most commonly used tools for editing text.

Choose Window > Toolbars > Text to show or hide the Text Toolbar.

The Text Toolbar contains the following buttons:

 	Font pop-up

 	Style pop-up

 	Size pop-up

 	Leading pop-up

 	Align left button

 	Align center button

 	Align right button

 	Justify button

 	Flow Inside Path

 	Attach to Path

 	Detach from Path

 	Convert to Paths


Bitmap Export Defaults

Use the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box to select the default setting for exporting bitmap images.

FreeHand can export several bitmap formats using MIX.

Opening the Bitmap Export Defaults dialog box

Open the Bitmap Export Defaults Dialog box in one of two ways:

•	Choose File > Export, choose a bitmap file type, and click Settings in the Export dialog box.

•	Choose File > Preferences > Import / Export and click Bitmap Export.

  Related Topics


Image edit dialog
Image Edit dialog box

Use the Image Edit dialog box to adjust the gray levels of an imported grayscale bitmap image.

Image Edit dialog box options

Click an element below for more information:

Note	Modifications do not affect the original saved image. Instead, modifications are applied to the image in FreeHand as it displays and prints.

  Related Topics


How to modify a grayscale bitmap image

1	Select a grayscale bitmap image.

2	In the Object Inspector, click Edit.

This opens the Image Edit dialog box.

3	Make adjustments in the Image edit dialog box.

°	Adjust individual levels of gray by clicking and dragging the bars up and down.

°	Apply one of four preset adjustments by clicking on its thumbnail.

°	Change the overall brightness or contrast by clicking the appropriate scroll arrows.

4	Click Apply to apply the changes to the bitmap. Click Revert to restore the bitmaps original gray levels.

5	Click OK.


Click to close the dialog box and apply the settings.


Click to choose one of four preset adjustments for lightness and contrast.


Click to reset the settings to their default settings.


Click to apply changes without exiting the dialog box.


Click to close the dialog box and cancel any changes.


Move the slider to adjust the difference in color between light and dark colors.


Move individual bars to adjust specific gray levels.


Move the slider to make the entire image lighter or darker.


Arrowhead Editor dialog
Arrowhead Editor dialog box

Use the Arrowhead Editor dialog box to create and save custom arrowheads.

Click an element below for more information:


Click to activate the Pointer tool while in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Click to activate the Bezigon tool while in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Click to activate the Rotation tool while in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Click to activate the Reflect tool while in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Click to activate the Scale tool while in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Click to activate the Skew tool while in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Use this pop-up to change the view magnification of the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Arrowhead Editor pasteboard: Use the Arrowhead Editor tools to draw and edit the arrowhead on this pasteboard.


Click to copy the contents of the Clipboard into the Arrowhead Editor pasteboard.


Click to copy selected items in the Arrowhead Editor pasteboard to the Clipboard.

These copied items may be pasted back in the Arrowhead Editor pasteboard or onto FreeHand’s pasteboard.


Click to undo the last action performed in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.

Note	While in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box, undo does not apply to the document.


Click to redo the last undo performed in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.

Note	While in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box, redo does not apply to the document.


Click to delete objects selected in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.

Note	While in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box, cut does not apply to the document.


Click to turn on a Grid in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Check to close a selected open path in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Check to fill the selected, closed path in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.


Check to turn on the stroke for paths drawn in the Arrowhead Editor dialog box.

Checking Stroked enables Cap and Join settings.


Info bar

The Info bar provides feedback for selected objects, depending on object type and current action.

Such feedback includes the object type, the position of the cursor, the change in an object’s position, the angle, the center of rotation, the radius, and the number of sides.

Choose Window > Toolbars > Info to show or hide the Info bar.


Status bar

The Status bar contains the Magnification pop-up, page selector buttons, Page View pop-up, View pop-up, and Units pop-up. In addition, the Status bar displays status messages on the task in progress, the menu item highlighted, or tool selected.


Customizing Shortcuts

Use the Shortcuts panel in the Customize dialog box to change current keyboard shortcuts or to assign shortcuts to commands that have no shortcuts.

Note	To keep all default FreeHand 8 shortcuts intact, click the plus (+) button next to the Keyboard shortcuts setting field and specify a custom shortcut group name before changing any shortcuts.


To assign a custom shortcut

To remove a shortcut

Managing shortcut settings

Printing a shortcut quick reference card


To assign a custom shortcut:

1	Choose File > Customize > Shortcuts.

2	Scroll the Commands list and click the triangles (Macintosh) or plus (+) signs (Windows), if necessary, to find the command to which you want to assign a new shortcut.

The Commands list replicates all FreeHand menus, plus some additional features. If the command is not in a FreeHand menu, click Other.

Note	With the exception of the Xtras Manager and the Repeat Xtra command, Xtras are not available for shortcuts.

3	Click the command name.

The command description appears in the Description field. If the command already has a shortcut, it appears in the Current shortcut keys field. A command can have more than one shortcut, although only one appears in the menu.

4	Press Tab or click in the Press new shortcut key field to prepare to assign the shortcut.

5	Press the key or keys that make up the new shortcut sequence.

The shortcut appears in the Press new shortcut key field. If the shortcut is assigned to a command already, the command appears under “Currently assigned to,” in the center of the dialog box.

6	Click Assign to assign the new shortcut to the specified command.

Clicking Assign disables any previous assignment for the shortcut. When Go to conflict on assign is checked, the command to which the shortcut had been assigned is highlighted in the Commands field, ready to receive a new shortcut assignment.

7	Continue assigning shortcuts.

8	Save all shortcut assignments in the following ways:

•	Choose a new shortcut group from the Keyboard shortcut setting pop-up. See XX “Managing shortcut settings.”

•	Click Close to confirm the new shortcut assignments.

To revert to the previous shortcuts without saving the shortcuts you entered, press Reset.


To remove a shortcut:

1	Perform steps 1 through 3 under “To assign a custom shortcut.”

2	Click the shortcut in the Current shortcut keys field.

3	Click Remove.

4	Click Close or choose a new shortcut group to confirm the removal.


Managing shortcut settings

In addition to the default FreeHand 8 shortcut group, FreeHand provides the default shortcut groups for these applications in Windows:

•	CorelDRAW 7

•	QuarkXPress 3.3

•	Illustrator 7

•	Authorware 4

•	Photoshop 4

•	PageMaker 6

•	Director 6

To view and choose from available shortcut groups, use the Keyboard shortcuts setting pop-up.

When you assign a shortcut, it is queued to be saved in the current group. You can save shortcuts to more than one group before you click Close. However, switching to a new group saves all shortcut assignments to—and removals from—the previous group.

To create your own shortcut group, click the plus (+) button to the left of the Keyboard shortcuts setting field. Enter a unique file name, and then click OK.

To replicate a customized shortcut group on another computer, copy the file from one computer’s Settings > Keyboard folder (in the FreeHand 8 application folder) into the same folder on the other computer. The new group’s name appears in the Keyboard shortcuts setting pop-up. In Windows, the extension SET is added to shortcut group file; the extension is dropped from group names in the pop-up.


Printing a shortcut quick reference card

To print a shortcut quick-reference card, click Print on the Shortcuts panel, and then click Print on the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box.

Note	For a custom quick-reference card, click Save As. This produces a text file that can be opened in another application capable of converting text to a table and sorting by shortcuts, commands, or descriptions.


Customizing Toolbars

The form, location, and contents of the Main toolbar, Text toolbar, Toolbox, and Info bar are customizable. Also, the Status bar is customizable in Windows.


To customize toolbars from the Toolbars dialog box

Customizing toolbars without using the dialog box

To move a toolbar onto the pasteboard

To dock a floating toolbar onto the top or bottom toolbar area


To customize toolbars from the Toolbars dialog box:

1	Choose File > Customize > Toolbars.

2	Scroll the Commands list and click the triangles (Macintosh) or plus (+) signs (Windows), if necessary, to find the command whose button you want to place on a toolbar.

The Commands list replicates all FreeHand menus, plus some additional features. To locate a command quickly, type the first few letters of the command name. If the command is not on a FreeHand menu, click Other.

Note	With the exception of the Xtras Manager and the Repeat Xtra command, Xtras are not available for shortcuts.

3	Click the command to highlight the associated button, or click the button to highlight the command.

4	Drag the button from the dialog box to a specific location on a toolbar and drop it.

Existing buttons move to make room for the new button, if necessary.


Customizing toolbars without using the dialog box

To move any button from one toolbar to another, hold down Command (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) and drag the button to another location on a toolbar.

To remove the buttons from a toolbar, press and hold Command (Macintosh) or Atl (Windows) and drag the button away from the toolbar.

To duplicate a button for placement on more than one toolbar, hold down Option-Command (Macintosh) or Alt-Control (Windows) while dragging the button to the second location.

Note	Disabled buttons cannot be moved or deleted.


To move a toolbar onto the pasteboard:

1	Click and hold a toolbar handle.

2	Drag and drop the toolbar onto the pasteboard.

The toolbar becomes a resizable floating toolbar when dropped beyond the toolbar area.


To dock a floating toolbar onto the top or bottom toolbar area:

1	Click and hold the gray area on the floating toolbar.

2	Drag and drop the floating toolbar onto the top or bottom toolbar area.

3	The floating toolbar becomes a regular toolbar when dropped in the area above or below the pasteboard.

In Windows, when any toolbar is dragged within the toolbar area, the toolbar-arranging cursor is displayed, and the toolbar is highlighted.


FreeHand Clipart Viewer

Choose from hundreds of FreeHand clipart files using the FreeHand Clipart Viewer. Drag clipart previews from the Viewer directly into your FreeHand documents.

To use the Clipart Viewer:

1	Launch the FreeHand Clipart Viewer in the FreeHand 8 Folder.

2	Browse the clipart filenames in the directory, or scroll the previews in the viewer.

3	Drag the preview from the Viewer directory onto the Freehand docuement to import the clipart.

Drop a preview onto the FreeHand title bar or onto the gray application background to open the clipart as a new document.

To quit the Clipart Viewer, close the Clipart Viewer window.


Focus on Text
Click a portion of the graphic below for links to related information.


Inserting a graphic in a paragraph of text

Attaching text to a path


Attaching text to a path

Applying color to text

Adjusting spacing between words and letters


Entering text with the Text tool

Text block basics

Creating columns and rows

Paragraph alignment (left, right, center, justified)


Flowing text inside an object

Flowing text around an object

Applying text style (Plain, Bold, Italic, BoldItalic)

Text effects


Converting text to editable paths


Working with tabs

Paragraph spacing and margins

Advanced paragraph alignment

Hyphenation

Copyfitting

Creating tables and forms


Focus on Drawing
Click a portion of the graphic below for links to related information.


Drawing a freehanded path


Drawing calligraphic paths


Drawing variable width strokes


Creating polygons


Creating rectangles and squares


Creating circles and ellipses


Filling objects with colors

Creating color transitions with fills (Gradient fills)


Merging objects together (Union)


Custom distortion of objects (Envelope Xtra)


Creating a smudge effect


Converting text into editable graphics

Roughening paths


Using clipping paths to shape redefine object borders

Placing an object inside another object

Cropping objects


Blending between objects


Editing paths


Quickly place similar or identical objects (Graphic Hose)


Create complex mirror effects


Transparency and transparency effects

Splitting objects into separate objects according to their overlapping areas (Divide)


Creating an embossed effect


Focus on Layout
Click a portion of the graphic below for links to related information.


Using guides


Preview mode

Fast Preview

Managing imported images

Modifying image shapes with clipping paths


Setting page attributes


Speeding up redraw through using Keyline mode

Fast Keyline


Using paragraph styles

Setting paragraph attributes


Using a non-printing grid to align objects


Using paragraph styles

Setting paragraph attributes


Working with text blocks


Setting rules (lines) between columns and rows of text


Focus on Web Graphics
Use FreeHand's features to create graphics suitable for display on the web.

Bitmap web graphic features

GIF 89a Export: Export FreeHand art as a GIF, and set custom options for transparency, dithering, and the color palette used for the exported graphic.

JPEG Export: Export FreeHand art in the highly compressible JPEG image format.

PNG Export: Export FreeHand art in the highly compressible, lossless PNG image format.

Rasterize in place: Convert FreeHand vector objects to pixels without exporting.

Bitmap Image Export: Use additional options to control color depth, resolution, and anti-aliasing when exporting bitmap images.

Vector web graphic features

Export Flash 2 Graphics: Export FreeHand art in Macromedia Flash 2 format to display dynamic vector art on web pages.

Export Flash Animations: Export multiple layers from FreeHand as a Flash animation, suitable for display on web pages.

URL Editor: Attach URLs (web addresses) to FreeHand objects before exporting in the Flash format.

Other web graphic features

Web Safe Color Library: Choose colors from FreeHand's Web Safe color library when creating graphics for placement on web pages. The Web Safe Color Library features colors from the WEB216 color table commonly used for designing web graphics.

Import RGB Color Table: Import colors from Photoshop or xRes color tables and add them to FreeHand's Color List.

Photoshop 3 EPS: Export as Photoshop 3 EPS to open and rasterize your FreeHand document in Photoshop 3.

Photoshop 4 RGB EPS: Export as Photoshop 4 RGB EPS to open and rasterize your RGB FreeHand document in Photoshop 4 while maintaining a high level of color accuracy between FreeHand and Photoshop 4.


Focus on Printing
Printing from FreeHand is straightforward, even when you require high-resolution, professional quality output. Powerful, prepress capabilities include the following:

PPD (PostScript Printer Description) files : Associate the optimized print settings for a specific PostScript printer with a document.

UserPrep files: Work around the limitations of particular professional-quality output devices.

Print preview: View and adjust how a document will print.

Print settings: Customize print setup configurations.

Output options: Determine how the final document will export or print to a PostScript output device.

Printing PostScript files to disk: Generate PostScript files to give to your service provider.

Overprinting : Overprint the background instead of knocking out.

Document report: Generate a detailed description of the document.

Collect for Output: Gather all the external images and fonts necessary for printing your document and place them in a common location.

Scaling: Change horizontal and vertical scaling of your document when printing, leaving the original document unchanged.

DCS 2 support

Color management: Calibrate your computer to display colors as they will print.

Saveable Print Configurations: Save FreeHand print settings to reuse for future printing

Halftones : Use halftones to better represent smooth blends and color transitions at lower resolutions by converting them to patterns of dots.


Print Setup dialog box

Use the Print Setup dialog box to set detailed print options. Choose from preset configurations or create custom print settings and save them.

Click an element below for more information: